Tafsir LabMethodGitHubTürkçe

4. Sūrat al-Nisāʾ

The Qurʾān · Sūra 4: al-Nisāʾ · 176 verses · 70 sections

This commentary was written by Claude (Anthropic); it carries no religious authority and should be checked against the classical sources.

Jump to a verse

176 verses. Medinan. It takes its name from the density of rulings concerning women within it: ٱلنِّسَآء (al-nisāʾ) — "women".

This is the second-longest sūra in the Qurʾān and the most extensive legislative text after al-Baqara. It contains the shares of inheritance, the prohibitions of marriage, the settlement of disputes within the family, the protection of the orphan's property, the degrees of homicide, the performance of prayer in a state of war, migration, testimony and the order of the state. Nearly every question a community meets while building its own internal law appears here at least once.

But to read the sūra as a list of topics is to fail to understand it. The reading followed in this commentary is the following, and I record it as my own reading: Sūrat al-Nisāʾ is built from beginning to end on the right of the one who has no protection.

The people who enter the sūra's field of concern are these:

  • Orphans — children whose property is held by another and who have no voice (2-10, 127).
  • Women — the party whose bridal gift is taken from her, who is counted as inheritance instead of inheriting, and who is pressed when she is not wanted (4, 19-21, 32, 34-35, 127-130).
  • Those with a share in an estate — those left without their share being reckoned (7-12, 176).
  • Slaves and those under one's hand — placed last in the list of verse 36, but placed in the list (25, 36, 92).
  • Those left behind in waral-mustaḍʿafīna mina'l-rijāli wa'l-nisāʾi wa'l-wildān (75, 98, 127).
  • The stranded traveller, the neighbour, the companion — those who fall outside the tie of kinship (36).

And this thread is tied in the sūra's very first verse. The first verse names humankind as created from a single soul, and then ends thus:

وَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ ٱلَّذِى تَسَآءَلُونَ بِهِۦ وَٱلْأَرْحَامَ"Be mindful of God, in whose name you make requests of one another; and of the tie of kinship." (4/1)

The tie of kinship is set beside mindfulness of God. The rest of the sūra tells where that tie breaks and how it is to be held: in the division of an estate, in the orphan's property, at the moment of divorce, in the sending of arbitrators, in the sharing out after a battle.

I shall follow this tie through every block.

The name of the sūra — al-Nisāʾ

نِسَاء — the word has no singular; it is counted as the plural, from a different root, of imraʾa (woman). The lexicographers connect the word with the roots ن-س-و / ن-س-ي but do not agree on any settled derivation; nothing definite is said in this commentary about the origin of the word.

It must not be forgotten that the name was given later. Sūra names are not a claim of the text itself but a choice of the tradition. But the ground for choosing this name is in the text: the word occurs dozens of times in the sūra, it is the subject of a ruling in the third verse, it is one half of a balance of word order in the thirty-second, and it is the subject of a question in the hundred and twenty-seventh.

One other sūra in the Qurʾān is popularly called "the lesser al-Nisāʾ" (Sūrat al-Ṭalāq); this naming too comes from the tradition, not from the text itself.

One record is necessary: although the name of the sūra is "women", the sūra is not a "women's chapter". The verses concerning women are placed inside the discussion of the orphan's property and of inheritance — and this placement will be shown in detail below in the treatment of 4/2-3. What the sūra is concerned with is not a sex but the person whose right is in someone else's hands.

Its Medinan character and the historical frame

There is no disagreement that the sūra came down in the Medinan period, and the text itself supports this:

  • There are enforceable rulings such as the shares of inheritance, the prohibitions of marriage and the degrees of penalty (11-12, 23, 92, 176).
  • An arrangement for sending arbitrators is provided for (35): there is a mechanism that will decide and a community that will abide by it.
  • There is a state of war and an order for prayer within war (101-104).
  • Migration is named as something that has happened and is happening (89, 97-100).
  • A group that presents itself as Muslim while looking elsewhere is described in detail (60-63, 88-91, 138-145): this is meaningful only within a settled and strong community.
  • Reference is made to a judicial episode (105-113) and to a dispute after a battle (94).

It cannot be said that the whole of the sūra came down at one time. It is transmitted in the sources that the verses of inheritance belong to the aftermath of a battle and that some sections belong to later years; there is disagreement in the details, and datings I cannot give with certainty are not given in this commentary. What can be said is this: the sūra is the text of the period in which an established community was writing its own internal law.

A note on method regarding the narratives of the occasions of revelation

For many verses of this sūra the sources transmit detailed accounts of events: the widows and orphans left after a battle, a woman whose property was taken from her, an accusation of theft, a tribal dispute.

In this commentary those accounts are related in the language of "it is transmitted" and without naming persons. The reason is the rule of accuracy in the method (Method): to attach an event to particular people requires being sure of one's source. I write down no chain of attribution I am not sure of. And the frame needed to understand a verse is most often already in the verse's own wording.

The structure of the sūra

The sūra is a long text in which the subjects run into one another; the boundaries of the blocks are not firm lines but centres of gravity. The table below shows this and is my own reading; its ground is the shifts of address, the recurring words and the transitions of subject.

BlockVersesSubjectThe sign that opens the blockKey words
I1The creation of humankind from a single origin; mindfulness of God and kinshipYā ayyuha'l-nāsu'ttaqū rabbakumnafsin wāḥida, bassa, al-arḥām, raqīb
II2-10The orphan's property; marriage; the bridal gift; the holding of property in trustWa ātu'l-yatāmā amwālahumlā tatabaddalū, taʿdilū, niḥla, sufahāʾ, rushd
III11-14The shares of inheritance and the limits set by GodYūṣīkumu'llāhu fī awlādikumḥaẓẓ, waṣiyya, dayn, kalāla, ḥudūdu'llāh
IV15-22Indecency, repentance; that women cannot be counted as inheritance; conduct in marriageWa'llātī yaʾtīna'l-fāḥishatawba, karhan, ʿāshirūhunna bi'l-maʿrūf, afḍā
V23-28The prohibitions of marriage; the ground of the measure; the lighteningḤurrimat ʿalaykum ummahātukummuḥṣanāt, ujūr, yurīdu'llāhu li-yubayyina, ḍuʿifa
VI29-35Property, life, coveting; the earnings of the man and of the woman; conflict within the familyLā taʾkulū amwālakum baynakum bi'l-bāṭiltarāḍin, naṣīb, iktisāb, qawwāmūn, nushūz, ḥakam, iṣlāḥ
VII36-42A list of rights in ten items; miserliness, ostentation; the day of testimonyWa'ʿbudu'llāha wa lā tushrikū bihī shayʾāiḥsān, al-jār, al-ṣāḥib bi'l-janb, bukhl, riʾāʾa'l-nās
VIII43-57Prayer and purity; a group among the People of the Book; trust and obedienceLā taqrabu'ṣ-ṣalāta wa antum sukārātayammum, yuḥarrifūna'l-kalim, naṣīban mina'l-kitāb
IX58-70Trusts, justice, obedience, adjudication; the ranks of those who obeyInna'llāha yaʾmurukum an tuʾaddu'l-amānātamānāt, ʿadl, ulu'l-amr, tanāzuʿ, ṭāghūt, ṣiddīqīn
X71-104War, the oppressed, death, good and ill fortune, news, reflection, killing, migration, prayerKhudhū ḥidhrakummustaḍʿafīn, burūj mushayyada, tadabbur, khaṭaʾan, muhājir
XI105-126A judicial episode; defence; the associating of partners with God; the promise of Satan; the return for one's deedsInnā anzalnā ilayka'l-kitāba bi'l-ḥaqqkhawwān, yastakhfūna, amāniyy, ḥasana, ḥanīf
XII127-134What is asked concerning women; the nushūz of the husband; settlement; the limit of justiceWa yastaftūnaka fi'l-nisāʾnushūz, ṣulḥ, shuḥḥ, lan tastaṭīʿū, iṣlāḥ
XIII135-152Standing by justice even against oneself; those caught between two sidesKūnū qawwāmīna bi'l-qisṭqisṭ, shuhadāʾa li'llāh, mudhabdhabīn, al-darki'l-asfal
XIV153-162The demands and the history of a group among the People of the BookYasʾaluka ahlu'l-kitābnaqḍ al-mīthāq, buhtān, shubbiha lahum, al-rāsikhūn
XV163-175The chain of revelation; proof and light; not going beyond the boundInnā awḥaynā ilaykarusul, burhān, nūr mubīn, ghuluww
XVI176Kalāla: the last ruling of the sūraYastaftūnakakalāla, yubayyinu'llāhu lakum

The most striking side of the structure is that the sūra's closing section opens with a fatwā and closes with a fatwā. The hundred and twenty-seventh verse begins wa yastaftūnaka fi'l-nisāʾ (they ask you for a ruling concerning women) and names the orphan girls; the hundred and seventy-sixth begins yastaftūnaka and gives the ruling on kalāla. Both questions concern inheritance and the sharing of rights; both tie back to the first block of the sūra.

I record this as my own reading; the places of the verses and the words stand in the text.

The backbone of the sūra: the right of the one who has no protection

This section attempts to read the whole of the sūra from a single frame. This is a reading, not a transmitted report; its ground is the verses in the table below themselves.

One. Who is named

WhoWhereWhat is regulated
The orphan2, 3, 6, 8, 10, 36, 127That his property be handed over, that he be tested, that it not be mixed with another's
The woman3, 4, 7, 11-12, 19-21, 24-25, 32, 34-35, 127-130, 176Bridal gift, inheritance, treatment, dispute, separation
The kinsman1, 7, 8, 33, 36, 135The keeping of the tie; but no favouring of him in testimony
The poor8, 36, 135The share of one present at a division; the address to which spending goes
The slave / the one under one's hand25, 36, 92Marriage, kindness, setting free
The neighbour and the companion at one's side36Ties outside kinship
The mustaḍʿafūn (those made weak)75, 97-98, 127The ground for war; the limit of an excuse
The traveller (ibnu'l-sabīl)36The right of the one who is not known

What all eight rows have in common is this: the person whose right is in someone else's hands.

Two. The sentence form the sūra builds most often

In laying down a ruling the sūra uses one pattern again and again: it gives the command, then closes with a verse-ending that recalls who it is that gives the command.

VerseCommandVerse-ending
1Mindfulness of God and kinshipInna'llāha kāna ʿalaykum raqībā
2Do not consume the property of orphansInnahū kāna ḥūban kabīrā
6Call witnesses when you hand over the orphan's propertyWa kafā bi'llāhi ḥasībā
10Those who consume the property of orphans wrongfullyWa sayaṣlawna saʿīrā
33Give each his shareInna'llāha kāna ʿalā kulli shayʾin shahīdā
58Deliver trusts to those entitled to them, judge with justiceInna'llāha kāna samīʿan baṣīrā
86Return a greeting with a better oneInna'llāha kāna ʿalā kulli shayʾin ḥasībā
135Uphold justice even against yourselvesFa-inna'llāha kāna bimā taʿmalūna khabīrā

Most of these verse-endings carry a verb of seeing, hearing, reckoning or watching: raqīb, ḥasīb, shahīd, samīʿ, baṣīr, khabīr.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the list above: the sūra sets a witness beside the person whose right is unprotected. The orphan, the woman, the slave, the traveller has no advocate; each time, the verse names in their place one who watches.

Three. The word at the two ends of the sūra

The sūra opens with the word al-arḥām (the ties of kinship) (1) and closes with the discussion of kalāla — the estate of a person who leaves neither child nor father (176).

This is a datum that can be verified from the text. And it yields the following observation, which I record as my own reading: the sūra begins from the widest form of the tie (all humankind from a single soul) and ends at its most attenuated form (a person who leaves behind neither child nor father). At both ends the question is the same: when the tie breaks, how is the right to be protected?

A note on method: what is not done in this section

Sūrat al-Nisāʾ is the sūra in which this commentary's rules of style must be observed most closely. So I set down at the outset what is not done.

One. No legal ruling is issued. From this sūra arose the widest discussions of classical jurisprudence: the reckoning of inheritance, marriage, divorce, penalties, the law of war. In this section the disagreements within those discussions are related in the language of "it is transmitted" and in the form of tables; none of them is preferred and none of them is binding. To decide how a ruling is to be applied in practice is not the business of this text; that business belongs to the literature of jurisprudence, which has the competence for it.

Two. The reckoning of inheritance is not entered into. In the eleventh, twelfth and hundred and seventy-sixth verses the shares given by the verse's own wording are set out in a table. What is to be done when the shares add up to more or to less than the whole (ʿawliyya, raddiyya), which heir is excluded in which case, and the differences among the schools of law are not the subject of this text.

Three. No side is taken on the thirty-fourth verse. The readings of this verse in the classical commentaries are given as a table of the disagreement, with their grounds. No preference is imposed, no legal ruling is issued, and no current debate or politics is entered into. And the verse is treated together with the thirty-fifth, from which it cannot be separated.

Four. No demeaning language about women is used. This is a record that holds from the first verse onward: no ranking of worth is built upon the expressions min nafsin wāḥida and wa khalaqa minhā zawjahā.

Five. Current politics is not entered into. This record holds especially in the treatment of the fifty-ninth verse (ulu'l-amr) and the seventy-fifth (the mustaḍʿafūn). Today's debates about whom the verse fits are not the subject of this text.

Six. No sweeping ruling is made about any group. The verses between the hundred and fifty-third and the hundred and seventy-third touch on the history of a community and on a claim. What is at issue are attributes and claims; whoever bears the attribute is included in it. No general ruling is made about any religious, ethnic or national group.

Seven. The reader is not scolded. The subjects of this sūra — the quarrel over an inheritance, discord within the family, duplicity — are the subjects that have produced the most scolding in the language of preaching. This section does not do that.

Eight. No fabricated report is used. No statement I am not sure of is ascribed to an exegete, to a hadith or to a source.

The basmala

The word-by-word analysis of the basmala was made in the section on al-Fātiḥa; I do not repeat it here. The numbering of the verses has been counted without the basmala.

One point particular to this sūra can be recorded: the first verse of a text that opens with the names al-Raḥmān and al-Raḥīm names the tie of kinship (al-arḥām). The words Raḥmān, Raḥīm and raḥim (womb, kinship) are from the same root: ر-ح-م. The analyses of this root in this commentary were made in al-Fātiḥa and al-Rūm; I rely on those treatments.

I record this as an observation about a word: the two divine names at the head of the sūra and the closing command of the first verse come from the same root. This is not a claim resting on numbers or letters; the root of the words stands in the dictionary.


4/1

يا أيها الناس اتقوا ربكم الذي خلقكم من نفس واحدة وخلق منها زوجها وبث منهما رجالا كثيرا ونساء واتقوا الله الذي تساءلون به والأرحام إن الله كان عليكم رقيبا

Yā ayyuha'l-nāsu'ttaqū rabbakumu'lladhī khalaqakum min nafsin wāḥidatin wa khalaqa minhā zawjahā wa bassa minhumā rijālan kathīran wa nisāʾā, wa'ttaqu'llāha'lladhī tasāʾalūna bihī wa'l-arḥām, inna'llāha kāna ʿalaykum raqībā

"O mankind! Be mindful of your Lord, who created you from a single soul, and created from it its mate, and spread from the two of them many men and women. Be mindful of God, in whose name you make requests of one another, and of the ties of kinship. Surely God is a watcher over you."

First, a note on method

Two expressions in this verse — min nafsin wāḥida and wa khalaqa minhā zawjahā — have been much debated in the history of exegesis, and that debate has from time to time been made material for readings that pass judgement on the worth of women.

What will be done in this section is this: the classical explanations will be given as a table of the disagreement, with their grounds; none of them will be preferred; and no ranking of worth between the sexes will be built upon any reading. Whatever the verse's own wording says, with that we shall be content.

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلنَّاسُ — the breadth of the address

The sūra is Medinan, yet its opening address is not yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū but yā ayyuha'l-nās: "O mankind".

This is a choice worth recording. Most Medinan sūras address those who believe; and the party addressed by a text that lays down rulings is naturally the community that will apply them. Al-Nisāʾ, though it is the most densely legislative sūra of all, opens by addressing the whole of humankind.

And the address does not stand alone in the sūra: the call yā ayyuha'l-nās comes twice more towards the end of the sūra (170, 174), and in the hundred and thirty-third verse it occurs as ayyuha'l-nās, without the vocative particle.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the position of these four places: the sūra opens by addressing humankind and approaches its close by addressing humankind; in between, the internal law of one community is being written. That is, the rulings are set inside the frame of humankind.

ٱتَّقُوا۟ رَبَّكُمُ — "Be mindful of your Lord"

The analysis of the root ت-ق-ي / و-ق-ي was made at al-Baqara 2/2: the concrete sense of the root is to guard something from what would harm it, to put a shield in between. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.

What must be recorded is which name is used: rabbakum. It does not say "be mindful of God" — it says "of your Lord". The root ر-ب-ب: the one who nurtures, who brings up, who owns. And immediately afterwards the creating is recounted.

The order of the sentence is therefore this: be mindful → because He is the one who brought you up → because He is the one who brought you into being from a single origin. The ground of the command comes after the command.

مِن نَّفْسٍ وَٰحِدَةٍ — "from a single soul"

نَفْس — root ن-ف-س. The concrete sense of the root is to breathe, breath. Nafas — breath; nafīs — precious (reckoned equal to life); tanāfus — to vie with one another; nifās — the state that follows childbirth. The root was treated from various sides in al-Nūr, al-Takwīr and al-Muṭaffifīn.

The word's range of use in the Qurʾān is wide: life, person, the human being himself, selfhood. Here it means "one person, one being".

And first a grammatical datum — this must be known before the debate

In Arabic the word نَفْس is feminine.

This is a fact of grammar, not an interpretation. Its consequence is this:

WordWhy it takes this formWhat it does not mean
وَٰحِدَة (wāḥida)Because nafs is feminine, its adjective comes in the feminine tooIt does not mean "a female being"
مِنْهَا (minhā)The pronoun refers back to the word nafs, which is feminineThat a pronoun is feminine says nothing about the sex of what it points to
زَوْجَهَا (zawjahā)The word zawj is used in Arabic for both a male and a female spouseBy itself it does not state the sex of the spouse

These three items show the ground on which the debate is being conducted. The wording of the verse does not say "the male was created first, then the female"; what says this, or does not say it, is the interpretation of what the word nafs answers to.

The sense of the root ز-و-ج must also be recorded: zawj is not "spouse" on its own but each single member of a pair. One shoe of a pair is a zawj too. The word therefore states the pairing; it does not subordinate either party to the other. The Qurʾān uses the word for plants and for the whole of creation as well (wa min kulli shayʾin khalaqnā zawjayn — al-Dhāriyāt 51/49; treated in al-Dhāriyāt).

The table of the disagreement — min nafsin wāḥida and wa khalaqa minhā zawjahā

The following are the principal readings transmitted in the classical commentaries concerning these two expressions. The table is neutral; no preference is imposed and none of them is binding.

ReadingWhat nafsin wāḥida isWhat minhā meansIts groundThe side seen as weak
A. The first human beingThe first human being to be createdThe mate was created from that first human being / from its kindIts connection with the verses of the Qurʾān that recount the first human being; this is the reading most widely transmitted in the classical commentariesWhether minhā means "from a part of it" or "from its kind" is not clear in the verse
B. The kind / the speciesThe human species, a single origin of creationMin jinsihā — "from its own kind"The Qurʾān says min anfusikum azwājan (al-Rūm 30/21; al-Naḥl 16/72): it states that the mate is "from you / from your own kind". The same preposition there carries the sense of kindIt generalises the verse's qualification wāḥida (single)
C. A single origin (unity of descent)The common root of all human beingsThe mate too is from the same rootThe continuation of the verse: wa bassa minhumā — increase is set going from the two of themIt does not conflict with A and B; it may not count as a separate view

All three readings are found in the classical literature, and I make no firm choice among them. The reason is the rule on disagreement in the method (Method): the disagreement is not concealed, no preference is imposed.

But there are three things that do not enter the table, that can be read directly from the wording of the verse, and that are not in dispute:

One. The verse says that both parties were created by the same verb: khalaqa… and khalaqa…the verb is repeated, it does not change.

Two. Increase is attached to the two of them together: wa bassa minhumā — "from the two of them". Not the singular, but the dual.

Three. The outcome is given in two words: rijālan kathīran wa nisāʾan — men and women. The verse counts them both.

No ranking of superiority follows from these three data. And none is drawn in this commentary.

وَبَثَّ — the root ب-ث-ث

Root ب-ث-ث: to spread, to disperse, to scatter. The root was treated at al-Jāthiya 45/4 (wa mā yabuththu min dābba); the record made there was the following, and it sits directly here:

"بَثّ — root ب-ث-ث: to spread, to disperse, to scatter. The lexicographers record for the root the picture of 'strewing something about'… the verse does not classify living creatures, it makes their being spread abroad the proof. What is named is not diversity but distribution."

And the same observation holds here. The verse is not classifying the human species; it is recounting its dispersal. The word draws the picture of a scattering outward from a centre.

And a second use of the root must be recorded: from the same root comes the word بَثّ, in the sense of "grief that cannot be held in, that overflows" (Yūsuf 12/86: innamā ashkū baththī wa ḥuznī ila'llāh). The root thus names both the multitude that spreads outward and the grief that will not fit inside and spills over. I record this as an observation about the root; I build no interpretation of the verse upon it.

رِجَالًا كَثِيرًا وَنِسَآءً — a detail of word order

The adjective kathīran (many) comes after the word rijāl; no further adjective is repeated after the word nisāʾ.

This is an ordinary situation in Arabic grammar: a single adjective can refer back to two nouns joined by a conjunction. In the classical commentaries it is explained thus: kathīran qualifies both nouns, and there is no need to repeat it.

I give this as a grammatical record and draw from it no sense of superiority or of deficiency. The sentence of the verse states that the number is great; it does not state which of the two is the greater.

وَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ ٱلَّذِى تَسَآءَلُونَ بِهِۦ — the second command to be mindful

The verse gives the command to mindfulness twice. In the first the name is rabbakum, in the second Allāh.

تَسَآءَلُونَ — root س-أ-ل, Form VI (tafāʿul): reciprocity. That is, "you ask of one another, you make requests of one another".

And bihī — "by Him, in His name". The expression records a habit of language: when people ask something of one another they put the name of God in between — "for God's sake", "in God's name". This is a formula that lives in Arabic and in English alike.

What the verse does is worth recording: it takes the most frequently used, most worn-down religious expression and makes it the object of mindfulness. What is asked is wariness before the Being whose name circulates on the tongue.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the verb tasāʾalūna bihī itself.

وَٱلْأَرْحَامَ — the key word of the sūra

رَحِم — root ر-ح-م. The concrete sense of the word is the womb. And the words raḥma, Raḥmān and Raḥīm are from the same root.

The lexicographers dwell on this feature of the root: the name of the feeling of mercy comes from the same root as the name of the organ that gives birth. I record this as an observation about the root.

Al-arḥām here is plural and means, figuratively, the ties of kinship: the bond that arises from having come from the same womb.

A variant reading and its meaning

There is a difference worth recording in the reading of this word, and the difference affects the meaning. I give no imam's name, because I cannot give it with certainty.

ReadingIts caseIts meaning
ٱلْأَرْحَامَ (al-arḥāma — accusative)Coordinated with the word Allāha"Be mindful of God and be mindful of the ties of kinship too"
ٱلْأَرْحَامِ (al-arḥāmi — genitive)Coordinated with the pronoun in bihī"Be mindful of God, in whose name and in the name of the tie of kinship you make requests of one another"

Both readings are recorded in the classical literature of variant readings. I make no choice between them.

And the two readings arrive at the same place by different routes: in the first, the tie of kinship enters the object of mindfulness as something that must be protected; in the second it is named as a ground people invoke when they ask something of one another. In both cases the weight of the tie is recorded.

The placing of kinship beside mindfulness of God

This is the most striking move of the verse: ittaqu'llāha … wa'l-arḥām.

On the first reading, two things to be mindful of come side by side: God and the tie of kinship. This is not a common word order in the Qurʾān.

And this is the place that explains the whole of the sūra. I record it as my own reading; its ground is the rest of the sūra:

  • The verses of inheritance (11-12, 176) turn the tie of kinship into a share.
  • The verses on the orphan's property (2-10) turn the tie of kinship into a trust.
  • The verse on conflict within the family (35) asks for the arbitrators to be drawn from the families of both parties: ḥakaman min ahlihī wa ḥakaman min ahlihā.
  • The thirty-sixth verse names the kinsman in its list of kindness immediately after the parents.
  • The hundred and thirty-fifth verse, by contrast, sets a limit in the opposite direction: justice may not be bent in a relative's favour (awi'l-wālidayni wa'l-aqrabīn).

So the sūra both raises the tie of kinship and limits it. The tie is a source of right; but it is not a ground for favour. Read together, the first verse and the hundred and thirty-fifth make this balance visible.

إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ عَلَيْكُمْ رَقِيبًا — the verse-ending

رَقِيب — root ر-ق-ب. The concrete sense of the root is striking: رَقَبَة (raqaba) — the neck. And the verb raqaba: to watch by craning the neck, to look out from a high place.

Marqab — a lookout post. Irtiqāb — to wait and watch. And in the Qurʾān فَكُّ رَقَبَةٍ (the loosing of a neck — the freeing of a slave; al-Balad 90/13, treated in al-Balad) is from the same root.

So the picture carried by the word raqīb is this: one who cranes his neck and looks, who does not take his eyes off.

And the placing of the word here must be recorded. The sūra is about to begin regulating people whose right is in someone else's hands. The last word of the first verse sets a watcher beside those people.

And the verb comes with kāna: kāna ʿalaykum raqībā. In Arabic the pattern kāna + noun states not a passing but a continuing state. This pattern recurs very often in the verse-endings of this sūra — kāna ʿalaykum raqībā, kāna ḥūban kabīrā, kāna samīʿan baṣīrā, kāna ʿalīman ḥakīmā. This is the sound-weave of the sūra, and each instance will be named below in its place.

What this says to the present

One. The verse opens a sūra of law with a family tree. Before all the quarrels over division, the lawsuits over inheritance and the disputes over rights, it sets down the information that the parties come from the same root. The section of rulings begins by announcing that the parties are not strangers to one another.

Two. The record tasāʾalūna bihī touches something still alive today: the wearing-down of a name through constant use. The verse takes that name back and makes it the object of mindfulness.

Three. The placing of al-arḥām beside mindfulness of God lifts kinship out of being a matter of feeling and carries it into the field of responsibility. A tie exists not to the degree that it is felt but to the degree that it is kept.

And a limit: it does not follow from this that "a relative is to be favoured in every case". The same sūra says exactly the opposite in the hundred and thirty-fifth verse. To keep a tie and to show favour through a tie are two different things in this sūra.


4/2

وآتوا اليتامى أموالهم ولا تتبدلوا الخبيث بالطيب ولا تأكلوا أموالهم إلى أموالكم إنه كان حوبا كبيرا

Wa ātu'l-yatāmā amwālahum wa lā tatabaddalu'l-khabītha bi'l-ṭayyib, wa lā taʾkulū amwālahum ilā amwālikum, innahū kāna ḥūban kabīrā

"Give the orphans their property. Do not exchange what is good for what is foul. Do not consume their property by adding it to your own. This is a great sin."

Why the second verse of the sūra is here

The first verse recounted humankind as coming from a single root and set the tie of kinship beside mindfulness of God. The second verse begins from the place where that tie breaks most easily: the property of a child who has lost his father.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the order of the two verses. Whether a tie really exists shows itself where the other party cannot defend himself. The sūra enters at exactly that point.

يَتِيم — the root ي-ت-م

The root's original sense: to be left alone, to be separated from one's like.

A usage the lexicographers record is worth noting: دُرَّة يَتِيمَة (durra yatīma) — "an orphan pearl", that is, a pearl with no match, standing alone. When the word is used of a human being it means a small child who has lost his father.

The root was treated in al-Ḍuḥā (93/6a-lam yajidka yatīman fa-āwā); I rely on that treatment.

And the picture the word carries explains the subject of the verse: the orphan is the person with no one standing behind him. His property is in his hands, but he has not the strength to protect it.

وَءَاتُوا۟ — "give"

The verb is an imperative, and its object is stated at the outset: amwālahum — "their property".

A detail of the word order must be recorded: the verse does not say "give property to the orphans"; it says "give the orphans their own property". The pronoun belongs to them. What is at issue, then, is not a gift but a restitution.

وَلَا تَتَبَدَّلُوا۟ ٱلْخَبِيثَ بِٱلطَّيِّبِ — the prohibition of exchange

The root ب-د-ل: to put something in the place of another. Form V (tafaʿʿul) here states a deliberate and gradual operation.

In the classical commentaries the following is widely transmitted as the concrete referent of this sentence: that the guardian would take what was good in the orphan's property and put in its place what was bad in his own — like taking the fat sheep of the flock and leaving the lean one. I relate this explanation in the language of "it is transmitted".

And the choice of the pair khabīth / ṭayyib must be recorded. Both words are used in the Qurʾān in a material and in a moral sense alike: ṭayyib — clean, pleasant, lawful; khabīth — foul, corrupt, forbidden. The sentence therefore names a transaction of property in the language of morals.

I record this as an observation about a word: the exchange looks equal; the naming is not.

إِلَىٰٓ أَمْوَٰلِكُمْ — the choice of preposition

The verse does not say maʿa (together with), it says ilā (towards, adding to).

In the classical commentaries the following sense is drawn from this preposition, and I relate it as it is transmitted: to consume the orphan's property by adding it to one's own, so that it can no longer be told apart. The matter, then, is not only the consuming but the mixing itself — what can be called to account so long as it stands apart becomes invisible once it is merged.

And this record must be read together with the measure given in al-Baqara. At al-Baqara 2/220 the balance between keeping the orphan's property separate and mixing it was treated, and what was recorded there was: fa-ikhwānukum — "they are your brothers", but wa'llāhu yaʿlamu'l-mufsida mina'l-muṣliḥ — the one who corrupts is told apart from the one who sets right. I rely on that treatment.

Read together, the two verses give this measure, and I record it as an observation: to live in common is free; to keep a common account is not.

حُوبًا كَبِيرًا — the singularity of the word

حُوب — root ح-و-ب. The lexicographers explain the word as sin, guilt, grave offence. The root's sense of "need, distress" is also recorded.

The word occurs only here in the Qurʾān. Other words for sin are used in the sūra (ithm, sayyiʾa, dhanb); here a word that occurs only once is chosen.

I record this as an observation and draw no firm conclusion from it: it can be said that the choice of word carries an emphasis, but how much of that is meaning and how much the harmony of the verse-ending cannot be determined.

And the pattern of the verse-ending is again formed with kāna: innahū kāna ḥūban kabīrā. The same structure as kāna ʿalaykum raqībā in the first verse.


4/3

وإن خفتم ألا تقسطوا في اليتامى فانكحوا ما طاب لكم من النساء مثنى وثلاث ورباع فإن خفتم ألا تعدلوا فواحدة أو ما ملكت أيمانكم ذلك أدنى ألا تعولوا

Wa in khiftum allā tuqsiṭū fi'l-yatāmā fa'nkiḥū mā ṭāba lakum mina'l-nisāʾi mathnā wa thulātha wa rubāʿ, fa-in khiftum allā taʿdilū fa-wāḥidatan aw mā malakat aymānukum, dhālika adnā allā taʿūlū

"If you fear that you cannot act with fairness towards the orphans, then marry of the women lawful to you two by two, three by three, four by four. If you fear that you cannot deal equitably, then one; or what your right hands possess. That is nearer to your not falling into injustice / into a burden."

First, a note on method

This verse is one of the most debated places in the Qurʾān and one of the most often torn from its context.

What will be done in this section is this: 1. That the verse comes in the context of orphans will be shown from the text's own wording. 2. The condition fa-in khiftum allā taʿdilū fa-wāḥida will be brought to the fore. 3. The verse will be read together with 4/129, and the two verses will be compared in a table. 4. The differing readings of the classical commentaries and of the schools of law will be related in the language of "it is transmitted".

And these will not be done: no preference will be imposed, no legal ruling will be issued, no current debate will be entered into, the reader will not be scolded, and no demeaning language about women will be used.

One: the verse's conditional clause concerns orphans — this is a datum of the text

The verse does not begin with a command. It begins with a conditional clause:

وَإِنْ خِفْتُمْ أَلَّا تُقْسِطُوا۟ فِى ٱلْيَتَٰمَىٰ"If you fear that you cannot act with fairness towards the orphans…"

So the subject of the condition standing before the command (fa'nkiḥū) is orphans. This is not a point open to interpretation; it is the wording of the sentence.

And the verse's position says the same thing: the second verse was about the orphan's property, and the sixth verse will again be about the orphan's property. The third verse stands between the two.

VerseSubject
2Give the orphans their property; do not mix it with your own
3If you fear you cannot act justly towards the orphans… → the ruling on marriage
4Give the women their bridal gifts
5Do not hand over property to one who cannot manage it
6Test the orphans; when you see soundness of judgement in them, give them their property

Four of these five verses concern the trusteeship of property directly. The third verse stands in the middle of this cluster, and that is a countable fact.

Two: the link between the condition and its answer — a table of the disagreement

The condition concerns orphans, the answer concerns marriage. What the link between the two is has been one of the most debated questions in the classical commentaries.

The table below shows the main explanations transmitted in the classical sources. None of them is preferred and none is binding.

ExplanationHow the link is madeIts ground
A. The guardian marrying the orphan girl in his careThe guardian, with an eye on the property or the beauty of the orphan girl in his household, would marry her with a bridal gift below what her like would receive. The verse: if you cannot do this properly, marry other womenThe verse's connection with the hundred and twenty-seventh: there the expression wa targhabūna an tankiḥūhunna (you desire to marry them) returns to the same matter
B. The fear of injustice set upon two fields at oncePeople were wary of injustice in the orphan's property but not wary in the number of wives. The verse: what you fear in the one, fear in the other tooThe same verb is repeated in the two clauses: in khiftum allā tuqsiṭū / fa-in khiftum allā taʿdilū
C. Avoiding the burden of caring for orphansTo one who shrinks from caring for orphans it is said to keep his responsibility within limitsReading the closing word allā taʿūlū in the sense of "not to take on a crowd"
D. The regulation of a situation after a battleIt is transmitted in the sources that after a battle the number of widows and orphans left behind grew; it is said that the verse regulates this situationThe presence of post-war regulations throughout the sūra

The four explanations do not wholly exclude one another. A and D are readings that support one another; B rests on the repetition in the wording of the sentence.

I make no choice. The one certain thing is that the subject of the conditional clause is orphans.

Three: مَثْنَىٰ وَثُلَٰثَ وَرُبَٰعَ — the pattern itself

These three words are in a special Arabic pattern called maʿdūl, and their meaning is not "two, three, four" but "two by two, three by three, four by four".

WordPatternMeaning
مَثْنَىٰMafʿalmaʿdūlTwo by two
ثُلَٰثَFuʿālmaʿdūlThree by three
رُبَٰعَFuʿālmaʿdūlFour by four

The pattern carries two pieces of information, and both are grammar, not interpretation:

One. The pattern of repetition/distribution shows that the address is not to one person but to a community. It means "each of you two by two, three by three, four by four" — distribution, not addition.

Two. The same pattern occurs in one other place in the Qurʾān: al-Fāṭir 35/1 — of the wings of the angels, mathnā wa thulātha wa rubāʿ. That verse was treated in Fāṭir. The pattern therefore states not the number itself but the distribution.

And the particle itself must be recorded: between the words stands wa (the conjunction), not aw (or). In classical grammar it is said that this wa states an alternative here; this is a point the grammarians dwell on, and it has not been brought to a firm conclusion.

Four: فَإِنْ خِفْتُمْ أَلَّا تَعْدِلُوا۟ فَوَٰحِدَةً — the condition

The second half of the verse sets a condition upon the first half, and this condition must be brought to the fore:

فَإِنْ خِفْتُمْ أَلَّا تَعْدِلُوا۟ فَوَٰحِدَةً"If you fear that you cannot deal equitably, then one."

The structure of the sentence deserves attention:

ElementWhat it says
خِفْتُمْ (khiftum)The measure is not injustice that has occurred but the fear of injustice. The threshold has been drawn forward
أَلَّا تَعْدِلُوا۟The verb is from ʿadl — to hold the balance, to treat equally
فَوَٰحِدَةًThe answer is a single word: one
ذَٰلِكَ أَدْنَىٰٓAnd a ground is given: "this is nearer to your not…"

The verse's own logic is this, and it is read off the wording of the sentence: the permission has been tied to a condition, the measure of the condition has been lowered to the level of fear, and the place to be reached when the condition holds is stated in a single word.

Five: the difference between عَدْل and قِسْط

Two different roots are used in the verse, and this must be recorded.

RootWordThe distinction the lexicographers record
ق-س-طTuqsiṭū (in the first condition)To give the share, the portion; fairness in dividing. Qisṭ — a share. In Form IV "to be just", in Form I "to swerve from the right" (one of the aḍdād, the words that carry contrary senses)
ع-د-لTaʿdilū (in the second condition)Equivalence, holding two sides at the same weight. ʿAdl — the equal of a thing

And the placing of the two roots is worth recording: the root that concerns the share is used for the orphans, the root that concerns equivalence for marriage.

I record this as an observation about word order; I draw no ruling from it.

The root ق-س-ط was treated at al-Ḥujurāt 49/9 and at al-Raḥmān 55/9; I rely on those treatments. The root will return once more in this sūra, in the hundred and thirty-fifth verse, this time in the context of testimony: kūnū qawwāmīna bi'l-qisṭ.

Six: أَلَّا تَعُولُوا۟ — the disagreement over the word

تَعُولُوا۟ — root ع-و-ل. And there is a classical disagreement over the meaning of the word.

ReadingWhat taʿūlū meansIts ground
1To do injustice, to incline to one sideThe root's sense of "to bend, the balance tipping to one side". ʿĀla'l-mīzān — the balance tipped
2That the number of dependants one must support increasesThe root's derivative ʿiyāl (the family one supports). ʿĀla'l-rajul — the man had many mouths to feed

Both are found among the lexicographers. I do not impose a preference.

And neither reading changes the outcome of the verse: in the one it says "not to fall into injustice", in the other "not to take on a burden you cannot carry". In both cases the function of the sentence is limitation.

Seven: 4/3 together with 4/129

The sūra returns to the same subject in the hundred and twenty-ninth verse, and there it says something else:

وَلَن تَسْتَطِيعُوٓا۟ أَن تَعْدِلُوا۟ بَيْنَ ٱلنِّسَآءِ وَلَوْ حَرَصْتُمْ فَلَا تَمِيلُوا۟ كُلَّ ٱلْمَيْلِ فَتَذَرُوهَا كَٱلْمُعَلَّقَةِ "You will never be able to deal equitably among women, however much you desire it. So do not incline wholly to one side and leave the other as though suspended." (4/129)

I set the two verses side by side. The table compares the wording of the two verses; it establishes no ruling.

4/34/129
VerbTaʿdilū — to deal justlyTaʿdilū — the same verb
MoodConditional: in khiftum allā taʿdilūNegated future: lan tastaṭīʿū an taʿdilū
What it saysIf you fear you cannot deal justlyYou will not be able to realise justice fully
Degree of forceKhiftum — a possibilityLan — the strongest negation of the future in Arabic
Added qualificationWa law ḥaraṣtum — "however much you desire it"
Concluding clauseFa-wāḥida — oneFa-lā tamīlū kulla'l-mayl — do not incline wholly to one side
GroundAdnā allā taʿūlūFa-tadharūhā ka'l-muʿallaqa — do not leave her suspended

What follows from the wording of the two verses and is not in dispute is this: the first verse sets justice as a condition; the second states that this condition cannot be fulfilled completely.

On how these two verses are to be reconciled, different tendencies are transmitted in the classical commentaries:

TendencyHow it reconciles them
aThe justice in 4/129 is the inclination of the heart, the justice in 4/3 is conduct and maintenance. A person can act equally in conduct; he cannot command the inclination in his heart. This is the explanation most widely transmitted in the classical commentaries
b4/129 came to show how heavy the condition in 4/3 really is; read together, the two verses narrow the permission in practice
cThe two verses are on two separate matters and are not directly linked; 4/129 regulates the management of an existing situation

I prefer none of these three tendencies, and none of them is binding. All three have been defended in the classical literature, and the rulings drawn from these verses differ among the schools of law.

One thing I record separately, because it is a datum of the text: the continuation of 4/129 runs wa in tuṣliḥū wa tattaqū fa-inna'llāha kāna Ghafūran Raḥīmā, and in 4/128 it says wa'l-ṣulḥu khayr (settlement is better). That is, the sūra closes this discussion not with a sanction but with a call to setting right. The same thing will happen in the thirty-fifth verse.

Eight: the points on which the schools of law divide — transmitted, not preferred

The table below shows the principal divergences that arose from this verse in classical jurisprudence. None of them is this text's preference, none of them is binding, and within each school there are differences of view as well.

QuestionThe main tendencies transmitted
The limit of numberThe great majority of classical jurisprudence agrees that the number is limited to four. There is a grammatical debate over how the pattern (mathnā wa thulātha wa rubāʿ) yields this
The legal character of the condition of justiceSome jurists count it a binding condition; some count it an obligation that is diyānī (a matter between the person and God, not enforceable in court). The divergence has to do with whether justice can be measured
The scope of justiceThere is broad agreement on equality in maintenance and in the turn of nights; on the inclination of the heart it is said, on the strength of 4/129, that a person is not held responsible
The relation between 4/3 and 4/129The three tendencies above (a, b, c) apply here too
The consequence of breaching the conditionThe schools differ over whether it affects the validity of the marriage and over what claims the woman may bring

This table is not a fatwā and cannot be read as a guide to practice. The reason it is placed here is the rule on disagreement in the method (Method): the disagreement is not concealed, no preference is imposed.

And current debates are not entered into. How this verse is understood today, how it is regulated in this or that country, and the social debates around it are not the subject of this text.

Nine: three limiting devices in the verse's own word order

I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the wording of the verse. In giving the permission, the verse narrows it three times:

OrderClauseWhat it does
1Wa in khiftum allā tuqsiṭū fi'l-yatāmāIt gives the permission as the answer to a condition — not as an absolute command
2Fa-in khiftum allā taʿdilū fa-wāḥidaIt sets a second condition and brings the answer down to one
3Dhālika adnā allā taʿūlūIt gives the ground in the direction of narrowing

So the sentence structure of the verse produces more restriction than permission. This is a countable fact: the sentence contains one command, two conditions and one ground.

What this says to the present

It is possible to write the bearing of this verse on the present without entering current debates and without scolding the reader; what is treated is the measure the verse itself establishes.

One. The threshold drawn back to fear. The verse does not say "if you commit injustice", it says "if you fear you will commit injustice". This is a rare threshold in law: not the act but the anxiety about the act is made the measure. The decision whether one can carry an obligation is left to the person's own foresight.

Two. Responsibility tied to number. The logic of the verse is this: as the number of relationships undertaken rises, the share of justice falling to each one falls. This logic works independently of marriage too — a child cared for, a job taken on, a promise given. When capacity is exceeded, the party beyond the limit is the one who suffers.

Three. And a limit. No general conclusion such as "a person sets his own measure" follows from this verse; the verse speaks within a particular field of ruling. And no judgement about the morals of a person or a society today can be built from here.


4/4

وآتوا النساء صدقاتهن نحلة فإن طبن لكم عن شيء منه نفسا فكلوه هنيئا مريئا

Wa ātu'l-nisāʾa ṣaduqātihinna niḥla, fa-in ṭibna lakum ʿan shayʾin minhu nafsan fa-kulūhu hanīʾan marīʾā

"Give the women their bridal gifts with a glad heart. If of their own accord they leave you some part of it, then eat it with pleasure and ease."

The repetition of the verb

The second verse began wa ātu'l-yatāmā amwālahum. The fourth verse begins wa ātu'l-nisāʾa ṣaduqātihinna.

The same verb, the same pattern, two verses apart, for two different parties addressed. This is a countable fact.

And in both sentences the object is named as belonging to the recipient: amwālahum (their property) / ṣaduqātihinna (their bridal gifts). In both, the pronoun is on the receiving side.

I record this as my own reading: the sūra gives back with the same verb what can be taken from the hands of two different groups, and it names both acts as a restitution.

صَدُقَات — the root ص-د-ق

The word the Qurʾān uses for the bridal gift comes from the root of truthfulness.

ص-د-ق: ṣidq — truthfulness; ṣādiq — truthful; ṣadaqa — a gift given; taṣdīq — confirming as true. The root was treated in al-Ḥujurāt and in al-Baqara.

And the explanation the lexicographers record for this word is this: the bridal gift is what shows the seriousness and the truthfulness of the desire to marry; the sign that there is something backing the word. I relate this explanation in the language of "what the lexicographers record".

For the same thing the Qurʾān elsewhere uses the words ajr (25, 24) and farīḍa (24) as well. The variety of words is worth recording: the same legal element is named from three different sides — a token of truthfulness, a return, an appointed share.

نِحْلَة — the disagreement over the word

نِحْلَة — root ن-ح-ل. The lexicographers explain the word as a gift given without return, given from the heart. From the same root comes نَحْل (naḥl) — the bee; and the link the lexicographers make is this: the bee gives back more than it takes, expecting no return. This link is widely transmitted among the lexicographers; I do not present it as a settled derivation.

There is disagreement over the word's case and meaning in the verse:

ReadingWhat niḥla isIts consequence
1Farīḍa — an appointed, obligatory dutyThe bridal gift is a debt, not a favour
2Hiba / ʿaṭiyya — given from the heart, without returnThe manner of giving is being regulated: not grudgingly
3Diyānatan — as a religious requirementThe source of the obligation is being stressed

I do not impose a preference and I issue no legal ruling.

But the outcome common to the three readings can be recorded: in none of them is the bridal gift a price paid to someone other than the woman. The party addressed by the verse is the men, the recipient is the women, and there is no third party in between.

The historical background of this verse

It is transmitted in the sources that in that period the bridal gift was given to the woman's guardian or withheld by him. It is said that the verse ties the payment directly to the woman.

I relate this in the language of "it is transmitted" and give no name of a person or a tribe. What the wording of the verse says is clear in any case: the object of the verb is al-nisāʾ.

فَإِن طِبْنَ لَكُمْ عَن شَىْءٍ مِّنْهُ نَفْسًا — the condition of consent

In the sentence, consent is reinforced by three separate elements, and this must be recorded:

ElementWhat it does
طِبْنَ (ṭibna)Root ط-ي-ب — to be pleasant, for the heart to be glad. The subject of the verb is the women (feminine plural)
عَن شَىْءٍ مِّنْهُ"Some of it" — not the whole, but a part
نَفْسًاSpecification (tamyīz): "nafsan" — from within themselves, of their own accord

Read together, the three settle by whom and in what manner the consent must be given. Without the word nafsan the sentence could have been read as "if they leave it to you"; the word adds the qualification that the leaving must come from inward willingness.

I record this as an observation about word order; its ground is the specification itself.

And this is the word nafs's second occurrence in the sūra: in the first verse as the root of creation (min nafsin wāḥida), here as the source of consent. The same word, at two separate tasks.

هَنِيٓـًٔا مَّرِيٓـًٔا — two adjectives

هَنِيء — root ه-ن-أ: pleasant, wholesome, free of trouble. مَرِيء — root م-ر-أ: easily digested, lying light on the stomach. (Marʾ — a human being; imraʾa — woman is counted in the same root family.)

The distinction the lexicographers draw is worth recording: hanīʾ is what is pleasant while being eaten, marīʾ what causes no discomfort after it has been eaten. The first adjective therefore looks to the moment, the second to what follows.

And the placing of the two here yields an observation, which I record as my own reading: the verse says that what is given with consent will not turn into a burden of guilt afterwards either. The picture used in the tenth verse for those who consume the orphan's property wrongfully (innamā yaʾkulūna fī buṭūnihim nārā) and these two adjectives stand opposite one another in the same sūra.


4/5

ولا تؤتوا السفهاء أموالكم التي جعل الله لكم قياما وارزقوهم فيها واكسوهم وقولوا لهم قولا معروفا

Wa lā tuʾtu'l-sufahāʾa amwālakumu'llatī jaʿala'llāhu lakum qiyāman wa'rzuqūhum fīhā wa'ksūhum wa qūlū lahum qawlan maʿrūfā

"Do not give over to those who lack judgement the property that God has made a means of standing upright for you. Feed them from it, clothe them, and speak to them a kindly word."

The third repetition of the verb — and its reversal

The second verse: wa ātu'l-yatāmā. The fourth verse: wa ātu'l-nisāʾa. The fifth verse: wa lā tuʾtu'l-sufahāʾa.

The same verb a third time; but this time in the negative. This is a weave of word order that can be verified, and it shows this: the sūra uses the same verb when it says "give" and when it says "do not give". The measure is not whose the property is; it is who is able to hold it.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the sameness of the verb in the three verses.

سُفَهَآء — the root س-ف-ه

The concrete sense of the root: lightness, having no weight. Safihati'l-rīḥ — the wind tossed the air about; thawbun safīh — cloth of loose, light weave.

So safah is not the absence of intellect but the lightness of its weight. The opposite of the word is ḥilm — gravity, being weighty.

The root was treated at al-Jinn 72/4 (wa annahū kāna yaqūlu safīhunā ʿala'llāhi shaṭaṭā); I rely on that treatment.

And there is a classical disagreement over whom the word sufahāʾ means here:

ViewWho they are
1Orphans not in a position to protect their property — the context supports this
2Anyone who squanders property — no condition of age
3Not a definite group; an attribute is being described: whoever cannot hold property in his hands

I do not impose a preference. The third reading is in keeping with the method's measure that "what the verse describes is an attribute"; but I give this as a record, not as a preference.

أَمْوَٰلَكُمُ — the surprise in the pronoun

Speaking of the orphan's property, the verse says "your property".

This is a point that has been dwelt upon, and several explanations are transmitted in the classical commentaries:

ExplanationIts ground
A. Having it in handThe property is in fact in your hands; the address is made to the one who holds the disposal of it
B. The common wealth of the societyProperty is the means by which the community, not single individuals, stands upright; hence it is named with a plural pronoun of ownership
C. A generic pronounThe genus "property" is meant; it states no particular ownership

I do not impose a preference.

But the connection of reading B with the continuation of the verse must be recorded: the sentence goes on allatī jaʿala'llāhu lakum qiyāman — "which God has made a means of standing upright for you". The property, that is, is named by its function and not by its owner.

قِيَٰمًا — and the weave of roots in the sūra

قِيَٰم — root ق-و-م: to stand upright, to be set up. Qiyām — the post on which a thing stands, a support. The root was treated in many places in this commentary (al-Baqara, al-Aḥzāb, al-Ḥujurāt).

And this root occurs in three critical places in Sūrat al-Nisāʾ. This is a countable datum of the text:

VerseWordWhat is held upright
5qiyāmāProperty — the means by which the community stands
34qawwāmūnResponsibility within the family — together with the verse's own stated ground
135qawwāmīna bi'l-qisṭJustice — even against oneself

Read together, the three verses show the function of the root in the sūra: "to hold upright". This table will be returned to in the treatment of the thirty-fourth verse.

I record this as my own reading; the places of the words can be counted in the text.

وَٱرْزُقُوهُمْ فِيهَا — the choice of preposition

The verse does not say minhā (from it), it says fīhā (within it).

In the classical commentaries the following sense is drawn from this preposition, and I relate it as it is transmitted: provide for them not by diminishing the property but by working it — that is, not from the capital but from the income that arises within it. The property itself stays; the maintenance comes out of what it yields.

This explanation is not a strict grammatical necessity; it has also been said that the preposition stands here for min. I do not impose a preference. But it can be recorded that the explanation is in keeping with the whole of the verse: the sixth verse will command that the property be preserved and handed over.

وَقُولُوا۟ لَهُمْ قَوْلًا مَّعْرُوفًا — the third command

The verse commands three things, and the third is worth recording: feed them, clothe them, and speak a kindly word.

Beside the decision not to hand over property, that is, is set how the tongue is to be used. A qualification is entered upon the party that holds the authority, concerning the sentence he frames while exercising it.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the order of the commands: immediately after commanding the restriction, the verse commands how one is to speak with the person restricted.

And the same expression will come once more in the eighth verse: wa qūlū lahum qawlan maʿrūfā. Two verses apart, the same sentence for two different groups. In both, the party addressed is the one left empty-handed.

The same field was treated at al-Baqara 2/83 (wa qūlū li'l-nāsi ḥusnā) and at 2/263 (qawlun maʿrūfun wa maghfiratun khayrun min ṣadaqatin yatbaʿuhā adhā); I rely on those treatments.


4/6

وابتلوا اليتامى حتى إذا بلغوا النكاح فإن آنستم منهم رشدا فادفعوا إليهم أموالهم ولا تأكلوها إسرافا وبدارا أن يكبروا ومن كان غنيا فليستعفف ومن كان فقيرا فليأكل بالمعروف فإذا دفعتم إليهم أموالهم فأشهدوا عليهم وكفى بالله حسيبا

Wa'btalu'l-yatāmā ḥattā idhā balaghu'l-nikāḥ, fa-in ānastum minhum rushdan fa'dfaʿū ilayhim amwālahum, wa lā taʾkulūhā isrāfan wa bidāran an yakbarū, wa man kāna ghaniyyan fa'l-yastaʿfif wa man kāna faqīran fa'l-yaʾkul bi'l-maʿrūf, fa-idhā dafaʿtum ilayhim amwālahum fa-ashhidū ʿalayhim, wa kafā bi'llāhi ḥasībā

"Test the orphans until they reach the age of marriage. If you perceive in them a soundness of judgement, hand over their property to them. Do not consume it wastefully, in haste before they grow up. Let the one who is rich abstain; let the one who is poor consume in the recognised measure. When you hand over their property to them, call witnesses. God suffices as a reckoner."

What the verse does: it sets up a process

The fifth verse forbade handing over the property. The sixth verse regulates when the prohibition ends. Read apart, the fifth verse looks like a permanent restriction; read together with the sixth, it is seen to be the regulation of a period of transition.

The sequence the verse establishes is this, and it can be verified:

StepThe expression in the verseWhat it is
1Wa'btalūTest them
2Ḥattā idhā balaghu'l-nikāḥA measure of time: the age of marriage
3Fa-in ānastum minhum rushdāA measure of quality: that soundness be perceived
4Fa'dfaʿū ilayhim amwālahumHanding over
5Fa-ashhidū ʿalayhimCalling witnesses

Of the five steps, two are measures, one is an act, two are procedures. And the two measures are set together: age alone is not enough, and soundness alone is not named either.

وَٱبْتَلُوا۟ — the root ب-ل-و

The concrete sense of the root: to wear something out by using it. To wear out a garment by wearing it. And from there comes the sense of testing: what a thing is comes out only when it is used.

The root was treated at al-Baqara 2/155 and at al-ʿAnkabūt 29/2; I rely on those treatments.

And the placing of the root here is worth recording: the verse does not say "look", "ask", "observe" — it says "test". Soundness is established not by opinion but by trial.

How the testing is to be done is not written in the verse. In classical jurisprudence there are detailed views on this (having them make small purchases, giving them responsibility for spending); those details are not entered into in this section, and no ruling is issued.

ءَانَسْتُم — the root أ-ن-س

Root أ-ن-س: to notice something with familiarity, from close at hand. Uns — closeness, familiarity; insān — is connected with this root (in al-Aḥzāb it was recorded that nothing definite is said about the root of the word; I keep the same record here).

The root was treated at al-Nūr 24/27 (ḥattā tastaʾnisū); I rely on that treatment.

And the choice of verb is worth recording: the verse does not say raʾaytum (you saw) or ʿalimtum (you knew). Ānastumyou noticed, you sensed. The word states recognition rather than certain knowledge.

The Qurʾān uses the same verb for Moses's (Mūsā's) noticing the fire (innī ānastu nāran — Ṭāhā 20/10; treated in Ṭāhā). In both places there is the sensing of a sign from a distance.

رُشْد — the root ر-ش-د

Root ر-ش-د: that a road be straight, that it lead to the goal. Rāshid — one on the right road; irshād — showing the way. The opposite of the word is ghayy (losing one's way).

And there is a classical disagreement over what rushd is here:

ViewWhat rushd is
1Competence in property — the capacity to protect and manage property
2Religious maturity — the ability to carry religious responsibility
3The two together — competence both in property and in character

This disagreement produced a wide discussion in classical jurisprudence, and its consequences differ among the schools of law. I do not impose a preference, I issue no legal ruling, and none of them is binding.

What follows from the wording of the verse and is not in dispute is this: the word comes indefinite (rushdan — "a soundness"), that is, what is sought is not a complete and flawless maturity but a soundness that can be perceived.

إِسْرَافًا وَبِدَارًا أَن يَكْبَرُوا۟ — two states

Two verbal nouns come side by side, and both describe the manner in which the consuming is done:

WordRootMeaning
إِسْرَافس-ر-فTo exceed the measure, to squander
بِدَارب-د-رTo race, to get ahead, to hurry

The concrete sense of the root ب-د-ر is worth recording: badr — the full moon. The lexicographers explain this by the root's sense of "to get ahead, to arrive first". Bādara — to hasten to a task.

And the picture in the expression bidāran an yakbarū must be recorded: "racing against their growing up". The orphan will grow and ask for his property; the guardian moves before that. The verse describes a race run against time.

This matches the concrete sense of the word exactly, and I record it as an observation about a word.

وَمَن كَانَ غَنِيًّا فَلْيَسْتَعْفِفْ — the wealthy guardian

فَلْيَسْتَعْفِفْ — root ع-ف-ف, Form X. ʿIffa — to hold oneself back, to keep away. Form X here states keeping away deliberately and with effort.

What the sentence does must be recorded: where the guardian is wealthy, no prohibition is laid down — he is asked to hold himself back. The ruling, that is, varies with the person's own circumstances.

وَمَن كَانَ فَقِيرًا فَلْيَأْكُلْ بِٱلْمَعْرُوفِ — the poor guardian

And there is a classical disagreement over the scope of this clause:

ViewWhat eating bi'l-maʿrūf is
1To take a wage in return for his labour
2To take what necessity requires and then repay it (counted a debt)
3To take what necessity requires and not repay it

This disagreement is real in classical jurisprudence, and the schools divide. I do not impose a preference, I issue no legal ruling, and none of them is binding.

The qualification the verse itself lays down must be recorded: bi'l-maʿrūf. The root ع-ر-ف — known, recognised, accepted by custom. The amount, that is, is not fixed; the measure is the measure known in that community.

The word occurs very frequently in this sūra (5, 6, 8, 19, 25, 114) and almost every time it draws the limit of a ruling. This is a countable fact.

فَأَشْهِدُوا۟ عَلَيْهِمْ — that the handing over be done before witnesses

The verse ties the handing over to a procedure: the calling of witnesses.

And the logic of this runs in two directions, and I record it as my own reading: the witness protects both the one who receives the property and the one who hands it over. The orphan cannot say "it was never given to me", nor is the guardian left without proof of his claim "I gave it". Witnessing, that is, is not an act of mistrust but a way of protecting the relationship from a future dispute.

The same logic was treated in detail at al-Baqara 2/282 (the writing down of a debt); I rely on that treatment.

وَكَفَىٰ بِٱللَّهِ حَسِيبًا — the verse-ending

حَسِيب — root ح-س-ب: to count, to reckon. Ḥisāb — a reckoning; ḥasb — sufficiency ("this is enough for me"). The two senses of the root — to count and to suffice — meet in one place: what is counted becomes sufficient when it is complete.

And the pattern of the verse-ending must be recorded: kafā bi'llāhi … — "God suffices as …". This pattern recurs several times in this sūra (6, 45, 70, 79, 81, 132, 166, 171) and six different attributes follow it: ḥasībā, waliyyan, naṣīrā, ʿalīmā, wakīlā, shahīdā.

This is an observation about style, and the places of the words can be counted. Having laid down the obligation, the sūra points again and again to the same place.


4/7

للرجال نصيب مما ترك الوالدان والأقربون وللنساء نصيب مما ترك الوالدان والأقربون مما قل منه أو كثر نصيبا مفروضا

Li'l-rijāli naṣībun mimmā taraka'l-wālidāni wa'l-aqrabūn, wa li'l-nisāʾi naṣībun mimmā taraka'l-wālidāni wa'l-aqrabūna mimmā qalla minhu aw kathur, naṣīban mafrūḍā

"To the men belongs a share of what parents and near kin leave; and to the women belongs a share of what parents and near kin leave — of the little of it and of the much. An appointed share."

The building of the sentence twice

The most striking side of the verse is that the same sentence is repeated twice, with not one of its words abbreviated.

The first sentenceThe second sentence
To whomLi'l-rijāliWa li'l-nisāʾi
Whatnaṣībunnaṣībun
From whatmimmā taraka'l-wālidāni wa'l-aqrabūnmimmā taraka'l-wālidāni wa'l-aqrabūn

In Arabic this repetition is not required. The sentence could have been built once: "to the men and to the women there is a share". It was not.

I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the repetition itself: that the right is tied to each of the two parties separately, in a complete sentence, is said by the repetition itself. The same technique will be used once more in the thirty-second verse (li'l-rijāli naṣībun mimma'ktasabū wa li'l-nisāʾi naṣībun mimma'ktasabna), and will be compared there in a table.

A similar repetition was treated at al-Aḥzāb 33/35 — there ten pairs of attributes were counted out one by one, and in that discussion it was recorded as my own reading that "the repetition itself carries information". I keep the same record here: this is an observation, not a transmitted report.

نَصِيب — the root ن-ص-ب

The concrete sense of the root: to plant something, to set it standing upright. Naṣb — to set up; nuṣub — an erected stone; naṣab — weariness (setting oneself up, wearing oneself out). The root was treated at al-Inshirāḥ 94/7 (fa-idhā faraghta fa'nṣab) and at al-Ghāshiya 88/3.

And that the word naṣīb comes from this root is worth recording: a share is what has been set up — put in its place, fixed. The word carries "being determined" within itself.

The verse says this separately as well: naṣīban mafrūḍā.

مَّفْرُوضًا — the root ف-ر-ض

Root ف-ر-ض: to notch, to cut a mark. To fix the measure of something by opening a mark upon it. The root was treated in detail at al-Nūr 24/1 (faraḍnāhā); I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.

The record made there sits directly here: farḍ is not "a heavy obligation" but a notched measure. What is not left indefinite.

And the use of the two words together is an emphasis: naṣīban mafrūḍā — "a share set up and notched". Both words state fixity.

مِمَّا قَلَّ مِنْهُ أَوْ كَثُرَ — the amount rendered immaterial

The sentence removes the size of the estate from the ruling: "of the little of it and of the much."

I record this as an observation: the coming into being of the right is not tied to the amount. It cannot be said of a small estate that "nothing will come out of it anyway".

Historical background

It is transmitted in the sources that in that period the estate was given to the men who could fight and ride, and that women and small children took no share. It is also transmitted that in some places the woman herself was counted as an object of inheritance — and this will be forbidden outright in the nineteenth verse (lā yaḥillu lakum an tarithu'l-nisāʾa karhā).

I relate this in the language of "it is transmitted"; I give no name of a person or a tribe.

And the function of the verse, as it can be read from the text, is this: before the figures of the shares are given in the eleventh verse, the right itself is proclaimed. The seventh verse is the principle, the eleventh its reckoning.


4/8

وإذا حضر القسمة أولو القربى واليتامى والمساكين فارزقوهم منه وقولوا لهم قولا معروفا

Wa idhā ḥaḍara'l-qismata ulu'l-qurbā wa'l-yatāmā wa'l-masākīnu fa'rzuqūhum minhu wa qūlū lahum qawlan maʿrūfā

"If relatives, orphans and the poor are present at the division, give them something out of it, and speak to them a kindly word."

A verse set among the verses of inheritance

The seventh verse said that the share exists; the eleventh will give the shares. The eighth verse stands between the two and speaks of those who have no share.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the position of the verse: before it works out the reckoning of the right, the sūra names those who fall outside the reckoning. A field is left outside the law.

The same structure was treated at al-Baqara 2/237: the leaving of a field beyond the share the law assigns (wa lā tansawu'l-faḍla baynakum). I rely on that treatment. What the two verses have in common is this: a ruling is laid down, and then a door is opened beyond the ruling.

Who is counted

GroupWhoShare of the estate
أُو۟لُوا۟ ٱلْقُرْبَىٰRelatives — but those who take no shareNone
ٱلْيَتَٰمَىٰOrphansNone in this context
ٱلْمَسَٰكِينThe poorNone

What the three have in common: they are there at the division but are not included in the reckoning.

مِسْكِين — root س-ك-ن: stillness, absence of movement. Sakana — it came to rest; sakīna — calm, tranquillity; maskana — the immobilised condition of poverty. The lexicographers record the picture of the word thus: the person whom poverty itself has made unable to move from his place. The word was treated in al-Balad and al-Māʿūn.

The disagreement over the character of the ruling

Whether this verse is a binding ruling or a recommendation has been debated in classical exegesis:

ViewIts ground
A binding rulingThe imperative mood (fa'rzuqūhum)
Recommended (mandūb)That no amount is specified; that the verse is not named together with the shares of inheritance
That it has lapsedThe view that the ruling changed when the verses of inheritance came later

This disagreement is real and its outcome differs among the schools of law. I do not impose a preference, I issue no legal ruling, and none of them is binding.

What follows from the wording of the verse and is not in dispute: no amount is stated, and a word is added beside the command.

وَقُولُوا۟ لَهُمْ قَوْلًا مَّعْرُوفًا — a second time

The same sentence occurred in the fifth verse too. In both verses the party addressed is the one left empty-handed.

And its function here is worth recording: when nothing is given at a division, or too little is given, what breaks the relationship is most often not the amount but the word that is spoken. The verse sets the word to be spoken beside the thing to be given.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the standing of the two commands side by side in one sentence.


4/9

وليخش الذين لو تركوا من خلفهم ذرية ضعافا خافوا عليهم فليتقوا الله وليقولوا قولا سديدا

Wa'l-yakhsha'lladhīna law tarakū min khalfihim dhurriyyatan ḍiʿāfan khāfū ʿalayhim, fa'l-yattaqu'llāha wa'l-yaqūlū qawlan sadīdā

"Let those be wary who, if they left weak offspring behind them, would fear for them. Let them be mindful of God and speak a word that is right / that holds."

The mirror the verse sets up

This verse uses one of the plainest ethical techniques in the Qurʾān, and the name of the technique is exchange of places.

The structure of the sentence is this: "those who, if they themselves left weak offspring behind them, would fear for them…"that is, the one addressed is told to put his own child in the place of the orphan before him.

And this is not an appeal to feeling but an appeal to reasoning. The verse does not say "have pity"; it says "consider your own situation". The difference between the two is this: pity depends on the state of the other party and shifts; exchange of places is a measure, and it is constant.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the construction of the conditional clause (law tarakū … khāfū ʿalayhim).

The difference between خَشْيَة and خَوْف

The verse uses two different roots in the same sentence, and this must be recorded.

RootWordThe distinction the lexicographers record
خ-ش-يWa'l-yakhsha (imperative)A wariness grounded in knowledge, mixed with reverence. The Qurʾān mostly uses it of God
خ-و-فKhāfū (perfect)Fear arising from a harm; general

And their places in the word order are meaningful: khashya is commanded of the one addressed, while khawf is ascribed to the hypothetical father.

I record this as an observation about word order: the sentence takes the natural fear a man feels for his own child (khawf) and turns it into the deliberate wariness that ought to be felt for another's child (khashya).

ذُرِّيَّةً ضِعَٰفًا — the journey of the word through the sūra

ضِعَاف — root ض-ع-ف: weakness. And this root will return in a far heavier place in the later parts of the sūra:

VerseWordWho
9ḍiʿāfanThe children left behind
75al-mustaḍʿafīna mina'l-rijāli wa'l-nisāʾi wa'l-wildānThose made weak
98al-mustaḍʿafīna …Those unable to migrate
127al-mustaḍʿafīna mina'l-wildānChildren whose rights are not given them

In the ninth verse weakness is a state; in the seventy-fifth it passes into Form X and becomes something that is done.

This distinction was treated at al-Qaṣaṣ 28/4-5, and it was recorded there: "يَسْتَضْعِفُ — root ض-ع-ف, Form X: to reckon someone weak and to make him weak. The pattern matters: weakness is not something that happens of itself but something that is done." I rely on that treatment.

This weave of roots is one of the clearest data showing the backbone of the sūra, and the places of the words can be counted.

قَوْلًا سَدِيدًا — the root س-د-د

Root س-د-د: to close a breach, to stop it up; and to aim straight, to hit the mark. Sadd — a barrier, a dam (a wall that closes a gap); sadād — hitting the mark; musaddad — aimed at a target.

So qawlan sadīdan says two things at once: a word that hits the mark and a word that closes a gap.

The same expression occurs at al-Aḥzāb 33/70 (yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanu'ttaqu'llāha wa qūlū qawlan sadīdā) and was treated there; I rely on that treatment.

Comparing the two verses is worth recording:

PlaceThe word spoken, and for whom
al-Aḥzāb 33/70General — speech itself is being regulated
al-Nisāʾ 4/9Speech in the setting where an orphan is present

And the context here makes the sense of the word precise: the word spoken at the division of an estate and at the making of a bequest. What the verse asks for, then, is a word that is both true and leaves no gap.

The disagreement over whom the verse addresses

Several views are transmitted in the classical commentaries about whom this verse speaks to:

ViewThose addressed
1Guardians — those who hold the orphan's property
2Those at the bedside of the dying — who urge a man to bequeath his property to someone else; the verse warns them
3The one making the bequest — that he not bequeath so much as to leave his heirs destitute

I do not impose a preference. All three are compatible with the wording of the verse, and all three come out at the same place: that the right of the one left behind be looked after.


4/10

إن الذين يأكلون أموال اليتامى ظلما إنما يأكلون في بطونهم نارا وسيصلون سعيرا

Inna'lladhīna yaʾkulūna amwāla'l-yatāmā ẓulman innamā yaʾkulūna fī buṭūnihim nārā, wa sayaṣlawna saʿīrā

"Those who consume the property of orphans wrongfully consume nothing but fire into their bellies; and they will enter a blazing fire."

The closing of the block

The orphan block (2-10) closes here, and the closing is the harshest sentence in the block.

The course of the block is worth recording:

VerseLanguage
2Command and prohibition; verse-ending: ḥūban kabīrā
3-4Ruling and condition
5-6Process and measure
7-8The right and what lies beyond the right
9The call to change places
10The outcome: fire

The block, that is, begins with regulation, continues with reasoning and ends with sanction. This is a countable sequence.

ظُلْمًا — the place of the qualification

The verse does not say "those who consume the orphan's property"; it says "those who consume it wrongfully".

This qualification is necessary, because the sixth verse permitted the poor guardian to consume bi'l-maʿrūf. The word ẓulman keeps the two verses apart.

The concrete sense of the root ظ-ل-م: to put a thing somewhere other than its place. The root was treated in al-Baqara and at Luqmān 31/13; I rely on those treatments.

And this sense of the root matches the subject of the verse exactly: the orphan's property is put somewhere other than where it belongs.

إِنَّمَا يَأْكُلُونَ فِى بُطُونِهِمْ نَارًا — the building of the picture

There are three elements in the sentence, and the three work together:

ElementWhat it does
إِنَّمَاThe particle of restriction: "nothing but, only". It says that what they consume is nothing else
فِى بُطُونِهِمْ"Into their bellies" — where the act goes is stated openly
نَارًاThe name of what is eaten: fire

What the sentence does is to recount a future punishment in the present tense. The verb is imperfect (yaʾkulūn) — it is happening now. The punishment is stated separately and in the future: wa sayaṣlawna saʿīrā.

Two separate things, then, are being said: one that is happening now (what is eaten is fire), the other that will happen later (they will enter the fire).

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the moods of the two verbs.

A picture shared with al-Baqara

The same picture was set up at al-Baqara 2/174: "Inna'lladhīna yaktumūna mā anzala'llāhu mina'l-kitābi… ulāʾika mā yaʾkulūna fī buṭūnihim illa'l-nār" — there the heading of the section was "Those who fill their bellies with fire". I rely on that treatment.

Comparing the two verses is worth recording:

PlaceWhoWhat they do
al-Baqara 2/174Those who conceal something of the Book and take a small price for itThey turn knowledge into money
al-Nisāʾ 4/10Those who consume the orphan's property wrongfullyThey turn a trust into property

In both, the same verb (yaʾkulūna fī buṭūnihim), the same object (nār). This is a shared expression between two sūras that can be verified.

And the point in common is this, which I record as my own reading: in both verses a benefit is obtained in exchange for something that ought to have been protected. The Qurʾān names these two acts with the same sentence.

سَعِير — the root س-ع-ر

Root س-ع-ر: the kindling and flaring up of a fire. Saʿara'l-nār — he kindled the fire; mustaʿir — set ablaze. The root was treated in al-Mulk and al-Qamar.

And the verb sayaṣlawna — root ص-ل-ي: to enter the fire, to burn in the fire. The word occurred in al-Ḥāqqa, al-Muddaththir and al-Inshiqāq.

What this says to the present

The bearing of this block (2-10) on the present can be written without accusing anyone; what is treated is the structure the block establishes.

One. The most fragile form of a trust. From beginning to end the block regulates one situation: that property is in someone else's hands while its owner cannot defend it. This situation is not peculiar to the orphan's property — agency, guardianship, holding an office, using an institution's funds all have the same structure. The measures the block lays down (not mixing, testing, handing over, calling witnesses) fit that whole structure.

Two. The measure of changing places. The mirror set up by the ninth verse is still one of the most workable instruments of moral reasoning today: if your own child were in the same position. The verse puts this not as a feeling but as a method of reckoning.

Three. And a limit. It does not follow from this block that everyone who holds property in his hands is under suspicion. The sixth verse lays down two separate rulings according to the guardian's circumstances and opens a way for the one who is poor. The block does not do away with trust; it asks that trust be open to examination.


4/11

يوصيكم الله في أولادكم للذكر مثل حظ الأنثيين … من بعد وصية يوصي بها أو دين

Yūṣīkumu'llāhu fī awlādikum li'l-dhakari mithlu ḥaẓẓi'l-unthayayn, fa-in kunna nisāʾan fawqa'thnatayni fa-lahunna thuluthā mā tarak, wa in kānat wāḥidatan fa-laha'l-niṣf, wa li-abawayhi li-kulli wāḥidin minhuma'l-sudusu mimmā taraka in kāna lahū walad, fa-in lam yakun lahū waladun wa warithahū abawāhu fa-li-ummihi'l-thuluth, fa-in kāna lahū ikhwatun fa-li-ummihi'l-sudus, min baʿdi waṣiyyatin yūṣī bihā aw dayn, ābāʾukum wa abnāʾukum lā tadrūna ayyuhum aqrabu lakum nafʿā, farīḍatan mina'llāh, inna'llāha kāna ʿAlīman Ḥakīmā

"God enjoins upon you concerning your children: to the male the like of the share of two females. If they are women more than two, theirs is two-thirds of what is left; if she is one alone, hers is a half. To his parents, to each one of them, falls a sixth of what he leaves, if he has a child. If he has no child and his parents are his heirs, a third falls to his mother. If he has brothers, a sixth falls to his mother. All this after any bequest made and after any debt. Your fathers and your sons — you do not know which of them is nearer to you in benefit. This is an ordinance from God. God is Knowing, Wise."

First, a note on method — and this note holds for the whole of the eleventh, twelfth and hundred and seventy-sixth verses

Inheritance is the most technical discussion in classical jurisprudence, and it produced a discipline of its own (farāʾiḍ).

What will be done in this section is this: 1. The shares given by the verse's own wording are set out in a table. 2. The terms are analysed: ḥaẓẓ, waṣiyya, dayn, kalāla, farīḍa. 3. The order of priority the verse itself lays down is brought to the fore: min baʿdi waṣiyyatin yūṣī bihā aw dayn.

And these will not be done:

  • The debates over reckoning will not be entered into. What is to be done when the shares do not reach one whole or exceed it (the matters known in the classical literature as ʿawliyya and raddiyya), which heir is excluded in which case, the position of the grandfather and of the brothers — none of these is the subject of this text.
  • No legal ruling will be issued and no preference will be imposed.
  • This is not a guide to practice. The division of an actual estate belongs to those competent in it and to the relevant law.

And this record is entered plainly: inheritance is a subject of jurisprudence in which there are differences of detail among the schools of law; nothing related in this section is binding.

يُوصِيكُمُ ٱللَّهُ — the choice of verb

The verse does not say yaḥkumu (He rules) or yaʾmurukum (He commands you). It says Yūṣīkum — "He enjoins upon you, He charges you."

The concrete sense of the root و-ص-ي: to join, to attach one thing to another. Arḍun wāṣiya — land whose plants have run together, contiguous ground. And from there waṣiyya: to carry a matter over to another, to attach it to him.

The picture in the root, then, is a joining. And this looks in the same direction as the word al-arḥām (ties) in the sūra's first verse.

I record this as an observation about a word: the ruling on inheritance is given not with the verb "to rule" but with a verb from the root of "joining".

And that the verb is imperfect must be recorded: yūṣīkum — ongoing. The pattern states that the ruling is not a one-time order but a lasting arrangement.

حَظّ — the root ح-ظ-ظ

For "share" the verse here uses not naṣīb but the word ḥaẓẓ.

The root ح-ظ-ظ: the portion, the lot that falls to a person. The lexicographers explain the word as "the portion set aside for a person"; maḥẓūẓ — one whose portion is ample.

The distribution of the two words in the sūra is worth recording:

WordWhereIts context
نَصِيب (naṣīb)7 (twice), 32 (twice), 33, 118The proclamation that the right exists
حَظّ (ḥaẓẓ)11, 176The determination of the amount of the share

This is an observation about word order, and the places of the words can be counted. Naṣīb names the principle, ḥaẓẓ the reckoning.

The shares that follow from the verse's wording — a table

The table below shows only the proportions that occur in the wording of the verse. It is not a table for practice; it does no more than arrange the text of the verse.

CaseWhoThe proportion the verse gives
Children togetherMale childTwice that of the female child (mithlu ḥaẓẓi'l-unthayayn)
Female children only, more than twoThe daughtersTwo-thirds (thuluthā mā tarak)
A single daughterThe daughterA half (al-niṣf)
If the deceased has a childMother and father, each oneA sixth (al-sudus)
The deceased has no child and his parents are his heirsThe motherA third (al-thuluth)
If the deceased has brothersThe motherA sixth (al-sudus)

Every row in the table is in the wording of the verse. No case not found in the verse has been added to the table.

And three things must be recorded that do not appear in the table but can be read from the wording of the verse:

One. The verse names a female heir in three separate places: the daughter (twice), the mother (twice). Most of the rulings, that is, are laid down in order to determine the share of a female heir. This is a countable fact.

Two. The verse states the father's share openly in one case only (a sixth, if there is a child); in the others it does not specify it. The mother's share, on the other hand, is stated openly in two separate cases.

Three. The sentence li'l-dhakari mithlu ḥaẓẓi'l-unthayayn states a proportion, not a ranking of worth. The thing measured in the sentence is the male's share, and that share is defined by reference to the daughter's share — that is, in the sentence the unit of measure is the female share. I record this as an observation about word order, and I draw no ruling from it.

There are explanations transmitted in the classical literature about the ground of this proportion — the distribution of the obligation of maintenance, the obligation of the bridal gift, financial responsibilities within the family, and the like. These explanations are recorded in the language of "it is transmitted"; no preference is imposed, no ruling is established, and current debates are not entered into. The verse itself gives no clause of justification for this proportion.

مِنۢ بَعْدِ وَصِيَّةٍ يُوصِى بِهَآ أَوْ دَيْنٍ — the order of priority the verse itself lays down

This qualification is the most often repeated sentence in the verses of inheritance, and it needs to be brought to the fore.

In the eleventh and twelfth verses this qualification is repeated four times, and each time the form of the verb changes:

PlaceFormWho makes the bequest
11yūṣī bihāThe deceased (masculine singular)
12yūṣīna bihāDeceased women (feminine plural)
12tūṣūna bihāThose addressed (second person plural)
12yūṣā bihāPassive form — who is not specified

Four repetitions are a datum of the text.

And the sense of the qualification is this: before the shares are reckoned, two things are taken out — any bequest made and any debt. The estate itself, that is, is what remains.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the repetition itself: while giving the most technical of reckonings, the verse recalls four times what comes before the reckoning. The right of the one who has a share arises after the obligations the deceased has left behind.

It is recorded in the classical literature that the debt comes before the bequest, although in the verse they are joined by the particle aw (or). This is a question of jurisprudence, and no ruling is issued here. What the wording of the verse says is that both come before the shares.

دَيْن — the root د-ي-ن

Root د-ي-ن. And the family of words the lexicographers record is worth noting: dayn — debt; dāna — he became indebted, he submitted; dīn — religion, and at the same time "judgement, recompense, obedience"; madīna — a city (a place bound to an order); dayyān — the one who calls to account.

The common core is this, and the lexicographers record it: to be bound by a tie, to be under something. The debtor is under the creditor; the servant under his Lord.

I relate this connection as the lexicographers record it, and I build no interpretation upon it.

وَصِيَّة — and its limit

The bequest is named in the verse without restriction. But in the twelfth verse a qualification is added: ghayra muḍārrnot causing harm.

The root ض-ر-ر, Form III. The same pattern was treated at al-Baqara 2/231 (ḍirāran li-taʿtadū), and it was recorded there: "the pattern is Form III (mufāʿala): it states reciprocity or intent. That is, 'so that harm should come to her, knowingly.'" I rely on that treatment.

And the function of the qualification must be recorded: a bequest cannot be used as an instrument for depriving an heir of his share. The verse, that is, foresees the misuse of the very power it grants.

The amount of the bequest is not specified in the verse. In classical jurisprudence a limit has been set in this matter, and its ground is transmitted as the sunna, not the verse. This is a question of jurisprudence; no ruling is issued here and nothing is said about the amount.

ءَابَآؤُكُمْ وَأَبْنَآؤُكُمْ لَا تَدْرُونَ أَيُّهُمْ أَقْرَبُ لَكُمْ نَفْعًا — the position of the sentence

This sentence stands in the very middle of a technical table of reckoning, and its bearing on the subject is not visible at first sight.

"Your fathers and your sons — you do not know which of them is nearer to you in benefit."

I record what the sentence does as my own reading, and its ground is the place where the sentence stands:

At the division of an estate the most natural human objection is this: "he was closer", "he gave more labour", "he will bring more benefit". The sentence is set directly in the path of that objection and ties it to a lack of knowledge.

The shares, that is, are given not by the benefit of persons but by a fixed measure — because the knowledge needed to calculate benefit is not in human hands.

And the verb must be recorded: lā tadrūn — "you do not know". The root د-ر-ي: to know something by searching it out, by following its trace. The verb says that the knowledge is not obtainable.

The pattern looks in the same direction as the pattern treated at al-Baqara 2/216: "It may be that you dislike a thing and it is good for you… God knows and you do not know." And it was recorded there: "the sentence is not a claim to knowledge but the statement of a limit. The place where the decision rests is not what the person sees at that moment." I rely on that treatment, and the same record holds here.

فَرِيضَةً مِّنَ ٱللَّهِ — the closing qualification

The root ف-ر-ض occurred in the seventh verse (naṣīban mafrūḍā); here it comes again. A bridge of words is built between the two verses: the proclamation of the right and the reckoning of the right are joined by the same root.

And the qualification mina'llāh must be recorded: the source of the measure is stated. The shares, that is, are not a custom or a settlement but a measure that has been laid down — this is the verse's own claim.

إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ عَلِيمًا حَكِيمًا — the verse-ending

Two names side by side: ʿAlīm (Knowing) and Ḥakīm (Wise, the one who puts each thing in its place).

And the verse-ending's link with the verse is direct: a few lines earlier the verse had said lā tadrūna — "you do not know". The verse-ending says where the knowledge is.

The concrete sense of the root ح-ك-م was treated in al-Baqara and at Luqmān 31/12: ḥakama — to put the bit in a horse's mouth; ḥikma — knowledge that does not let a thing shift from its place. I rely on that treatment.


4/12

ولكم نصف ما ترك أزواجكم إن لم يكن لهن ولد … وإن كان رجل يورث كلالة أو امرأة وله أخ أو أخت فلكل واحد منهما السدس

Wa lakum niṣfu mā taraka azwājukum in lam yakun lahunna walad, fa-in kāna lahunna waladun fa-lakumu'l-rubuʿu mimmā tarakna min baʿdi waṣiyyatin yūṣīna bihā aw dayn, wa lahunna'l-rubuʿu mimmā taraktum in lam yakun lakum walad, fa-in kāna lakum waladun fa-lahunna'l-thumunu mimmā taraktum min baʿdi waṣiyyatin tūṣūna bihā aw dayn, wa in kāna rajulun yūrathu kalālatan awi'mraʾatun wa lahū akhun aw ukhtun fa-li-kulli wāḥidin minhuma'l-sudus, fa-in kānū akthara min dhālika fa-hum shurakāʾu fi'l-thuluthi min baʿdi waṣiyyatin yūṣā bihā aw daynin ghayra muḍārr, waṣiyyatan mina'llāh, wa'llāhu ʿAlīmun Ḥalīm

"Half of what your wives leave is yours — if they have no child. If they have a child, a quarter of it is yours; after any bequest they have made and after any debt. A quarter of what you leave is theirs — if you have no child. If you have a child, an eighth of it is theirs; after any bequest you have made and after any debt. If a man or a woman leaves an estate as kalāla and has a brother or a sister, a sixth falls to each of them. If they are more than that, they are partners in a third; after any bequest made without causing harm and after any debt. This is a charge from God. God is Knowing, Forbearing."

The shares that follow from the verse's wording — a table

The note on method above holds here too: this table does no more than arrange the wording of the verse; it is not a table for practice.

WhoCaseThe proportion the verse gives
The husbandIf his wife has no childA half (niṣf)
The husbandIf his wife has a childA quarter (rubuʿ)
The wife (or wives)If the husband has no childA quarter (rubuʿ)
The wife (or wives)If the husband has a childAn eighth (thumun)
A sibling (in the case of kalāla)If there is one brother or one sisterA sixth to each (sudus)
Siblings (in the case of kalāla)If they are more than onePartners in a third (shurakāʾu fi'l-thuluth)

The symmetry in the word order

The verse gives the share of the wife and of the husband in the same structure, one after the other, and with the same qualifications.

The husbandThe wife
If there is no child1/21/4
If there is a child1/41/8
Qualificationmin baʿdi waṣiyyatin yūṣīna bihā aw daynmin baʿdi waṣiyyatin tūṣūna bihā aw dayn

The structure is identical, and the share of each side falls by half according to whether there is a child. This is a countable fact.

I record this as an observation about word order: the pattern of the sentence does not change for either side; only the proportions change. And on both sides the same cause yields the same effect: if there is a child, the share falls by half.

كَلَٰلَة — the analysis of the word

This is the most technical and most disputed term in the sūra. It occurs in the twelfth verse, it occurs once more in the hundred and seventy-sixth, and the sūra closes with it.

The root ك-ل-ل. The family of senses in the root:

WordSense
كَلَّ (kalla)To grow weary, to have one's strength fail; to grow blunt (a knife ceasing to cut)
كَلَال (kalāl)Weariness
إِكْلِيل (iklīl)A crown — what encircles the head
كُلّ (kull)All, the whole — that which encompasses
تَكَلَّلَTo encompass, to surround

There are two clusters of sense: to grow weary/blunt, and to encompass. And the lexicographers explain the term kalāla by both of them.

The disagreement over what the term is:

ViewWho or what kalāla is
1The deceased — one who has neither child nor father
2The heirs — relatives who come from the side, not bound to the deceased directly (as ascendants or descendants)
3The relationship itself — the indirect, collateral tie

And the term's link with the language is explained as follows, which I relate as it is transmitted: the estate arrives "wearily" — since it does not come along the direct line, it comes round about, encircling. Like the iklīl (the crown), it is arranged not at the centre but around the edge.

It is plainly recorded in the sources that the definition of the word was disputed in the classical period, and it is transmitted that this disagreement has persisted from the earliest times. No preference is adopted in this section and no legal ruling is issued.

What follows from the wording of the verse and is not in dispute is this: in the twelfth verse the share of the siblings named in the case of kalāla is a sixth and a third; in the hundred and seventy-sixth the share of the siblings named is a half, two-thirds, and li'l-dhakari mithlu ḥaẓẓi'l-unthayayn. The proportions the two verses give are different, and the explanation of that difference is a discussion in classical jurisprudence. It is not entered into here.

شُرَكَآءُ فِى ٱلثُّلُثِ — partnership

The root ش-ر-ك: partnership. The word generally occurs in the Qurʾān in a negative context (shirk). Here it is used in its technical and neutral sense: to be a partner in a share.

I record this as an observation about a word: the root itself is not evil; what is evil is where the partnership is set up. The same record was entered in the treatment of Luqmān 31/13 as well.

غَيْرَ مُضَآرٍّ — the limit of the bequest

This was treated above (in the discussion of 4/11). I record it once more here, because the qualification occurs only in this verse.

And its position needs to be recorded: the qualification comes after the case of kalāla. That is, in the case where the estate passes in the most indirect way, the possibility of the bequest turning into an instrument of dispossession is named expressly.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the place of the qualification.

وَصِيَّةً مِّنَ ٱللَّهِ — and the verse-ending

The eleventh verse ended with farīḍatan mina'llāh; the twelfth ends with waṣiyyatan mina'llāh.

Both words point to the same place, but from different sides: farīḍa — a notched measure; waṣiyya — a charge that has been attached. And both with the same qualification: mina'llāh.

The verse-ending changes too: the eleventh verse ends with ʿAlīman Ḥakīmā, the twelfth with ʿAlīmun Ḥalīm.

حَلِيم — root ح-ل-م: one who does not hurry, who is not carried away by his anger, who is grave. The opposite of the word is safah (lightness), which occurred in the fifth verse.

I record this as a weave of words: the block opened in the fifth verse with the word sufahāʾ (the light ones); the twelfth verse closes with the name Ḥalīm (the grave one). The two words are the two ends of the same measure, and both stand in the dictionary.

And the placing of the name Ḥalīm here must be recorded separately: the division of an estate is one of the places where people lose their temper most quickly. The verse sets the ruling beneath a name that does not hurry. I give this as my own reading.


4/13-14

تلك حدود الله ومن يطع الله ورسوله يدخله جنات تجري من تحتها الأنهار خالدين فيها وذلك الفوز العظيم · ومن يعص الله ورسوله ويتعد حدوده يدخله نارا خالدا فيها وله عذاب مهين

Tilka ḥudūdu'llāh, wa man yuṭiʿi'llāha wa rasūlahū yudkhilhu jannātin tajrī min taḥtiha'l-anhāru khālidīna fīhā, wa dhālika'l-fawzu'l-ʿaẓīm · Wa man yaʿṣi'llāha wa rasūlahū wa yataʿadda ḥudūdahū yudkhilhu nāran khālidan fīhā wa lahū ʿadhābun muhīn

"These are the limits set by God. Whoever obeys God and His Messenger, He will admit him into gardens beneath which rivers flow, to dwell there for ever. That is the great triumph. And whoever disobeys God and His Messenger and oversteps His limits, He will admit him into a fire, to dwell there for ever; and for him there is a humiliating punishment."

The symmetry of the two verses

The two verses are each other's reflection in a mirror, and this can be followed word by word:

1314
ConditionWa man yuṭiʿi — the one who obeysWa man yaʿṣi — the one who disobeys
AdditionWa yataʿadda ḥudūdah — and oversteps the limits
OutcomeYudkhilhu jannātYudkhilhu nār
DurationKhālidīna fīhā (plural)Khālidan fīhā (singular)
QualityAl-fawzu'l-ʿaẓīmʿAdhābun muhīn

The difference in the fourth row is worth recording and is a datum of the text: for the garden the plural is used (khālidīn), for the fire the singular (khālidan).

Several explanations of this difference are given in the classical commentaries: the flow of the sentence and the harmony of the verse-ending; or that the garden is shared while the fire is solitary. I impose no preference; the one certain thing is that the difference is there in the text.

حُدُودُ ٱللَّهِ — and a word shared with al-Baqara

The root ح-د-د: the place where a thing ends, an edge. Ḥadīd — iron (a sharp edge); ḥadd — a limit; ḥidād — sharpness.

The word occurred many times in the section on divorce in al-Baqara, and it was recorded there that it is given in two different patterns:

"تِلْكَ حُدُودُ ٱللَّهِ فَلَا تَعْتَدُوهَا — 'these are the limits set by God, do not overstep them.' The word حُدُود recurs many times in this section; in verse 187 it said fa-lā taqrabūhā (do not approach them), here fa-lā taʿtadūhā (do not overstep them). Two patterns in two separate places: one of distance, one of a boundary."

I rely on that treatment.

And one observation must be recorded: in al-Baqara the words ḥudūdu'llāh were placed at the end of the rulings on divorce; in al-Nisāʾ they are placed at the end of the rulings on inheritance. In both places the word closes a block in which sharing within the family is regulated. This is a similarity of structure between two sūras that can be verified.

The character of the block's closing

The verses of inheritance (11-12) are a wholly technical text: proportions, conditions, exceptions. The thirteenth and fourteenth verses set a frame over that technique.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the order of the verses: having finished the reckoning, the sūra says what the reckoning is. The shares are not an arithmetic but a limit; and the overstepping of the limit is named not as an error in calculation but as an act of disobedience.

And the choice of the verb yataʿadda must be recorded. The root ع-د-و: to exceed the bound, to pass over onto something. The verse does not say "the one who miscalculates"; it says "the one who oversteps the limit". Injustice in the division of an estate is named not as a mistake in arithmetic but as a breach of a boundary.

مُّهِين — the root ه-و-ن

The root ه-و-ن: lightness, worthlessness, lowness. Hūn — ease and lightness; hawān — abasement; muhīn — the one who abases.

And the placing of the word here is worth recording: what is done in a quarrel over an estate is to leave the other party out of the reckoning — that is, to count him as worth nothing. The name of the recompense is given from the same root: muhīn.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the root of the word together with the subject of the block.

What this says to the present

One. That the bequest and the debt come first. What is most often forgotten in the discussion of an estate is the qualification the verse repeats four times: what is to be shared out is what remains after the obligations are taken out. This is still today the point most often skipped — when the division of an estate is being discussed, the debts of the deceased usually come to mind last. The verse puts them first.

Two. The rejection of the calculus of benefit. The sentence lā tadrūna ayyuhum aqrabu lakum nafʿā closes the argument over "who deserved more". That argument is still where an inheritance does the most damage, and it usually runs on things that cannot be measured: who cared for him more, who was closer to him. The verse ties the measure to what can be measured.

Three. And a limit. How an actual estate is to be divided does not follow from here. This section is not a text of farāʾiḍ; it analyses the wording and the terms of the verse. Application belongs to the law and the jurisprudence competent in it.


4/15-16

واللاتي يأتين الفاحشة من نسائكم فاستشهدوا عليهن أربعة منكم فإن شهدوا فأمسكوهن في البيوت حتى يتوفاهن الموت أو يجعل الله لهن سبيلا · واللذان يأتيانها منكم فآذوهما فإن تابا وأصلحا فأعرضوا عنهما

Wa'llātī yaʾtīna'l-fāḥishata min nisāʾikum fa'stashhidū ʿalayhinna arbaʿatan minkum, fa-in shahidū fa-amsikūhunna fi'l-buyūti ḥattā yatawaffāhunna'l-mawtu aw yajʿala'llāhu lahunna sabīlā · Wa'lladhāni yaʾtiyānihā minkum fa-ādhūhumā, fa-in tābā wa aṣlaḥā fa-aʿriḍū ʿanhumā, inna'llāha kāna Tawwāban Raḥīmā

"Against those of your women who commit indecency, call four witnesses from among you. If they bear witness, keep them in the houses until death takes them or God appoints a way for them. As for the two among you who commit it, cause them hurt. If they repent and set themselves right, turn away from them. God is ever relenting, merciful."

A note on method

These two verses produced a long discussion in classical jurisprudence and exegesis, and that discussion is connected with Sūrat al-Nūr.

This field was treated in detail in the discussion of al-Nūr 24/2 and 24/4, and it was recorded plainly there: "This verse and those that follow it produced one of the widest discussions in classical jurisprudence. In this section the disagreements within that discussion are transmitted, none of them is preferred and none of them is binding. How the penalty is to be applied today, whether it is to be applied at all, and the current debates around this are not the subject of this text."

The same record holds here. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat what was treated there. Only the points peculiar to these two verses will be treated here.

أَرْبَعَةً مِّنكُمْ — four witnesses

The condition of four witnesses was treated in detail in the discussion of al-Nūr 24/4 and 24/13. The record made there was this, and it sits here: by tying the accusation itself to four witnesses, it is in practice closed off.

And there is a detail in the word order here: fa'stashhidū — Form X. The root ش-ه-د. Form X states asking, demanding: "demand that witnesses be produced."

The verse, that is, places the accuser directly under an obligation. The accusation gives rise to the demand for witnesses.

أَوْ يَجْعَلَ ٱللَّهُ لَهُنَّ سَبِيلًا — the qualification left open

The most striking side of the verse is that it carries a clause showing the ruling to be provisional in itself: "or until God appoints a way for them."

The explanation widely transmitted in the classical commentaries about this clause is the following, and I relate it as it is transmitted: this is the announcement, in the verse's own wording, that the ruling is provisional; a "way" was opened by a later regulation.

There are differing views in the classical literature as to which verse or which regulation this was. I impose no preference and issue no legal ruling.

What follows from the wording of the verse and is not in dispute is this: the ruling carries within itself a clause of termination. This is not a structure often met with in the Qurʾān, and it is a datum of the text.

فَـَٔاذُوهُمَا — the indefiniteness of the word

The sixteenth verse provides for a measure against two persons but does not define the measure: fa-ādhūhumā — "cause them hurt".

The root أ-ذ-ي: to injure, to trouble. The word was treated at al-Aḥzāb 33/57-58; I rely on that treatment.

And that the word is left without a measure must be recorded: in Sūrat al-Nūr there was a number (miʾata jalda); here there is no number. It is transmitted in the classical commentaries that this difference has to do with the ruling's being laid down by stages.

In this matter I impose no preference and issue no legal ruling.

فَإِن تَابَا وَأَصْلَحَا فَأَعْرِضُوا۟ عَنْهُمَا — the block's real qualification

And this is the clause in the block that most needs to be dwelt on, because it comes immediately after the clause of the ruling.

ElementWhat it is
تَابَاThey repented — root ت-و-ب: to turn back
أَصْلَحَاThey set things right — root ص-ل-ح
فَأَعْرِضُوا۟ عَنْهُمَاTurn away, let it be — root ع-ر-ض

That the three verbs work together must be recorded: repentance alone is not enough, iṣlāḥ is asked for beside it; and in return the community is asked to close the matter.

The expression فَأَعْرِضُوا۟ عَنْهُمَا does not say "forgive"; it says "turn away, do not press it". What is commanded, that is, is that the matter not be kept on the agenda.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the verb itself. And it looks in the same direction as the measure treated throughout al-Nūr: as the sūra closes a matter, so it closes the talking about it.

The root ص-ل-ح and its place in the sūra

This root is one of the busiest in Sūrat al-Nisāʾ, and its places can be counted:

VerseWordWhere
16aṣlaḥāThe close of the discussion of indecency
35iṣlāḥan, yuwaffiqi'llāhu baynahumāThe close of the discussion of conflict within the family
114iṣlāḥin bayna'l-nāsThe good kind of secret conversation
128an yuṣliḥā baynahumā ṣulḥā, wa'l-ṣulḥu khayrBetween husband and wife
129wa in tuṣliḥū wa tattaqūThe close of the discussion of justice

Four of the five places are where a dispute comes to an end.

I record this as my own reading: the sūra tends to close its rulings not with a sanction but with setting right. This will be shown separately in the discussion of the thirty-fifth verse.


4/17-18

إنما التوبة على الله للذين يعملون السوء بجهالة ثم يتوبون من قريب فأولئك يتوب الله عليهم · وليست التوبة للذين يعملون السيئات حتى إذا حضر أحدهم الموت قال إني تبت الآن

Innama'l-tawbatu ʿala'llāhi li'lladhīna yaʿmalūna'l-sūʾa bi-jahālatin thumma yatūbūna min qarībin fa-ulāʾika yatūbu'llāhu ʿalayhim, wa kāna'llāhu ʿAlīman Ḥakīmā · Wa laysati'l-tawbatu li'lladhīna yaʿmalūna'l-sayyiʾāti ḥattā idhā ḥaḍara aḥadahumu'l-mawtu qāla innī tubtu'l-āna wa la'lladhīna yamūtūna wa hum kuffār, ulāʾika aʿtadnā lahum ʿadhāban alīmā

"The repentance God will accept is only that of those who do evil in ignorance and then repent soon after. It is these whose repentance God accepts. But there is no repentance for those who go on doing evil deeds until, when death comes to one of them, he says 'now I repent'; nor for those who die as deniers. For these We have prepared a painful punishment."

The opposition of the two verses

The seventeenth verse describes the case in which repentance is accepted, the eighteenth the case in which it is not. The two form a pair.

1718
VerbYaʿmalūna'l-sūʾ — singular, a generic nounYaʿmalūna'l-sayyiʾātplural
QualificationBi-jahāla — in ignoranceNo qualification
TimeMin qarīb — soon, within a short timeḤattā idhā ḥaḍara aḥadahumu'l-mawt — until death comes
SpeechInnī tubtu'l-āna — "now I repent"

In every one of the four rows there is an opposition, and this is read off the words themselves.

بِجَهَٰلَة — the sense of the word

The root ج-ه-ل. And the distinction the lexicographers record must be noted: jahl is not only "ignorance"; it also carries the sense of feeling overpowering the mind, of excess, of acting without thinking. The word jāhiliyya too is explained by this second sense.

This is needed if the verse is to be understood. If jahāla were only "not knowing", the door of repentance would be closed to one who sins knowingly — and that does not fit with other verses of the Qurʾān (al-Zumar 39/53; treated in al-Zumar).

Two tendencies are transmitted in the classical commentaries about this word:

ViewWhat jahāla is
1Not knowing the ruling, not being aware
2To act without reckoning the consequence, in a moment of excess — even while knowing

The second view is widely transmitted in the classical commentaries and is in keeping with the family of senses in the root. I impose no preference.

مِن قَرِيبٍ — the interval

"Soon" — no length of time is specified, a nearness is specified.

And the eighteenth verse shows the limit of that nearness: the coming of death. The measure, that is, is not a calendar but a possibility: repentance is what is done while something can still be done.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the opposition of the two verses.

إِنِّى تُبْتُ ٱلْـَٰٔنَ — the words themselves

The verse relates the repentance that is rejected as a sentence: "now I repent."

The word inside the sentence must be recorded: al-āna — "now".

I record this as an observation about word order: what is rejected is not the content of the repentance but its timing. And the word that states the timing is set inside the sentence. That is, in relating the words the verse also shows the flaw in the words within the same sentence.

What cannot be drawn from this discussion

No conclusion such as "after a certain sin the door of repentance is closed" follows from these two verses, and this must be written plainly.

The grounds:

One. The verb of the seventeenth verse is yaʿmalūna'l-sūʾ — a generic noun, and it specifies no kind of sin. Two. What is rejected in the eighteenth verse is repentance postponed to the moment of death; no limit is set on repentance made early. Three. Elsewhere the Qurʾān holds the door of repentance widely open (al-Zumar 39/53). No contradiction can be set up between the two verses.

And one further record: no judgement about any person can be drawn from these verses. Which category a person's repentance falls into lies outside human knowledge. The function of the verse is not an instrument of diagnosis but a warning about timing.


4/19

يا أيها الذين آمنوا لا يحل لكم أن ترثوا النساء كرها ولا تعضلوهن لتذهبوا ببعض ما آتيتموهن إلا أن يأتين بفاحشة مبينة وعاشروهن بالمعروف فإن كرهتموهن فعسى أن تكرهوا شيئا ويجعل الله فيه خيرا كثيرا

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū lā yaḥillu lakum an tarithu'l-nisāʾa karhā, wa lā taʿḍulūhunna li-tadhhabū bi-baʿḍi mā ātaytumūhunna illā an yaʾtīna bi-fāḥishatin mubayyina, wa ʿāshirūhunna bi'l-maʿrūf, fa-in karihtumūhunna fa-ʿasā an takrahū shayʾan wa yajʿala'llāhu fīhi khayran kathīrā

"O you who believe! It is not lawful for you to inherit women against their will. And do not press them in order to take back part of what you have given them — unless they commit a manifest indecency. And live with them in kindness. If you dislike them — it may be that you dislike a thing in which God has placed much good."

The three commands of the verse

The verse says three things, and the three come one after another:

OrderClauseWhat it is
1Lā yaḥillu lakum an tarithu'l-nisāʾa karhāA prohibition — women cannot be made an object of inheritance
2Wa lā taʿḍulūhunna li-tadhhabū bi-baʿḍi mā ātaytumūhunnaA prohibition — they cannot be pressed in order to take back what was given
3Wa ʿāshirūhunna bi'l-maʿrūfA command — live with them in kindness

Two prohibitions and one command. And the command comes after the two prohibitions: first what is not to be done, then what is.

أَن تَرِثُوا۟ ٱلنِّسَآءَ كَرْهًا — one of the sharpest sentences in the sūra

The seventh verse said that women take a share of an estate. The nineteenth verse says that women cannot be taken as an estate.

Twelve verses stand between the two, and both use the same root: و-ر-ث.

VerseWordWhere the woman stands
7naṣībun mimmā tarakaAn heir — the party who takes a share
19an tarithu'l-nisāʾaCannot be an object of inheritance — not the thing taken

This is a weave of roots in the sūra that can be verified, and I record it as my own reading: the same root, twelve verses apart, establishes two separate sides of one right.

And the word karhan must be recorded. The root ك-ر-ه: to dislike, not to want; and karh — compulsion, unwillingness. The word was treated at al-Baqara 2/216 (wa huwa kurhun lakum).

There are two readings of the word's case, and both are found in classical exegesis:

ReadingTo whom karhan belongs
1To the women — against their will
2General — the transaction itself rests on compulsion

I impose no preference; both come out at the same place.

Historical background

It is transmitted in the sources that in that period, when a man died, the wife he left behind was regarded by the deceased's relatives as part of the estate: she could be married, given to another, or prevented from marrying so that her property might be kept in hand.

I relate this in the language of "it is transmitted"; I give no name of a person or a tribe. What the wording of the verse says is clear in any case: the verb is tarithū (to inherit) and its object is al-nisāʾ.

وَلَا تَعْضُلُوهُنَّ — the root ع-ض-ل

This root was analysed at al-Baqara 2/232, and it was recorded there:

"فَلَا تَعْضُلُوهُنَّ — root ع-ض-ل. The concrete sense the lexicographers record is striking: aʿḍalati'l-nāqathe blocking of a camel's delivery, the young unable to come out. From there comes the sense of 'to press, to block someone's way, to leave without a way out'. The choice of the word shows the character of the conduct that is forbidden: the obstruction is set up not by a ruling but by the blocking of the way out."

I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.

Comparing the two verses is worth recording:

PlaceWhat ʿaḍl servesIts purpose
al-Baqara 2/232To prevent a divorced woman from marrying again
al-Nisāʾ 4/19To press and hold a woman within the marriageLi-tadhhabū bi-baʿḍi mā ātaytumūhunna — to take back part of what was given

In the use in al-Nisāʾ the purpose is written out openly: a financial gain. In al-Baqara the purpose was not written. This is a verifiable difference between the two verses.

إِلَّآ أَن يَأْتِينَ بِفَٰحِشَةٍ مُّبَيِّنَةٍ — the scope of the exception

There is a classical disagreement over what the exception attaches to and over what a fāḥisha mubayyina is. The transmitted views are given in a table; no preference is imposed and no legal ruling is issued.

ViewWhat the exception refers back to
1To the prohibition of ʿaḍl — in a particular situation a woman's separating for a payment may come into question
2To the prohibition of inheriting
3To the sentence as a whole

And the word mubayyina must be recorded: root ب-ي-ن, active participle — "that makes itself plain". That is, not an imputation resting on suspicion but a situation whose plainness comes from itself.

This record matters because the same field was treated at al-Nūr 24/4: the accusation itself was tied to four witnesses. Read together, the two verses show that the exception is not a door that can be worked easily.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the pattern of the word together with the verse of al-Nūr.

وَعَاشِرُوهُنَّ بِٱلْمَعْرُوفِ — the centre of the verse

عَاشِرُوا۟ — root ع-ش-ر, Form III (mufāʿala). And the pattern carries information.

The concrete sense of the root: ʿashara — ten; ʿashīra — a tribe, a community living together; muʿāshara — to live together, to be intertwined.

The function of Form III must be recorded: reciprocity. Verbs in this pattern state acts performed by two parties together (qātala — to fight, shāraka — to be a partner, sābaqa — to race).

So ʿāshirūhunna does not mean "treat them well" but "live together with them, each with the other". The verb states not a one-way treatment but a shared life.

I record this as a grammatical observation; its ground is the form itself.

And the qualification bi'l-maʿrūf: root ع-ر-ف — known, recognised. The measure is the measure known in that community. The word draws the limit of a ruling in six places in this sūra (5, 6, 8, 19, 25, 114).

فَإِن كَرِهْتُمُوهُنَّ فَعَسَىٰٓ أَن تَكْرَهُوا۟ شَيْـًٔا وَيَجْعَلَ ٱللَّهُ فِيهِ خَيْرًا كَثِيرًا

And the last sentence of the verse is the very same pattern as one in al-Baqara.

This pattern was treated at al-Baqara 2/216, and what was recorded there sits directly here:

"The most striking side of the verse is that in laying down the ruling it does not deny the aversionThe ruling is laid down without disregarding what the one addressed feels. عَسَىٰٓ — 'it may be'. This particle states no certainty. The verse, that is, does not say 'everything you dislike is good'; it says that the link between the two is not necessary."

I rely on that treatment without fail. And I compare the two verses:

al-Baqara 2/216al-Nisāʾ 4/19
SubjectWar (al-qitāl)Disliking one's wife
The acknowledgement of aversionWa huwa kurhun lakumFa-in karihtumūhunna
ParticleʿAsāʿAsā
StructureTwo-directional: what you love may also be an illOne-directional: good may lie only in what you dislike
ClosingWa'llāhu yaʿlamu wa antum lā taʿlamūnWa yajʿala'llāhu fīhi khayran kathīrā

The difference in the fourth row is a datum of the text and must be recorded: the sentence in al-Baqara was built in two directions (what you dislike may be good, what you love may be an ill); the sentence in al-Nisāʾ states only the first direction.

I record this as my own reading and propose a ground for it: in al-Baqara the one addressed was being called to an obligation, and a warning in both directions was needed. In al-Nisāʾ the one addressed is on the threshold of ending a relationship; the sentence is trying to delay that decision. This is an interpretation, not a transmitted report.

And what the sentence does not say must also be recorded:

The verse does not say "endure it even though you dislike it". The particle ʿasā states no certainty, and the verse guarantees no outcome. What is said is this: aversion is not, by itself, a datum for a ruling. What a person feels at a given moment does not carry sufficient information about the whole of a relationship.

And it cannot be concluded from this sentence that a party who is being harmed must keep the situation going. The sūra itself regulates separation (the section on divorce in al-Baqara, and al-Nisāʾ 4/35, 4/128, 4/130), and the hundred and thirtieth verse says plainly: wa in yatafarraqā yughni'llāhu kullan min saʿatih"if they part, God will enrich each of them out of His abundance."

The sūra, that is, encourages staying together without closing the door to separation. This is a balance within the sūra's own text, and it can be verified by the presence of the two verses.


4/20-21

وإن أردتم استبدال زوج مكان زوج وآتيتم إحداهن قنطارا فلا تأخذوا منه شيئا أتأخذونه بهتانا وإثما مبينا · وكيف تأخذونه وقد أفضى بعضكم إلى بعض وأخذن منكم ميثاقا غليظا

Wa in aradtumu'stibdāla zawjin makāna zawjin wa ātaytum iḥdāhunna qinṭāran fa-lā taʾkhudhū minhu shayʾā, a-taʾkhudhūnahū buhtānan wa ithman mubīnā · Wa kayfa taʾkhudhūnahū wa qad afḍā baʿḍukum ilā baʿḍin wa akhadhna minkum mīthāqan ghalīẓā

"If you wish to take one wife in the place of another, and you have given one of them a heap of wealth, take nothing back from it. Would you take it by slander and manifest sin? And how could you take it, when you have gone in to one another and they have taken from you a solemn pledge?"

قِنطَار — the measure of the word

قِنطَار — root ق-ن-ط-ر. The lexicographers differ over whether the word states a definite measure of weight or "much wealth" in general; I cannot give a definite amount and do not give one.

From the same root comes qanṭara — a bridge. The link the lexicographers make is this: a bridge is the structure that binds two banks together; and a qinṭār is wealth gathered and bound. I relate this link as the lexicographers record it.

And the function of the word here must be recorded: by carrying the amount to its furthest extreme, the verse tests the ruling. "Even if you have given a heap of wealth" — that is, whatever the amount, the ruling does not change. This is a technique of argument (iḥtijāj) in law: the rule is reinforced by giving the extreme case.

أَتَأْخُذُونَهُۥ بُهْتَٰنًا — the form of the question

Having laid down the prohibition, the verse asks a question: "would you take it by slander?"

And in Arabic this is an istifhām inkārī: a question that expects no answer and states a rejection. The pattern was treated in many places in this commentary.

بُهْتَٰن — root ب-ه-ت: to astound, to leave someone stunned. Buhita — he was left dumbfounded. And buhtān is an imputation so baseless as to leave the other party stunned. The word was treated at al-Nūr 24/16 and at al-Aḥzāb 33/58; I rely on those treatments.

What was recorded in the discussion of al-Aḥzāb was this: buhtān names the offence by the state of the victim — that is, the word itself carries the effect the imputation leaves on the other party.

And the context here must be recorded: to invent an accusation in order to take back property. The verse describes a financial greed producing a slander and joins the two acts in one sentence.

وَقَدْ أَفْضَىٰ بَعْضُكُمْ إِلَىٰ بَعْضٍ — the analysis of the word

أَفْضَىٰ — root ف-ض-و. And the concrete sense of the root must be recorded: فَضَاء (faḍāʾ) — emptiness, openness, wide space. Arḍun faḍāʾ — open ground without obstruction.

And the verb is in Form IV: afḍā ilā — to open out towards something, to reach it with no barrier left in between.

The picture in the word, then, is this: the lifting of the veil between two things, their opening to one another.

The lexicographers explain the word here as "to mingle with one another, to come together in intimacy", and in the classical commentaries it is said that this points to the intimacy of married life.

And the placing of the word here is the finest point of the verse. I record this as my own reading: in refusing a financial claim, the verse gives no financial ground. It does not say "that property is hers" or "you have no legal right". The ground it gives is that the veil between them has been lifted.

A legal text, that is, rests a rule of law on intimacy.

مِّيثَٰقًا غَلِيظًا — and a link within the sūra

The root م-ث-ق (و-ث-ق): to bind firmly. Wathīqa — a document; thiqa — trustworthy; mīthāq — a word bound fast.

غَلِيظ — root غ-ل-ظ: thick, coarse, heavy. Ghilẓa — thickness.

And now comes a datum of the text, and it can be verified within the sūra:

This exact expression — mīthāqan ghalīẓā — occurs in three places in the Qurʾān:

PlaceWhose pledge
al-Nisāʾ 4/21The marriage bond between husband and wife
al-Nisāʾ 4/154A pledge taken from a community
al-Aḥzāb 33/7The pledge taken from the prophets

That verse was treated at al-Aḥzāb 33/7; I rely on that treatment.

Comparing these three places yields an observation, which I record as my own reading: the expression the Qurʾān uses for the pledge taken from the prophets is used for marriage as well. No equality is set up between the two bonds; but the word that states the weight of the pledge is the same.

And there is one further detail of the word order: the verse does not say wa akhadhtum minhunna (you took from them); it says wa akhadhna minkum (they took from you). The party who took the pledge is the women.

This is the wording of the sentence and a datum of the text. I draw no ruling from it; I record the subject of the verb.

What this says to the present

One. The three verses between the nineteenth and the twenty-first take aim at a single pattern of conduct: taking back, at the end of a relationship, what is in the other party's hands. The verse closes this off three times, by three separate routes — holding by force, pressing, and slander.

Two. That the command ʿāshirūhunna bi'l-maʿrūf comes in Form III shows that the relationship is named not as a one-way treatment but as a shared life. This is something that can be read off the grammar.

Three. The ground given by the twenty-first verse is as valid today as it was then: where a relationship ends, the intimacy that relationship built cannot be turned into a bargaining counter. The verse says this with the verb afḍā.

And a limit: it does not follow from these verses that one party is right in every case and the other wrong in every case. The verse forbids a particular act and lays down its exception itself. No sweeping ruling is made about a group.


4/22

ولا تنكحوا ما نكح آباؤكم من النساء إلا ما قد سلف إنه كان فاحشة ومقتا وساء سبيلا

Wa lā tankiḥū mā nakaḥa ābāʾukum mina'l-nisāʾi illā mā qad salaf, innahū kāna fāḥishatan wa maqtan wa sāʾa sabīlā

"Do not marry the women your fathers married — except what is already past. That is an indecency, a thing loathed, and an evil way."

The position of the verse

This verse is the continuation of the prohibition in the nineteenth. There it was said that women cannot be taken as an estate; here the most concrete form of that practice is named.

And there is a relation between it and the twenty-third verse: the twenty-third will give a whole list; this verse stands before the list and on its own.

I record this as an observation about word order: its being named separately shows that the ruling is newly laid down and meets a practice of the ones addressed. The list will come in the twenty-third verse; this verse abolishes a practice.

Three descriptions

The verse gives the prohibition three names, and the three come from different directions:

WordRootWhat it looks to
فَٰحِشَةف-ح-ش — an ugliness exceeding all measureThe act itself
مَقْتم-ق-ت — violent loathing, revulsionThe feeling it arouses
سَآءَ سَبِيلًاس-و-أ — to be evilWhere it leads

Three words name the act from three separate sides: what it is, what it makes one feel, where it leads.

The root م-ق-ت is worth recording: the lexicographers explain the word as "the most violent hatred". The word is rare in the Qurʾān and occurs at Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) 40/10 and 40/35; I rely on those treatments.

And there is a linguistic datum recorded in the classical sources, which I relate as it is transmitted: it is said that in pre-Islamic Arab society the term nikāḥ al-maqt ("the marriage of loathing") was used for a marriage of this kind. That the verse uses the same word is for this reason worth noticing; but I give this not as certain historical information but as a record transmitted in the sources.

إِلَّا مَا قَدْ سَلَفَ — the leaving of the past outside

The root س-ل-ف: to go before, to be left behind. Salaf — those who went before; sālif — past.

The function of the clause must be recorded: the ruling is laid down looking forward, and no sanction is provided for the past. The same qualification will come once more at the end of the twenty-third verse.

I record this as my own reading: that where a new ruling is laid down, the life lived before the ruling is not judged by it, is a recurring qualification in this sūra.


4/23

حرمت عليكم أمهاتكم وبناتكم وأخواتكم وعماتكم وخالاتكم وبنات الأخ وبنات الأخت وأمهاتكم اللاتي أرضعنكم وأخواتكم من الرضاعة وأمهات نسائكم وربائبكم اللاتي في حجوركم … وأن تجمعوا بين الأختين إلا ما قد سلف

Ḥurrimat ʿalaykum ummahātukum wa banātukum wa akhawātukum wa ʿammātukum wa khālātukum wa banātu'l-akhi wa banātu'l-ukhti wa ummahātukumu'llātī arḍaʿnakum wa akhawātukum mina'l-raḍāʿati wa ummahātu nisāʾikum wa rabāʾibukumu'llātī fī ḥujūrikum min nisāʾikumu'llātī dakhaltum bihinna, fa-in lam takūnū dakhaltum bihinna fa-lā junāḥa ʿalaykum, wa ḥalāʾilu abnāʾikumu'lladhīna min aṣlābikum wa an tajmaʿū bayna'l-ukhtayni illā mā qad salaf, inna'llāha kāna Ghafūran Raḥīmā

"Forbidden to you are: your mothers, your daughters, your sisters, your paternal aunts, your maternal aunts, your brother's daughters, your sister's daughters, the mothers who nursed you, your sisters through nursing, the mothers of your wives, your stepdaughters in your care, born of wives you have gone in to — if you have not gone in to them there is no fault upon you — the wives of your sons who are of your own loins, and that you should join two sisters together. Except what is already past. God is forgiving, merciful."

A note on method

This verse is the foundational text of the discussion of marriage in classical jurisprudence, and detailed rulings have been developed upon every item in it.

What is done in this section is this: the verse's list is set in order, the terms are analysed, and the logic of the list is shown. On such matters as the scope of the tie of nursing, the position of the stepdaughter, and whether the qualification "in your care" is a condition, there are differences among the schools of law; those differences are not entered into in this section, no preference is adopted and no legal ruling is issued.

The order of the list

The verse counts thirteen items, and these fall into four groups. This is the verse's own order:

GroupItemsThe kind of tie
1. DescentMothers, daughters, sisters, paternal aunts, maternal aunts, brothers' daughters, sisters' daughtersThe tie of blood
2. NursingThe mothers who nursed, sisters through nursingThe tie of milk
3. AffinityThe mothers of wives, stepdaughters, sons' wivesThe tie made by marriage
4. The prohibition of joiningMarrying two sisters at onceThe overlapping of ties

And the order itself must be recorded: the list begins with the tie of blood, continues with the tie of milk, and ends with the tie made by marriage. It moves, that is, from the most natural to the most constructed.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the verse's own order.

رَضَاعَة — the tie of milk

The root ر-ض-ع: to suckle. And this item of the verse is worth recording: a tie produces the same effect as a blood tie although it is not one.

I record this as an observation: the verse does not tie the source of a bond to descent alone. That a child grew up on a woman's milk establishes a legal tie.

On the scope of the tie of nursing, how many feedings establish it and up to what age it holds, there is a wide disagreement in classical jurisprudence. That disagreement is not entered into in this section and no ruling is issued.

رَبَٰٓئِب — stepdaughters

The root ر-ب-ب — the same root as rabb in the first verse. Rabība: a girl who grows up under a person's nurture. The word itself contains the relation of care.

And the qualification in the verse must be recorded: allātī fī ḥujūrikum — "who are in your laps / in your houses".

حِجْر — root ح-ج-ر: the lap; and also a barrier, a bound (ḥijr — a forbidden zone; ḥajr — legal interdiction). The two senses of the word — lap and bound — are in the same root.

Whether this qualification is a condition or a description of the usual case is one of the disputed questions of classical jurisprudence. I impose no preference and issue no ruling.

But the choice of the word yields an observation, which I record as my own reading: the word ḥujūr carries both "lap" and "bound". The word holds within itself the link between protection and prohibition.

ٱلَّذِينَ مِنْ أَصْلَٰبِكُمْ — the function of the qualification

In counting the wives of sons, a qualification is added: alladhīna min aṣlābikum — "who are of your own loins".

This qualification is directly connected with the matter treated at al-Aḥzāb 33/4-5 and 33/37: that an adopted child is not counted as a child of one's own.

The principle recorded in the discussion of al-Aḥzāb was this: "calling a child 'my son' does not make him one's own son." This qualification in al-Nisāʾ is the counterpart of the same principle within a ruling on marriage. I rely on that treatment.

This link between the two sūras is a datum of the text, and the places of the words can be counted.

The logic of the list — an observation

What do those counted in the list have in common?

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the list itself: all the ties counted are ties the person did not choose or that are already established. Mother, daughter, sister, paternal aunt, maternal aunt — these are not chosen. The tie of milk — it is formed in childhood. Mother-in-law, stepdaughter, daughter-in-law — these arise from a marriage already made.

The list, that is, prevents a new tie from being built on top of existing ties. And the prohibition of marrying two sisters at once is the clearest instance of this: a tie already exists between two sisters, and a marriage could turn that tie into a rivalry.

This is an interpretation, not a transmitted report. But it can be read from the list itself.

إِلَّا مَا قَدْ سَلَفَ — a second time

It occurred in the twenty-second verse too. It is repeated two verses later.

And the verse-ending changes: the twenty-second verse ended with sāʾa sabīlā (an evil way); the twenty-third ends with Ghafūran Raḥīmā.

I record this as an observation about word order: the same exception occurs twice, but one closes with reproach and the other with forgiveness. That the new ruling does not run backwards is said with two different names.


4/24

والمحصنات من النساء إلا ما ملكت أيمانكم كتاب الله عليكم وأحل لكم ما وراء ذلكم أن تبتغوا بأموالكم محصنين غير مسافحين

Wa'l-muḥṣanātu mina'l-nisāʾi illā mā malakat aymānukum, kitāba'llāhi ʿalaykum, wa uḥilla lakum mā warāʾa dhālikum an tabtaghū bi-amwālikum muḥṣinīna ghayra musāfiḥīn, fa-ma'stamtaʿtum bihī minhunna fa-ātūhunna ujūrahunna farīḍatan, wa lā junāḥa ʿalaykum fīmā tarāḍaytum bihī min baʿdi'l-farīḍa, inna'llāha kāna ʿAlīman Ḥakīmā

"And married women are forbidden to you — except those your right hands possess. This is God's writ upon you. Apart from these, it is made lawful for you to seek with your wealth, in chastity and not in fornication. To those of them from whom you have had enjoyment, give their bridal gifts as an appointed due. There is no fault upon you in what you agree between you after the appointed due. God is Knowing, Wise."

مُحْصَنَات — the analysis of the word

The root ح-ص-ن: to be protected, to be made secure. Ḥiṣn — a fortress; ḥaṣīn — firm; muḥṣan — protected, brought under protection.

The word was treated in the discussion of al-Nūr 24/4, and it was recorded there that there is disagreement over its scope. I rely on that treatment.

There is a classical disagreement over the sense in which the word comes in this verse:

ViewWho the muḥṣanāt are
1Married women — those brought under protection by marriage
2Chaste women — in general
3Free women

This disagreement is real in the classical commentaries. The context (a list of marriage prohibitions) supports the first reading; I impose no preference.

And an interesting linguistic datum must be recorded: in the continuation of the same verse the word is used this time of men: muḥṣinīna ghayra musāfiḥīn — "in chastity, not in fornication". The root, that is, is applied to both sides.

This is a countable fact, and it is within a single verse.

إِلَّا مَا مَلَكَتْ أَيْمَٰنُكُمْ — a record

This expression occurs several times in the sūra (3, 24, 25, 36, 92) and concerns an institution of society that existed in the classical period.

A record was entered on this matter in the discussion of al-Aḥzāb 33/50, and I carry it over here as it stands:

"No legal ruling was issued on the expression mā malakat aymānuhum in 33/50. The Qurʾān's other records on the same subject (the bringing forward of manumission as a good deed and as an expiation) were recorded without concealment; it was stated that the matter was discussed at length in the history of Islamic thought and that it exceeds the bounds of this commentary."

The same record holds here.

And the Qurʾān's own data can be recorded: in the ninety-second verse of this sūra the freeing of a neck (taḥrīru raqabatin muʾmina) is provided as the expiation for killing by mistake; in the thirty-sixth verse mā malakat aymānukum is included in the list of kindness; and in the twenty-fifth verse the manner of marriage with women in this position is regulated and their bridal gifts are given to them.

These are data of the text. I build no thesis about history from them and draw no ruling.

كِتَٰبَ ٱللَّهِ عَلَيْكُمْ — the function of the clause

"God's writ upon you" — an emphasis in the pattern of the absolute object (mafʿūl muṭlaq).

The sense "to write an obligation" in the root ك-ت-ب was treated at al-Baqara 2/2: "kutiba ʿalaykum — 'it was written for you', that is, it was made obligatory… In this usage a book is not only what is read but a text that brings an obligation." I rely on that treatment.

فَمَا ٱسْتَمْتَعْتُم بِهِۦ مِنْهُنَّ — a disputed expression

This expression has been the subject of different readings in the history of Islamic thought, and this is a known disagreement.

What is done in this section is this: the existence of the disagreement is recorded, no choice is made between the parties, no insinuation is made against any group, and no polemic is entered into.

ReadingWhat istimtāʿ is
1Enjoyment of the marriage itself — the expression describes ordinary marriage, and the verse regulates the bridal gift. This is the reading adopted by the great majority of the classical commentaries
2The view that the expression points to a particular practice, and that its ruling is disputed

This divergence is a question of jurisprudence whose outcome differs among the schools of law. I make no choice, I issue no legal ruling, and none of them is binding.

What follows from the wording of the verse and is not in dispute is this: the command of the sentence is the payment of the bridal gift (fa-ātūhunna ujūrahunna farīḍatan), and this command is a repetition of the command in the sūra's fourth verse (wa ātu'l-nisāʾa ṣaduqātihinna).

أُجُور — a third word

The sūra uses a third word for the bridal gift: ajr.

VerseWordThe root's stress
4ṣaduqātص-د-ق — truthfulness
24, 25ujūrأ-ج-ر — return, wage
24farīḍaف-ر-ض — a notched measure

Three words name the same legal element from three separate sides. This is a countable fact, and it was recorded in the discussion of the fourth verse as well.

وَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْكُمْ فِيمَا تَرَٰضَيْتُم بِهِۦ — the field of consent

تَرَٰضَيْتُم — root ر-ض-و, Form VI: mutual consent.

The same pattern was treated at al-Baqara 2/233 (ʿan tarāḍin minhumā wa tashāwur) and it was recorded there: "Both words are from Forms III and VI, that is, from the patterns that state reciprocity." I rely on that treatment.

And the place of the qualification must be recorded: the verse first lays down a measure (farīḍa), then leaves room for mutual agreement above that measure. The law, that is, draws a floor and leaves the ceiling to the parties.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the qualification min baʿdi'l-farīḍa.


4/25

ومن لم يستطع منكم طولا أن ينكح المحصنات المؤمنات فمن ما ملكت أيمانكم من فتياتكم المؤمنات … فانكحوهن بإذن أهلهن وآتوهن أجورهن بالمعروف … ذلك لمن خشي العنت منكم وأن تصبروا خير لكم

Wa man lam yastaṭiʿ minkum ṭawlan an yankiḥa'l-muḥṣanāti'l-muʾmināti fa-min mā malakat aymānukum min fatayātikumu'l-muʾmināt, wa'llāhu aʿlamu bi-īmānikum, baʿḍukum min baʿḍ, fa'nkiḥūhunna bi-idhni ahlihinna wa ātūhunna ujūrahunna bi'l-maʿrūfi muḥṣanātin ghayra musāfiḥātin wa lā muttakhidhāti akhdān… dhālika li-man khashiya'l-ʿanata minkum, wa an taṣbirū khayrun lakum, wa'llāhu Ghafūrun Raḥīm

"Whoever among you cannot afford to marry free believing women, let him marry from among the believing young women your right hands possess. God knows your faith best. You are all of one another. Marry them with the permission of their people and give them their bridal gifts in the recognised manner… This is for those among you who fear falling into hardship. That you be patient is better for you. God is forgiving, merciful."

بَعْضُكُم مِّنۢ بَعْضٍ — the clause in the middle of the verse

Into the middle of a long clause of ruling a sentence of four words has been set: baʿḍukum min baʿḍ — "you are, one of you, from another."

And this sentence ties back to the sūra's first verse: khalaqakum min nafsin wāḥida.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the shared logic of the two verses: the first verse said that humankind comes from a single root. The twenty-fifth verse, while giving a ruling about the section of society seen as lowest, says the same thing again.

The sentence, that is, is a reminder set into the middle of a ruling: the social difference between the parties is not a difference in respect of being human.

وَٱللَّهُ أَعْلَمُ بِإِيمَٰنِكُمْ — a second parenthetical clause

And immediately before it there is one more sentence: "God knows your faith best."

About the function of this sentence the following is widely transmitted in the classical commentaries: it is a qualification set in the path of people's ranking one another by faith.

I relate this explanation as it is transmitted. And the order of the verse supports it: the sentence comes immediately after the expression "believing young women".

بِإِذْنِ أَهْلِهِنَّ وَءَاتُوهُنَّ أُجُورَهُنَّ — two qualifications

The verse lays down two conditions:

QualificationWhat it is
Bi-idhni ahlihinnaThe permission of their people
Wa ātūhunna ujūrahunna bi'l-maʿrūfThat their bridal gifts be given to them

The pronoun of the second qualification must be recorded: ātūhunna — "give them". The bridal gift is paid to the woman herself. This is the repetition here of the ruling in the fourth verse.

ٱلْعَنَت — the word

The root ع-ن-ت: to fall into hardship, to be hard pressed; and the re-breaking of a broken bone. The lexicographers record for the root the sense of "hardship, harm, a difficult position".

The word occurs at al-Baqara 2/220 as well (wa law shāʾa'llāhu la-aʿnatakum), and there it is in the context of the orphan's property. In both places the word concerns the qualification that a ruling should not press a person too hard.

وَأَن تَصْبِرُوا۟ خَيْرٌ لَّكُمْ — the closing

The verse gives a permission, then says "that you be patient is better for you".

This structure recurs in the sūra, and I record it as my own reading:

VersePermissionWhat is set beside it
4/25Permission to marryWa an taṣbirū khayrun lakum
4/128Permission to make an arrangementWa'l-ṣulḥu khayr
4/149Permission to speak outIn tubdū khayran aw tukhfūhu aw taʿfū ʿan sūʾin fa-inna'llāha kāna ʿAfuwwan Qadīrā

In all three places a ruling is laid down and what is better is shown beside it. This is the same line recorded in the section on divorce in al-Baqara: "the rulings are laid down in detail, but beside every ruling a door of latitude is left open." I rely on that treatment.


4/26-28

يريد الله ليبين لكم ويهديكم سنن الذين من قبلكم ويتوب عليكم … ويريد الذين يتبعون الشهوات أن تميلوا ميلا عظيما · يريد الله أن يخفف عنكم وخلق الإنسان ضعيفا

Yurīdu'llāhu li-yubayyina lakum wa yahdiyakum sunana'lladhīna min qablikum wa yatūba ʿalaykum, wa'llāhu ʿAlīmun Ḥakīm · Wa'llāhu yurīdu an yatūba ʿalaykum wa yurīdu'lladhīna yattabiʿūna'l-shahawāti an tamīlū maylan ʿaẓīmā · Yurīdu'llāhu an yukhaffifa ʿankum wa khuliqa'l-insānu ḍaʿīfā

"God wishes to make things clear to you, to show you the ways of those before you, and to accept your repentance. God is Knowing, Wise. God wishes to accept your repentance; but those who follow their desires wish you to swerve utterly away. God wishes to lighten your burden. Man was created weak."

Four acts of will in three verses

In these three verses the verb يُرِيدُ occurs four times, three of them ascribed to God and one to the other party. This is a countable fact.

OrderWhoWhat is willed
1GodLi-yubayyina lakumto make clear
2GodAn yatūba ʿalaykumto accept repentance
3Alladhīna yattabiʿūna'l-shahawātAn tamīlū maylan ʿaẓīmāthat you swerve
4GodAn yukhaffifa ʿankumto lighten

And the structure itself carries information, which I record as my own reading: after the rulings, what the will that lays them down wants is stated. The verse, that is, explains the intention behind a list of prohibitions running to twenty-three items.

سُنَنَ ٱلَّذِينَ مِن قَبْلِكُمْ — the word

سُنَّة — root س-ن-ن: to do something evenly and smoothly; to open a way. Sanna'l-māʾa — he made the water flow; masnūn — evenly shaped.

The word is plural here: sunan — ways. And the expression "the ways of those before you" states that the rulings have a continuity within history.

The concept of sunnat Allāh was treated in al-Fatḥ, and a record was entered there: "the concept is a measure for understanding the past, not a warrant for judging the present." I keep that record here too.

مَيْلًا عَظِيمًا — the absolute object

The sentence reinforces the verb an tamīlū (that you swerve) with maylan ʿaẓīmā (a great swerving).

And the word's second occurrence in the sūra must be recorded: the same root will return in the hundred and twenty-ninth verse — fa-lā tamīlū kulla'l-mayl ("do not incline wholly to one side").

VerseThe incliningWho does it
27maylan ʿaẓīmāMan's swerving from religion
129kulla'l-maylTurning towards one side between spouses

The same root, at two different scales. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

وَخُلِقَ ٱلْإِنسَٰنُ ضَعِيفًا — the weight of the sentence

"Man was created weak."

And where this sentence is spoken must be recorded: as the ground of the will to lighten. Weakness, that is, is not named as a defect; it is named as the reason for the lightening of the ruling.

The root ض-ع-ف had occurred in this sūra at the ninth verse (dhurriyyatan ḍiʿāfan) and at the seventy-fifth (al-mustaḍʿafīn).

Now the root returns in a third place and in its most general form: khuliqa'l-insānu ḍaʿīfā.

VerseWho is weakIn what respect
9The children left behindA situation
28Man — in generalCreation
75, 98, 127Those made weakSomething that is done

Read together, the three rows show the three layers the sūra builds around weakness: a state, a nature, and a wrong done.

I record this as my own reading; the places of the words can be counted in the text.

And this is an important place for this sūra: the sūra is built on the right of the one who has no protection, and in the twenty-eighth verse it is said that being without protection belongs to everyone. Those addressed by the rulings, that is, are weak too.

What this says to the present

One. The verses between the twenty-sixth and the twenty-eighth come immediately after a long list of prohibitions and set a frame around the list: the aim is not to restrict but to make clear and to lighten. That the intention is stated after a body of rules also determines how the rules are to be read.

Two. The sentence khuliqa'l-insānu ḍaʿīfā makes, in the middle of a text of obligations, one of the plainest admissions about human beings. This sentence produces neither an excuse nor a humiliation. It says that the measure of the burden is set according to the strength of the one who carries it.

And a limit: no conclusion such as "man is weak, and therefore not responsible" follows from here. The verse names weakness not so that responsibility should be lifted but so that it should be lightened — the verb itself is yukhaffifa, not yarfaʿa.


4/29-30

يا أيها الذين آمنوا لا تأكلوا أموالكم بينكم بالباطل إلا أن تكون تجارة عن تراض منكم ولا تقتلوا أنفسكم إن الله كان بكم رحيما · ومن يفعل ذلك عدوانا وظلما فسوف نصليه نارا وكان ذلك على الله يسيرا

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū lā taʾkulū amwālakum baynakum bi'l-bāṭili illā an takūna tijāratan ʿan tarāḍin minkum, wa lā taqtulū anfusakum, inna'llāha kāna bikum Raḥīmā · Wa man yafʿal dhālika ʿudwānan wa ẓulman fa-sawfa nuṣlīhi nārā, wa kāna dhālika ʿala'llāhi yasīrā

"O you who believe! Do not consume one another's property among you by false means — unless it be a trade by mutual consent among you. And do not kill yourselves. God is merciful towards you. Whoever does this in enmity and wrongdoing, We shall cast him into a fire; and that is easy for God."

The opening of the block and its place in the sūra

The twenty-ninth verse opens a new block, and the opening address changes: in the first verse it was yā ayyuha'l-nās (O mankind); here comes yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū (O you who believe).

But the subject does not change. For twenty-eight verses the sūra has been occupied with property in someone else's hands: the orphan's property (2-10), the shares of inheritance (11-12), the bridal gift (4, 20-21, 24-25). The twenty-ninth verse builds the same subject again in its most general form: amwālakum baynakum — "the property among you".

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the repetition of the verb: the verb lā taʾkulū (do not consume) occurs in the sūra at the second verse (wa lā taʾkulū amwālahum), at the sixth (wa lā taʾkulūhā isrāfan), at the tenth (yaʾkulūna amwāla'l-yatāmā), and here. All four are about property, and all four use the same verb.

بِٱلْبَٰطِلِ — the root ب-ط-ل

The root's original sense: to come to nothing, to be void, to be without effect. Baṭala — it came to nothing; bāṭil — what has no ground, what has no counter-value.

And the word's function here must be recorded: the verse does not say "by forbidden means", it says bi'l-bāṭili. The measure, that is, is property changing hands without a counter-value: if what is given has nothing given back for it, that transaction is bāṭil.

The same pattern occurs at al-Baqara 2/188 (wa lā taʾkulū amwālakum baynakum bi'l-bāṭil), and there the giving of bribes to judges is named. The two verses build the same sentence with two different examples. This is a repetition that can be verified.

إِلَّآ أَن تَكُونَ تِجَٰرَةً عَن تَرَاضٍ مِّنكُمْ — the form of the exception

The verse lays down a prohibition and gives its exception with two qualifications.

QualificationWordWhat it states
The firstTijāratanThe change of hands must have a counter-value
The secondʿAn tarāḍin minkumThe change of hands must rest on mutual consent

Tarāḍin — root ر-ض-و, the tafāʿul form. And this form in Arabic states reciprocity: taqātala (they fought one another), taʿāwana (they helped one another). The word is therefore not "to consent" but "to consent to one another" — consent cannot be one-sided.

And the root comes for the third time in this sūra. In the fourth verse there was fa-in ṭibna lakum ʿan shayʾin minhu nafsan (if of their own accord they leave you some part of the bridal gift); in the twenty-fourth fīmā tarāḍaytum bihī min baʿdi'l-farīḍa occurred and was treated there under the heading "the field of consent".

VerseThe subject of the consentWord
4The return of part of the bridal giftṬibna … nafsan
24An arrangement above the appointed bridal giftTarāḍaytum
29Every kind of transfer of propertyTarāḍin

The same measure is present in all three, and the third is the widest. I record this as an observation about word order.

وَلَا تَقْتُلُوٓا۟ أَنفُسَكُمْ — a disagreement

The clause is short and its word carries several senses: anfusakum — "your souls".

There is disagreement in the classical commentaries over this expression, and it must not be concealed:

ReadingWhat anfusakum meansIts ground
ADo not kill one anotherThe Qurʾān's naming of a community as a single body; in the same sūra the records baʿḍukum min baʿḍ (25) and min nafsin wāḥida (1); the verse's coming immediately after the discussion of property — the subject is relations within the community
BDo not kill yourselvesThe word's first and direct sense; the pronoun referring to the second person plural
CDo not cast yourselves into ruinThe verb's figurative extension; the parallel with wa lā tulqū bi-aydīkum ila'l-tahluka at al-Baqara 2/195

All three readings are transmitted; I impose no preference and draw no legal ruling from them.

But an indication that can be verified from the text may be recorded: immediately before the clause stands the expression amwālakum baynakum ("the property among you"), and baynakum plainly states reciprocity. This is an indication supporting reading A. I record it as an indication, not as a preference.

And this too must be recorded: two clauses stand side by side in the same verse — the taking of property unjustly and the taking of life. The sūra forbids both in one breath.

إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ بِكُمْ رَحِيمًا — the choice of verse-ending

The verse lays down two prohibitions and closes with mercy.

The sūra's order of verse-endings was set out in a table in the introductory section: the rulings mostly closed with an attribute of watching (raqīb, ḥasīb, shahīd, samīʿ, baṣīr, khabīr). Here there is not watching but mercy.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is verses twenty-six to twenty-eight: the block immediately before ended with yurīdu'llāhu an yukhaffifa ʿankum (He wishes to lighten your burden). The verse-ending continues that line.

عُدْوَٰنًا وَظُلْمًا — the qualification in the thirtieth verse

The thirtieth verse qualifies the breach of the prohibition in the twenty-ninth with two words: ʿudwānan wa ẓulman.

The root ع-د-و: to exceed the bound, to cross the limit. The root ظ-ل-م: to put a thing somewhere other than its place. The two roots were compared in the discussion of al-Māʾida 5/2 and 5/8: the one states doing too much, the other not giving what is due. I rely on that treatment.

And the coming of the two words together produces a qualification: the verse qualifies not every loss of property or every death but what is done deliberately and wrongfully. This foreshadows the gradation that will be established in the ninety-second and ninety-third verses.

What this says to the present

One. The qualification ʿan tarāḍin minkum ties the validity of a transaction to the will of both parties. That consent be mutual is not the same thing as one party's having signed; the pattern of the word says this.

Two. The measure bi'l-bāṭil asks a different question from "is it forbidden or not": is there a counter-value? This question can be asked even of transactions that look formally flawless.


4/31

إن تجتنبوا كبائر ما تنهون عنه نكفر عنكم سيئاتكم وندخلكم مدخلا كريما

In tajtanibū kabāʾira mā tunhawna ʿanhu nukaffir ʿankum sayyiʾātikum wa nudkhilkum mudkhalan karīmā

"If you avoid the great things you are forbidden, We shall cover over your lesser failings and admit you to an honoured place."

ٱجْتِنَاب — the root ج-ن-ب

The concrete sense of the root: the side, the flank. Janb — the side; jānib — the side or aspect of a thing. And ijtanaba (Form VIII): to leave a thing to one side and walk on, to keep away from it.

The picture in the word is worth recording: to avoid a prohibition is to leave it aside and keep walking. The verb describes not a struggle but a distance.

The same root will return in this sūra at the thirty-sixth verse: wa'l-ṣāḥibi bi'l-janb — "the companion at your side". That one root should be used in two opposite directions, one of keeping away and one of nearness, is a fact that can be verified within the sūra.

كَبَآئِر — the great things

The verse divides the prohibitions in two: kabāʾir (the great ones) and sayyiʾāt (the lesser failings).

And how the division is to be made is not stated in the verse. In classical exegesis there is a wide debate over the list and the definition of the kabāʾir; that list is not given in this commentary and no definition is preferred. The reason is the method's rule against issuing legal rulings.

What can be said from the text is this: the verse establishes a proportion. Avoiding the great ones brings the covering over of the lesser ones. The verse, that is, asks not for faultlessness but for a priority.

نُكَفِّرْ — root ك-ف-ر: to cover. The root was treated in detail in al-Baqara (the farmer covering the seed with earth). I rely on that treatment. And its use here in the direction of good is worth recording: the act of covering can, from the same root, name both denial and forgiveness.

مُّدْخَلًا كَرِيمًاmudkhal: a place one enters. Karīm — root ك-ر-م: precious, generous, noble. The verse does not use an attribute belonging to the place; it uses an attribute belonging to a relationship.


4/32

ولا تتمنوا ما فضل الله به بعضكم على بعض للرجال نصيب مما اكتسبوا وللنساء نصيب مما اكتسبن واسألوا الله من فضله إن الله كان بكل شيء عليما

Wa lā tatamannaw mā faḍḍala'llāhu bihī baʿḍakum ʿalā baʿḍ, li'l-rijāli naṣībun mimma'ktasabū wa li'l-nisāʾi naṣībun mimma'ktasabna, wa'sʾalu'llāha min faḍlih, inna'llāha kāna bi-kulli shayʾin ʿAlīmā

"Do not covet that by which God has favoured some of you over others. To the men belongs a share of what they have earned, and to the women belongs a share of what they have earned. Ask God of His bounty. God knows all things."

This verse will be treated in detail — and the reason is in the text

This verse uses the same words as the thirty-fourth, which will come two verses later. And this is a datum of the text that is most often skipped in exegesis. It must be established first, because the thirty-fourth verse comes on top of this one.

One: the same sentence returns two verses later

VerseSentenceAbout whom
32faḍḍala'llāhu bihī baʿḍakum ʿalā baʿḍThose addressed — so that they not covet
34Bimā faḍḍala'llāhu baʿḍahum ʿalā baʿḍAs the ground of a ruling

In both sentences there is the same verb (faḍḍala), the same structure (baʿḍ … ʿalā baʿḍ) and the same indefiniteness.

And the indefiniteness itself is a datum of the text, which I record separately: both verses say baʿḍakum ʿalā baʿḍ / baʿḍahum ʿalā baʿḍ"some of you over others" / "some of them over others". In neither of the two verses does the expression "men over women" occur. This is a countable fact: both the subject and the object of the sentence are indefinite pronouns.

I record this as an observation about word order, not as an exegetical preference. How this indefiniteness is read in the thirty-fourth verse will be given there, in a table of the disagreement.

Two: نَصِيب — given to both sides

The two clauses in the middle of the verse are exact copies of each other:

For the menFor the women
Preposition + nounLi'l-rijāliLi'l-nisāʾi
What is givenNaṣībunNaṣībun
Its sourceMimma'ktasabūMimma'ktasabna

In all three rows the word is the same; the only thing that changes is the person-ending of the verb. Iktasabū — third person plural masculine; iktasabna — third person plural feminine. The sentence, that is, builds the same word twice, changing only the inflection.

And this happens for the second time in the sūra. The seventh verse did the same thing:

Li'l-rijāli naṣībun mimmā taraka'l-wālidāni wa'l-aqrabūn wa li'l-nisāʾi naṣībun mimmā taraka'l-wālidāni wa'l-aqrabūn (4/7)
VerseSubjectThe source of the share
7InheritanceMimmā taraka'l-wālidāni wa'l-aqrabūn — from what is left
32EarningsMimma'ktasabū / mimma'ktasabna — from what is earned

In both verses there is the same word (naṣīb), the same paired construction and the same symmetry. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

Three: the verb ٱكْتِسَاب used for both

And now comes the most striking side of this verse.

The root كسب: to obtain something, to earn it; and the concrete association the lexicographers record is going after a task and getting it.

The classical lexicographers have a record about Form VIII (iktasaba): it is said that between kasaba and iktasaba the second states greater effort and intent. I relate this record as the lexicographers give it; there is no complete agreement on the distinction.

What belongs here is this, and it is a datum of the text: the verse uses the verb iktasaba for both parties.

The sentence could have been built like this, but it is not:

It could have beenIt is
To the men a share of what they earned, to the women a share of what is given themTo the men a share of what they earned, to the women a share of what they earned
A single naṣīb, divided between two partiesTwo separate naṣībs, each tied to a separate earning

The verse, that is, establishes by repeating the word that both parties are in the position of the one who earns. The verb is not passive but active; and active twice over.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the inflection of the verb: iktasabna is the feminine form and it stands once in the sentence, exactly in the place of its masculine counterpart. The text writes the woman's earning not as an extension of the man's earning but as an item in its own right.

And a limiting record: no legal arrangement and no theory of property is drawn from here. What is said is the sentence's own structure: the same verb and the same noun are given to both parties.

Four: the forbidding of coveting and what is given in its place

The verse forbids one thing and puts something else in its place. The two must be set side by side:

What is forbiddenWhat is put in its place
VerbLā tatamannaw — do not covetWa'sʾalu'llāha — ask of God
DirectionTowards what another hasTowards the source
SubjectMā faḍḍala'llāh — what has been givenMin faḍlih — what is to be given

تَمَنِّي — root م-ن-ي: to let a thing pass through the heart, to picture it. From the same root comes amāniyy (vain fancies), and this word will return in the hundred and nineteenth verse of the sūra.

And the distinction must be recorded: what is forbidden is not asking but wanting what another has. The second half of the sentence commands asking outright.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the presence of the two verbs in the same verse: the verse closes off comparison and leaves asking open.

What this says to the present

One. The verse describes comparison itself as a burden: a desire built by looking at what another has is named in the verse tamannī and is forbidden. What is put in its place is not the asking itself but the direction of the asking.

Two. That the word naṣīb is given twice, to both parties, continues the line established in the sūra's seventh verse. The sūra counts the party who has a share twice — and each time the second counting is identical to the first.


4/33

ولكل جعلنا موالي مما ترك الوالدان والأقربون والذين عقدت أيمانكم فآتوهم نصيبهم إن الله كان على كل شيء شهيدا

Wa li-kullin jaʿalnā mawāliya mimmā taraka'l-wālidāni wa'l-aqrabūn, wa'lladhīna ʿaqadat aymānukum fa-ātūhum naṣībahum, inna'llāha kāna ʿalā kulli shayʾin Shahīdā

"For all of what parents and near kin leave We have appointed heirs. And to those whom your oaths have bound, give their share. God is witness over all things."

مَوَٰلِي — the root و-ل-ي

The concrete sense of the root: to be near, to be adjoining. Walī — the one who is near, who takes charge of another's affair; mawlā — both master and freedman, both helper and the one bound. Because of the nearness in its root, the word is used in both directions at once.

The root was treated at al-Anfāl 8/72-75 under the heading "the bond of walāya". I rely on that treatment.

نَصِيب — a third time

The word occurs in this sūra twice in the seventh verse, twice in the thirty-second, and once here.

VerseTo whomFrom what
7To the men and to the womenFrom what is left
32To the men and to the womenFrom what is earned
33Alladhīna ʿaqadat aymānukumFrom what is left

The same word five times in three verses. And the command is the same every time: give the share.

وَٱلَّذِينَ عَقَدَتْ أَيْمَٰنُكُمْ — a disagreement

The expression means literally "those whom your oaths have bound", and there is disagreement in the classical commentaries over whom it means.

ReadingWhoIts ground
AThose with whom a pact has been made — those given a promise of mutual aid and a share in the estateThe sense of binding, of contract, in the word ʿaqd; the use of the plural aymān (oaths)
BThose adopted or attachedThe word's sense of a bond resting on an agreement
CThat the ruling was later abrogated, the verse regulating a transitional periodThat the verses of inheritance (11-12) have determined the shares

All three readings are transmitted; I impose no preference and draw no legal ruling from this. The legal force of this verse is disputed in classical jurisprudence, and that debate is not the subject of this text.

What can be said from the text is this: the verse builds a sentence that counts even a bond not made by blood as holding a share. And this will widen further in the thirty-sixth verse — there the neighbour and the travelling companion will enter the list.


4/34-35

الرجال قوامون على النساء بما فضل الله بعضهم على بعض وبما أنفقوا من أموالهم … واللاتي تخافون نشوزهن فعظوهن واهجروهن في المضاجع واضربوهن فإن أطعنكم فلا تبغوا عليهن سبيلا · وإن خفتم شقاق بينهما فابعثوا حكما من أهله وحكما من أهلها إن يريدا إصلاحا يوفق الله بينهما

Al-rijālu qawwāmūna ʿala'l-nisāʾi bimā faḍḍala'llāhu baʿḍahum ʿalā baʿḍ wa bimā anfaqū min amwālihim, fa'l-ṣāliḥātu qānitātun ḥāfiẓātun li'l-ghaybi bimā ḥafiẓa'llāh, wa'llātī takhāfūna nushūzahunna fa-ʿiẓūhunna wa'hjurūhunna fi'l-maḍājiʿi wa'ḍribūhunna, fa-in aṭaʿnakum fa-lā tabghū ʿalayhinna sabīlā, inna'llāha kāna ʿAliyyan Kabīrā · Wa in khiftum shiqāqa baynihimā fa'bʿathū ḥakaman min ahlihī wa ḥakaman min ahlihā, in yurīdā iṣlāḥan yuwaffiqi'llāhu baynahumā, inna'llāha kāna ʿAlīman Khabīrā

"Men are qawwām over women, because God has favoured some over others and because they spend of their property. Good women are qānit; they guard, where no one sees, what God has guarded. As for those women whose nushūz you fear, admonish them, leave them alone in their beds, and ḍarb them. If they obey you, then seek no way against them. God is exalted, great. — And if you fear a rift between the two of them, send an arbitrator from his family and an arbitrator from hers. If the two of them wish to set things right, God will bring them together. God is Knowing, Aware."

First, a note on method — and this note holds for the whole block

This is the most debated place in the sūra. So I set down at the outset what is done in this section and what is not.

One. The two verses are treated together. The thirty-fourth verse is not a unit separable from the thirty-fifth: the first verse takes as its subject the settling of a dispute from within, the second the settling of the same dispute from outside by arbitration, and the block ends with the word iṣlāḥ. To cut the block in the middle is to damage the text.

Two. No legal ruling is issued. The readings of the classical commentaries and of the schools of law are related as a table of the disagreement, with their grounds. None of them is preferred and none of them is binding.

Three. Current debates are not entered into. How this verse is understood today, how it is answered in this or that legal order, and the social debates around it are not the subject of this text.

Four. No demeaning language is used and the reader is not scolded. No general judgement of worth about either party is drawn from the verse.

Five. What is not in the wording of the verse is not added to it. Below, the words and grounds the verse itself gives are established first; the readings come only after that.

One: قَوَّٰم — the root ق-و-م

The root ق-و-م: to rise to one's feet, to stand up, to keep a matter standing.

The root has occurred twice already in this sūra: at the fifth verse, allatī jaʿala'llāhu lakum qiyāmā ("the property God has made a means of standing upright for you"), and it was treated there under the heading "the weave of roots in the sūra". I rely on that treatment.

And the pattern must be recorded: qawwām is on the فَعَّال pattern. In Arabic this pattern states two things:

FunctionExampleWhat it states
Frequency / continuityGhaffār — the one who forgives muchOne who does a thing continually
Trade / occupationKhayyāṭ (tailor), najjār (carpenter), khabbāz (baker)One who has taken that work upon himself

The same word was treated at al-Māʾida 5/8, and this was recorded there:

"That is, a qawwām is not 'one who acts justly on one occasion' but one who makes it his business to keep justice standing. The command asks not for a behaviour but for a character."

I rely on that treatment. And setting the word's three occurrences in the Qurʾān side by side must be recorded as a datum of the text:

PlaceExpressionOver what / with what
al-Nisāʾ 4/34Al-rijālu qawwāmūna ʿala'l-nisāʾWith the preposition ʿalā, the subject of an obligation
al-Nisāʾ 4/135Kūnū qawwāmīna bi'l-qisṭWith justice
al-Māʾida 5/8Kūnū qawwāmīna li'llāhFor God

The same pattern is present in all three. In two of them the word is a command; in the first it is a statement of a situation. This is a countable fact.

And this must be recorded: the verse does not explain the word qawwām. How much authority and how much obligation the word states is not written in the verse; what is written in the verse is two grounds.

Two: the two grounds the verse itself gives

The particle bimā occurs twice in the sentence, and two grounds are set out:

OrderGroundIts kind
1Bimā faḍḍala'llāhu baʿḍahum ʿalā baʿḍSomething given
2Wa bimā anfaqū min amwālihimSomething done — an act

The second ground must be treated in detail, because its wording is plain and not in dispute.

Anfaqū — a perfect verb, third person plural: they spent. Min amwālihimof their property.

The verse, that is, ties the second ground to an act. And the act is in the same field as the verb iktasabū / iktasabna two verses earlier: property, earning, spending.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the tense of the verb: anfaqū is past and states an action. A ground that states an action is bound to that action. The verse has thus tied the ground not to an attribute but to something done.

That this explanation is found in the classical commentaries too must be recorded: the connecting of qawwām-hood with the obligation of maintenance is widely transmitted. But there is disagreement over the relative weight of the two grounds and over the scope of the first, and it is set out in the table below.

Three: بِمَا فَضَّلَ ٱللَّهُ بَعْضَهُمْ عَلَىٰ بَعْضٍ — a table of the disagreement

First the datum of the text: the sentence does not say "men over women". It says baʿḍahum ʿalā baʿḍ — "some of them over others".

And two verses earlier, in the thirty-second, the same structure occurred (mā faḍḍala'llāhu bihī baʿḍakum ʿalā baʿḍ) — and there the sentence was the subject of a prohibition: do not covet this. This is a datum of the text that can be verified, and it was set out in a table above.

There is disagreement in the classical commentaries over how this expression is to be read. I put it in a table; I impose no preference.

ReadingWhat baʿḍahum ʿalā baʿḍ statesIts groundIts qualification
AA particular advantage given to menThe context of the sentence; that the second ground (spending) is ascribed to the manIt has difficulty accounting for the indefiniteness of the expression baʿḍ … ʿalā baʿḍ
BMutual advantages — different capacities given to both partiesThe indefiniteness of the pronoun; that the word baʿḍ is open to both parties; the general use of the same expression at 4/32It loosens the sentence's link with the ruling
CSince the subject of the advantage is not specified, it cannot be confined to any particular field; the verse gives the ground for a division of dutiesThat the verse continues with maintenance; that the sentence is left unrestrictedIt leaves the scope indefinite

All three readings have been defended in the classical and later literature. I prefer none of them and none of them is binding.

And a limiting record is written plainly, per the method (Method): no conclusion that one sex is superior to the other in respect of being human can be drawn from this sentence. The sūra's first verse (min nafsin wāḥida) and its twenty-fifth (baʿḍukum min baʿḍ) were treated in this commentary, and the records made there hold here too.

Four: قَٰنِتَٰت and حَٰفِظَٰت لِّلْغَيْبِ

قَٰنِتَٰت — root ق-ن-ت: to keep at a task with constancy and reverence; to submit.

And the root's distribution in the Qurʾān must be recorded, because it shows the direction of the word:

PlaceWhoTo whom
al-Baqara 2/238Those who prayQūmū li'llāhi qānitīn — to God
al-Aḥzāb 33/35Al-qānitīna wa'l-qānitātBoth parties are counted together
al-Nisāʾ 4/34Al-qānitātNot specified

Two tendencies are transmitted in the classical commentaries over towards whom the word is directed here: some explain it as obedience to God, some as constancy to the order within the family. I relate both tendencies; I impose no preference.

What can be said from the text is this, and it is an observation about word order: in the Qurʾān the dominant use of the root is directed towards God; and at al-Aḥzāb 33/35 the word is counted for both parties. This establishes no ruling beyond the wording of the verse, but it is a datum that ought to be put in the table.

حَٰفِظَٰتٌ لِّلْغَيْبِ بِمَا حَفِظَ ٱللَّهُ — "those who guard, where it is not seen, what God has guarded."

The root ح-ف-ظ occurs twice in the clause: ḥāfiẓāt and ḥafiẓa'llāh. And the word order is worth recording: the ground of the guarding is tied again to a guardingbimā ḥafiẓa'llāh.

غَيْب — root غ-ي-ب: to be hidden, to be out of sight. Here the word states the place where no one sees.

Five: نُشُوز — the analysis of the word and the symmetry within the sūra

The root ن-ش-ز. And its concrete sense must be recorded: nashz — high ground, a hillock, a rise.

The family of senses that follows from this:

WordSenseThe link
نَشْز / نَشَزHigh ground, a hillockThe concrete sense
نَشَزَTo rise; to get up from where one isFrom the rise
نُشُوزGetting up from where one is; going out from one's place in a relationship
أَنْشَزَTo raise, to lift upThe raising of the bones at al-Baqara 2/259 is from this root

The picture in the word is a rising and a leaving of one's place. One party's going out from the position it holds within a relationship.

And now comes the most important datum of the text in this discussion.

The word occurs twice in this sūra, and in its second occurrence it is used of the MAN.

VerseClauseWhose nushūzWhat is commanded
4/34Wa'llātī takhāfūna nushūzahunnaThe woman'sFa-ʿiẓūhunna … wa'hjurūhunna … wa'ḍribūhunna; and then arbitration in 4/35
4/128Wa ini'mraʾatun khāfat min baʿlihā nushūzan aw iʿrāḍāThe man'sFa-lā junāḥa ʿalayhimā an yuṣliḥā baynahumā ṣulḥāand wa'l-ṣulḥu khayr

This is a symmetry that can be verified from the text and a countable fact: the same root, in the same sūra, is applied to both parties.

And the detail of the symmetry must be recorded too:

4/344/128
The verb of fearingTakhāfūna — second person pluralKhāfat — third person feminine singular
Who fearsThe husband's sideThe woman herself
The subjectNushūzNushūz and iʿrāḍ (turning away)
The pathThree steps, then arbitrationSettlement
The block's closeIṣlāḥ (35)Wa'l-ṣulḥu khayr (128)

It can be seen that both blocks open with the same word and close in the same field: iṣlāḥ and ṣulḥ.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the two tables above: the sūra recognises the same phenomenon for both parties, and ends both blocks in the direction of agreement.

Six: three steps — a table of the disagreement

The verse sets out three verbs: fa-ʿiẓūhunna, wa'hjurūhunna fi'l-maḍājiʿi, wa'ḍribūhunna.

The table below gives, with their grounds, the readings transmitted in the classical exegetical and juristic literature about these three steps. None of them is this text's preference, none of them is binding, and no practice can be derived from here.

StepWordThe readings transmittedTheir grounds
1وَعْظ (waʿẓ) — root و-ع-ظ: to remind in a way that softens the heartReminding with words; the opening of the matter by talkingThe sense of the root; the verb's standing first
2هَجْر فِي ٱلْمَضَاجِع (hajr) — root ه-ج-ر: to separate, to leave(a) Leaving alone in bed; (b) separating the beds; (c) restricting only the bed and not speechThat the qualification fi'l-maḍājiʿ restricts the verb: the leaving is not absolute but tied to a place
3ضَرْب (ḍarb) — root ض-ر-ب(a) A touch that is not heavy, that leaves no mark, that does not injure; this qualification is widely transmitted in the classical literature. (b) That the step is a deterrent, and that its actual carrying out is not intended. (c) Reading it, on the strength of the root's wide semantic field, in the direction of parting / withdrawing. (d) That the step is tied to particular conditions and is a last resortFor (a): the restricting qualifications transmitted in the classical commentaries. For (b): the ordered and progressively narrowing structure of the steps. For (c): the many-sided use of the root ض-ر-ب in the Qurʾān, as in ḍaraba fi'l-arḍ (to set out on a journey), ḍaraba mathalan (to give a parable). For (d): the qualification fa-in aṭaʿnakum fa-lā tabghū in the continuation of the verse

This table is not a fatwā and cannot be read as a guide to practice. The reason it is placed here is the rule on disagreement in the method (Method): the disagreement is not concealed, no preference is imposed.

And there are three qualifications that follow directly from the wording of the verse; these are not disagreement but data of the text:

QualificationWordingWhat it does
OneWa'llātī takhāfūna nushūzahunnaThe subject is not an act that has occurred but a situation that is feared
TwoWa'hjurūhunna fi'l-maḍājiʿiThe second step is restricted by being tied to a place
ThreeFa-in aṭaʿnakum fa-lā tabghū ʿalayhinna sabīlāThe stopping point of the steps is written out plainly

The third qualification must be stressed separately: having counted the steps, the verse sets an end to them, and states that end as a prohibition — fa-lā tabghū ʿalayhinna sabīlā: "seek no way against them."

The root ب-غ-ي: to want, to seek; and to exceed the bound. These two sides of the word are worth recording: what is forbidden is the search for a pretext.

Seven: إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ عَلِيًّا كَبِيرًا — the choice of verse-ending

The verse closes with two attributes: ʿAliyy (exalted) and Kabīr (great).

The sūra's order of verse-endings was set out in a table in the introductory section, and most of the endings were attributes of watching. Here there are two attributes of greatness.

About the function of this verse-ending the following is widely transmitted in the classical commentaries: because the ruling addresses the party into whose hand authority is given, the closing reminds that party that there is one greater than himself.

I relate this explanation as it is transmitted. And I add the following as my own reading: the verse-ending is directed at the party the verse addresses — because it is he who is addressed by the commands in the verse.

Eight: 4/35 — the arbitrator, and the block's ending in iṣlāḥ

The thirty-fifth verse is the continuation of the thirty-fourth, and the block is completed only here.

And the first thing to be recorded is the change in the word order:

4/344/35
The verb of fearingTakhāfūnaKhiftum — the same root
The object of the fearNushūzahunna — one party'sShiqāqa baynihimāwhat is between the two
Who is addressedOne of the spousesThe community outside
The remedyInside, three stepsTwo arbitrators from outside
The aimIṣlāḥ

In the second verse, that is, the matter ceases to be one party's conduct and becomes what is between the two.

Shiqāq — root ش-ق-ق: to split, to cleave in two. Shaqq — a fissure. The word draws the picture of a whole being split in two. And the qualification baynihimā (between the two of them) does not tie the responsibility to one side.

فَٱبْعَثُوا۟ حَكَمًا مِّنْ أَهْلِهِۦ وَحَكَمًا مِّنْ أَهْلِهَآ — and the symmetry here is a countable fact:

The husband's sideThe wife's side
NumberḤakaman — oneḤakaman — one
SourceMin ahlihīMin ahlihā

The clause is built twice and only the pronoun changes. This is the same structure as the naṣīb symmetry in the thirty-second verse — the sūra repeats this construction.

Ḥakam — root ح-ك-م: to make a thing firm, to hold it in check. From the same root come ḥikma and ḥukm; and ḥakama — the bit of a horse, the thing that holds it. The picture in the root is holding in check.

إِن يُرِيدَآ إِصْلَٰحًا يُوَفِّقِ ٱللَّهُ بَيْنَهُمَآ — and here there is a disagreement of word order:

ReadingWho yurīdā areIts ground
AThe two arbitratorsThe nearest preceding dual noun is the arbitrators
BThe two spousesThe real parties to the setting right are the spouses; the pronoun baynahumā refers to the spouses

Both readings are transmitted; I impose no preference. What can be verified from the text is this: there are two dual pronouns in the sentence (yurīdā and baynahumā), and the verse does not specify either of them plainly.

The root ص-ل-ح was treated in this sūra at the fifteenth and sixteenth verses (fa-in tābā wa aṣlaḥā fa-aʿriḍū ʿanhumā), and it was recorded there under the heading "the block's real qualification": a door of return is left open after the ruling. I rely on that treatment.

Nine: where the block ends — and its being read together with 4/128

Now the block must be looked at as a whole.

StepVerseWhat happens
134Three steps from within
2End of 34Fa-in aṭaʿnakum fa-lā tabghūthe stopping point
335Two arbitrators from outside
4End of 35Iṣlāḥ and tawfīq

The block ends not with a sanction but with the bringing together of the two.

And the sūra does the same thing once more in the hundred and twenty-eighth verse:

وَإِنِ ٱمْرَأَةٌ خَافَتْ مِنۢ بَعْلِهَا نُشُوزًا أَوْ إِعْرَاضًا فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْهِمَآ أَن يُصْلِحَا بَيْنَهُمَا صُلْحًا وَٱلصُّلْحُ خَيْرٌ "If a woman fears nushūz or turning away from her husband, there is no fault upon the two of them in setting things right between themselves by a settlement. And settlement is better." (4/128)

I set the two blocks side by side. The table compares the wording of the two verses; it establishes no ruling.

4/34-354/128
RootNushūzNushūz
WhoseThe woman'sThe man's
Who fearsThose addressedThe woman herself
The pathThree steps → arbitrationSettlement directly
The closeIṣlāḥan … yuwaffiqi'llāhu baynahumāWa'l-ṣulḥu khayr

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the table above: the sūra describes two separate paths in two separate places for the same phenomenon, and closes both paths with the same family of words — ṣulḥ and iṣlāḥ.

And this is the sūra's general line: in the twenty-fifth verse wa an taṣbirū khayrun lakum, in the hundred and twenty-eighth wa'l-ṣulḥu khayr, in the hundred and forty-ninth in tubdū khayran aw tukhfūhu aw taʿfū ʿan sūʾin. These three were set out in a table in the discussion of the twenty-fifth verse; I rely on that.

What this says to the present

One. The structure of the block itself provides for a dispute to be handled by stages: first talking, then distance, then an arbitrator from outside. And at every stage there is a qualification of stopping: fa-lā tabghū ʿalayhinna sabīlā.

Two. The arbitration arrangement of the thirty-fifth verse asks that the dispute be handled by an equal number of people from the families of both parties. This is a construction that rules out the circle of one party settling the matter on its own.

Three. That the word nushūz is applied to both parties in two separate verses shows that the sūra does not build this matter in one direction only. This is not an interpretation but the distribution of the word within the sūra.

And a limit: this section makes no decision about how the verse is to be applied. None of the tables of disagreement above is binding; to derive a ruling is the business of the literature of jurisprudence, which has the competence for it.


4/36

واعبدوا الله ولا تشركوا به شيئا وبالوالدين إحسانا وبذي القربى واليتامى والمساكين والجار ذي القربى والجار الجنب والصاحب بالجنب وابن السبيل وما ملكت أيمانكم إن الله لا يحب من كان مختالا فخورا

Wa'ʿbudu'llāha wa lā tushrikū bihī shayʾā, wa bi'l-wālidayni iḥsānan wa bi-dhi'l-qurbā wa'l-yatāmā wa'l-masākīni wa'l-jāri dhi'l-qurbā wa'l-jāri'l-junubi wa'l-ṣāḥibi bi'l-janbi wa'bni'l-sabīli wa mā malakat aymānukum, inna'llāha lā yuḥibbu man kāna mukhtālan fakhūrā

"Serve God and associate nothing with Him. And to parents show kindness, and to near kin, to orphans, to the poor, to the neighbour who is kin, to the neighbour who is a stranger, to the companion at your side, to the traveller, and to those your right hands possess. God does not love the one who is self-admiring and boastful."

The construction of the verse — one command and nine addresses

The verse opens with a command and then counts nine addresses. With the command that makes ten items, and the table shows this.

OrderWordingWhoThe kind of tie
1Wa'ʿbudu'llāha wa lā tushrikū bihī shayʾāGodService — the frame of the list
2Bi'l-wālidayni iḥsānāParentsGiven at birth
3Bi-dhi'l-qurbāNear kinThe tie of blood
4Wa'l-yatāmāOrphansBeing without protection
5Wa'l-masākīnThe poorNeed
6Wa'l-jāri dhi'l-qurbāThe neighbour who is kinPlace + kinship
7Wa'l-jāri'l-junubThe distant / stranger neighbourPlace only
8Wa'l-ṣāḥibi bi'l-janbThe companion at one's sideBeing together, and nothing more
9Wa'bni'l-sabīlThe stranded travellerTransience
10Wa mā malakat aymānukumThose under one's handDependence

And the direction of the ordering is a countable fact: the list moves from the nearest to the furthest. It begins with the parents, continues with the tie of blood, and then the kind of tie changes — place, then merely companionship on the road, then the traveller.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the order of the list: the verse does not define the person who has a right by belonging. The two neighbours in the sixth and seventh places show this plainly: one is the neighbour who is a relative, the other the neighbour who is not — and both are in the same list, under the same command.

إِحْسَٰن — the root ح-س-ن and the kind of command

A single word in the accusative governs the whole list: iḥsānan.

The root ح-س-ن: to be beautiful, to be good. Iḥsān (Form IV) — to do well; and the second sense the lexicographers record: to do a thing completely, giving it its due.

And the word order here must be recorded: the verse does not say wa ātū (give) or anfiqū (spend). The command is not a command about property but a command about conduct. The nine addresses in the list are counted not as people to whom money is to be given but as people towards whom one is to behave well.

This distinction makes the following comparison necessary.

A comparison with al-Baqara 2/177 and 2/215

The Qurʾān sets out the same circle in two other places as well, and when the three lists are set side by side the differences become visible. The table compares the wording of the three verses.

Whoal-Baqara 2/177al-Baqara 2/215al-Nisāʾ 4/36
ParentsAl-wālidaynAl-wālidayn
Near kinDhawi'l-qurbāAl-aqrabīnDhi'l-qurbā
OrphansAl-yatāmāAl-yatāmāAl-yatāmā
The poorAl-masākīnAl-masākīnAl-masākīn
The stranded travellerIbna'l-sabīlIbni'l-sabīlIbni'l-sabīl
The one who asksAl-sāʾilīn
The freeing of slavesFi'l-riqāb
The neighbour who is kinAl-jār dhi'l-qurbā
The stranger neighbourAl-jār al-junub
The companion on the roadAl-ṣāḥib bi'l-janb
Those under one's handMā malakat aymānukum
The object of the commandPropertywa āta'l-māla ʿalā ḥubbihPropertymā anfaqtum min khayrIḥsān — conduct

Two things follow from the table, and both are data of the text:

One. The common core is five items: near kin, orphans, the poor, the traveller, and (in two places) parents. All three verses are built around the same core.

Two. The four items al-Nisāʾ adds are of a different kind from the common core: two neighbours, the companion on the road, and those under one's hand. None of these is defined by blood or by need; all of them are defined by nearness — a nearness of place, of a passing moment, or of structure.

And this coincides with the line recorded in the discussion of al-Baqara 2/177. What was written there was this:

"That is, the list widens from the near to the far and spills outside belonging… the measure does not change according to who the person before you is."

Al-Nisāʾ's list goes four steps further in the same direction. I record this as my own reading; its ground is the table above.

ٱلْجَار and ٱلْجَنْب — the analysis of two words

The root ج-و-ر: to be side by side, to be a neighbour; and from there jiwār — protection, taking under one's shelter. The second sense the word carries is worth recording: in Arabic to be someone's jār also means to give him security.

ٱلْجَنْب — root ج-ن-ب: the side, the flank. And this root occurred in the thirty-first verse as ijtanibū (avoid); here the same root returns in the direction of nearness.

VerseWordDirection
31TajtanibūMoving away — leaving the prohibition aside and passing on
36Al-junub, bi'l-janbNearness — the one at your side

The same root, five verses apart, in two opposite directions. This is a fact that can be verified within the sūra.

وَٱلصَّاحِبِ بِٱلْجَنۢبِ — there is disagreement over whom it means:

ReadingWhoIts ground
AThe companion on the road — one walked beside for a whileThat the qualification bi'l-janb states transience; its coming immediately before the traveller in the list
BAny companion who sits beside you, who is beside you at workThe generality of the word
CThe wifeThat the word ṣāḥib is used in the Qurʾān for a spouse as well

All three readings are transmitted; I impose no preference.

What can be said from the text is this: the word ties the bond neither to duration nor to descent but to being side by side. This is the weakest tie in the list, and it has been taken into the list.

وَمَا مَلَكَتْ أَيْمَٰنُكُمْ — the end of the list

The list ends with the section of society seen as lowest.

And this happens for the second time in the sūra. In the twenty-fifth verse, while a ruling was being given about the same group, baʿḍukum min baʿḍ ("you are, one of you, from another") was set into the middle of the sentence, and it was treated there. I rely on that treatment.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the shared subject of the two verses: the sūra names this group twice, and on both occasions names it by taking it into a list.

إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَا يُحِبُّ مَن كَانَ مُخْتَالًا فَخُورًا — the verse-ending

Having counted nine addresses, the verse closes with two attributes, and the choice of the verse-ending must be recorded.

Mukhtāl — root خ-ي-ل: to suppose a thing, to imagine it; and from there, to suppose oneself something. From the same root comes khayl (horse), and the lexicographers make the link through the swagger in a horse's gait.

Fakhūr — root ف-خ-ر: to boast. Fakhr — boasting.

And the distinction between the two attributes is worth recording:

AttributeWhere it takes place
MukhtālInside — a person's opinion of himself
FakhūrOutside — that opinion coming into speech

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the place of the verse-ending: a list of nine items closes with the rejection of seeing oneself as above others. What is needed for the list to work is stated in the verse-ending.

What this says to the present

One. The two items about the neighbour say that a right arises from unchosen ties as well. A neighbour is not chosen; and the verse nonetheless sets him immediately after near kin.

Two. That the command is iḥsān shows that the list is not a list for charity. What is to be given to most of the nine addresses counted is not money.


4/37-39

الذين يبخلون ويأمرون الناس بالبخل ويكتمون ما آتاهم الله من فضله وأعتدنا للكافرين عذابا مهينا · والذين ينفقون أموالهم رئاء الناس ولا يؤمنون بالله ولا باليوم الآخر · وماذا عليهم لو آمنوا بالله واليوم الآخر وأنفقوا مما رزقهم الله

Alladhīna yabkhalūna wa yaʾmurūna'l-nāsa bi'l-bukhli wa yaktumūna mā ātāhumu'llāhu min faḍlih … Wa'lladhīna yunfiqūna amwālahum riʾāʾa'l-nāsi wa lā yuʾminūna bi'llāhi wa lā bi'l-yawmi'l-ākhir … Wa mādhā ʿalayhim law āmanū bi'llāhi wa'l-yawmi'l-ākhiri wa anfaqū mimmā razaqahumu'llāh

"They are miserly and they enjoin miserliness upon others, and they conceal what God has given them of His bounty… And those who spend their wealth to be seen by others and believe neither in God nor in the Last Day… What harm would it have done them, had they believed in God and the Last Day and spent of what God has provided them?"

Two contrary states following the thirty-sixth verse

The thirty-sixth verse gave a list. These three verses describe two states in which that list does not work.

StateVerseVerbThe problem
The first37Yabkhalūnthey do not giveThe holding back of property
The second38Yunfiqūn riʾāʾa'l-nāsthey do giveThe direction of the giving

And setting the two states side by side produces a record, which I set down as my own reading: the verses are not concerned only with not giving; they say that giving too can be corrupted. In the thirty-eighth verse property is actually spent, and it is rejected all the same.

بُخْل and the enjoining of it

The root ب-خ-ل: to hold in hand, not to give.

And in the thirty-seventh verse three verbs are set out, and the three form a chain:

OrderVerbWhat it is
1YabkhalūnHe himself does not give
2Yaʾmurūna'l-nāsa bi'l-bukhlHe urges others not to give either
3Yaktumūna mā ātāhumu'llāhHe conceals what has been given him

The second step is worth recording: the verse says that the attitude has a spreading side. This pattern is present at al-Māʿūn 107/3 as well (wa lā yaḥuḍḍu ʿalā ṭaʿāmi'l-miskīn — he does not urge the feeding of the poor): there too the matter passes from not giving to not urging.

The third step also produces an observation: yaktumūna mā ātāhumu'llāhu min faḍlih — to conceal what one has. To hide what is in one's hand, that is, ensures that none of the addresses in the list ever comes to the door.

رِئَآءَ ٱلنَّاسِ — the root ر-أ-ي

The word riʾāʾ is the verbal noun of Form III (mufāʿala) from the root ر-أ-ي: it states reciprocity. Ostentation, that is, is not a one-sided business: someone who sees is required.

The word was treated at al-Māʿūn 107/6 (alladhīna hum yurāʾūn) and at al-Baqara 2/264 (ka'lladhī yunfiqu mālahū riʾāʾa'l-nās). The verse in al-Baqara is almost identical with this one:

PlaceExpression
al-Baqara 2/264Ka'lladhī yunfiqu mālahū riʾāʾa'l-nās wa lā yuʾminu bi'llāhi wa'l-yawmi'l-ākhir
al-Nisāʾ 4/38Alladhīna yunfiqūna amwālahum riʾāʾa'l-nās wa lā yuʾminūna bi'llāhi wa lā bi'l-yawmi'l-ākhir

The two verses set the same two things side by side: ostentation and not believing in the hereafter. This is a repetition between two sūras that can be verified.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the shared word order of the two verses: what is set over against ostentation is not a rule of morals but the question of where the return is expected.

وَمَاذَا عَلَيْهِمْ لَوْ ءَامَنُوا۟ — the form of the question

The thirty-ninth verse is a question, and the form of the sentence must be recorded: wa mādhā ʿalayhim — "what would it have cost them?"

The question is not a threat but a question of cost. And this fits the general language of the sūra: in verses twenty-six to twenty-eight the intention behind the rulings was stated after them; here what is lost by refusing is asked.


4/40-42

إن الله لا يظلم مثقال ذرة وإن تك حسنة يضاعفها ويؤت من لدنه أجرا عظيما · فكيف إذا جئنا من كل أمة بشهيد وجئنا بك على هؤلاء شهيدا · يومئذ يود الذين كفروا وعصوا الرسول لو تسوى بهم الأرض ولا يكتمون الله حديثا

Inna'llāha lā yaẓlimu mithqāla dharra, wa in taku ḥasanatan yuḍāʿifhā wa yuʾti min ladunhu ajran ʿaẓīmā · Fa-kayfa idhā jiʾnā min kulli ummatin bi-shahīdin wa jiʾnā bika ʿalā hāʾulāʾi shahīdā · Yawmaʾidhin yawaddu'lladhīna kafarū wa ʿaṣawu'l-rasūla law tusawwā bihimu'l-arḍ, wa lā yaktumūna'llāha ḥadīthā

"God does not wrong anyone by so much as an atom's weight. If there is a good deed, He multiplies it and gives from Himself a great reward. How will it be when We bring a witness from every community and bring you as a witness against these? On that day those who denied and disobeyed the Messenger will wish that the earth were levelled over them. And they will not be able to conceal a single word from God."

مِثْقَالَ ذَرَّةٍ — the smallness of the measure

م-ث-ق-ل: weight. ذ-ر-ر: the smallest particle. The lexicographers explain dharra as the smallest of ants or as the dust seen in a shaft of sunlight.

The word was treated in detail at al-Zilzāl 99/7-8 (fa-man yaʿmal mithqāla dharratin khayran yarah). I rely on that treatment.

And the word order here must be recorded: on the side of wrongdoing the verse brings the measure down to the smallest, while on the side of recompense it multiplies ityuḍāʿifhā (He multiplies it).

DirectionMeasure
WrongdoingNot even so much as mithqāla dharra
A good deedYuḍāʿifhāmany times over

This is not a symmetry; it is a deliberate imbalance. I record it as an observation about word order.

شَهِيد — one of the sūra's key concepts

In the forty-first verse the word shahīd occurs twice: a witness from every community, and one witness more.

The root ش-ه-د was treated at al-Baqara 2/282 and in al-Nūr: to be present, to see; and to report what one has seen. I rely on those treatments.

And the density of the root in this sūra must be recorded. In the sūra's verse-endings there occur shahīd (33), ḥasīb (6, 86), raqīb (1), samīʿ baṣīr (58), khabīr (35, 135); and in the forty-first verse witnessing becomes a scene.

This is the continuation of the line established in the sūra's introductory section: "the sūra sets a witness beside the person whose right is unprotected." I rely on that.

لَوْ تُسَوَّىٰ بِهِمُ ٱلْأَرْضُ — a clause of wishing

The root س-و-ي: to be even, to level. Tusawwā bihimu'l-arḍ — "that the earth be levelled with them."

It is transmitted that in the classical commentaries the expression is explained in two ways: to wish to be mixed into the soil and vanish, or to wish that the earth would flatten out and cover them. I relate both explanations; I impose no preference.

وَلَا يَكْتُمُونَ ٱللَّهَ حَدِيثًا — "they cannot conceal a single word from God."

And the choice of verb must be recorded: yaktumūn had occurred in the thirty-seventh verse too (yaktumūna mā ātāhumu'llāh). The same root twice, five verses apart: one a concealing in this world, the other an inability to conceal. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.


4/43

يا أيها الذين آمنوا لا تقربوا الصلاة وأنتم سكارى حتى تعلموا ما تقولون ولا جنبا إلا عابري سبيل حتى تغتسلوا … فتيمموا صعيدا طيبا فامسحوا بوجوهكم وأيديكم إن الله كان عفوا غفورا

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū lā taqrabu'ṣ-ṣalāta wa antum sukārā ḥattā taʿlamū mā taqūlūn … fa-tayammamū ṣaʿīdan ṭayyiban fa'msaḥū bi-wujūhikum wa aydīkum, inna'llāha kāna ʿAfuwwan Ghafūrā

"O you who believe! Do not draw near to prayer while you are intoxicated, until you know what you are saying… If you find no water, turn to clean earth and wipe your faces and your hands with it. God is ever pardoning, forgiving."

First, a note on method

A wide discussion in classical jurisprudence arose from this verse: ablution, the full washing, dry ablution and their conditions. That discussion is not entered into in this section.

The reason is the method's rule against issuing legal rulings. There is also a well-known classical disagreement over the scope of the expression aw lāmastumu'l-nisāʾ in the verse; the details and consequences of that disagreement are not the subject of this text. What is treated here is the linguistic side of the verse.

حَتَّىٰ تَعْلَمُوا۟ مَا تَقُولُونَ — the measure the verse itself gives

The most striking side of the verse is that it ties the prohibition not to a condition but to a state of knowing.

The sentence could have been built like this, but it is not:

It could have beenIt is
Do not draw near to prayer while intoxicatedDo not draw near to prayer while intoxicated, until you know what you are saying

The verse, that is, gives its own ground within itself: that what is said in prayer be said knowingly.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the particle ḥattā: the particle states a limit, and the limit is the understanding of the words.

The root ص-ع-د and طَيِّبًا

Ṣaʿīd — root ص-ع-د: to rise, to go up. From the same root come ṣuʿūd (ascent) and ṣaʿūd (a hard climb). The lexicographers explain ṣaʿīd as "the top of the earth, the soil at the surface" — that is, the rising, outermost face of the ground.

Ṭayyib — root ط-ي-ب: pleasant, clean, good. The word occurred in the second verse of this sūra as well: lā tatabaddalu'l-khabītha bi'l-ṭayyib ("do not exchange the good for the foul"). The same root, once for the quality of property and once for the quality of earth.

إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ عَفُوًّا غَفُورًا — the verse-ending

The root ع-ف-و: to wipe away, to erase the trace of; and to pardon. The root غ-ف-ر: to cover (mighfar — the helmet that covers the head).

And the difference between the two roots is worth recording:

RootPicture
ع-ف-وThe erasing of the trace
غ-ف-رThe covering over of what is there

That this verse-ending stands in this verse must be recorded: the verse gives a ruling of relief and closes with two attributes of pardon. This continues the line of yurīdu'llāhu an yukhaffifa ʿankum in the twenty-eighth verse.


4/44-46

ألم تر إلى الذين أوتوا نصيبا من الكتاب يشترون الضلالة ويريدون أن تضلوا السبيل · والله أعلم بأعدائكم وكفى بالله وليا وكفى بالله نصيرا · من الذين هادوا يحرفون الكلم عن مواضعه ويقولون سمعنا وعصينا … ولو أنهم قالوا سمعنا وأطعنا واسمع وانظرنا لكان خيرا لهم وأقوم

A-lam tara ila'lladhīna ūtū naṣīban mina'l-kitābi yashtarūna'l-ḍalālata wa yurīdūna an taḍillu'l-sabīl · Wa'llāhu aʿlamu bi-aʿdāʾikum wa kafā bi'llāhi waliyyan wa kafā bi'llāhi naṣīrā · Mina'lladhīna hādū yuḥarrifūna'l-kalima ʿan mawāḍiʿihī …

"Have you not seen those who were given a share of the Book? They buy error and want you to lose the way… Some of them shift words from their places and say 'we hear and we disobey'… Had they said 'we hear and we obey, listen, and look upon us', it would have been better for them and more upright."

First, a note on method

Per the method (Method) a record is entered, and this record holds for all the discussions running from the forty-fourth verse to the hundred and sixty-second.

The verses do not lay down a ruling about a whole community. The wording shows this plainly:

WordingWhat it says
Alladhīna ūtū naṣīban mina'l-kitāb"Those given a share of the Book" — an indefinite section
Mina'lladhīna hādūMin"some of them"; a particle stating a part
End of 4/46: fa-lā yuʾminūna illā qalīlāA qualification of exception
4/162: lākini'l-rāsikhūna fi'l-ʿilmi minhumA section is set apart from within the same community

The verses themselves, that is, make a division. And what is at issue in this commentary are attributes; whoever bears the attribute is included in it. No general ruling is made about any religious, ethnic or national group.

يُحَرِّفُونَ ٱلْكَلِمَ عَن مَّوَاضِعِهِۦtaḥrīf

The root ح-ر-ف was treated in detail at al-Baqara 2/75, and what was recorded there was this:

"The root حرف: an edge, a tip, a border. Not the middle of a thing but its rim… On this reckoning taḥrīf, in the word's own logic, is: to bend a thing at its edge. Not to tear the text down the middle, but to pull it slightly at the rim, to shift its direction. A slight crookedness produces a great deviation at a distance."

I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.

What belongs here is this: in the expression in al-Nisāʾ there is an addition — ʿan mawāḍiʿihī ("from their places").

م-و-ض-ع: the place in which a thing has been set. The verse, that is, describes distortion as a displacement: the word is not destroyed, it is moved from its place.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the use of the two words together: when ḥarf (edge) and mawḍiʿ (the place in which a thing is set) come side by side, the picture that emerges is this — the word stands; the place where it stands changes.

سَمِعْنَا وَعَصَيْنَا — and the sentence set over against it

The verse relates one utterance, then gives the utterance that could have taken its place. Setting the two side by side is the verse's own doing.

What is saidWhat could have been said
Samiʿnā wa ʿaṣaynā — we hear and we disobeySamiʿnā wa aṭaʿnā — we hear and we obey
Wa'smaʿ ghayra musmaʿinWa'smaʿ
RāʿināUnẓurnā

In all three items what changes is small; and the verse qualifies this with the word aqwam (more upright, more erect).

Aqwam — the elative from the root ق-و-م. The root occurs in this sūra at the fifth verse (qiyāmā), at the thirty-fourth (qawwāmūn) and here; it will return once more at the hundred and thirty-fifth (qawwāmīna bi'l-qisṭ). The root's four occurrences in the sūra will be set out in a table in the concluding section.

وَلَىًّۢا بِأَلْسِنَتِهِمْlayy: root ل-و-ي, to twist, to bend. And the word carries the picture of distortion over into the tongue: as the words are shifted from their places, so the tongue too is twisted.

I record this as an observation about word order: the verse uses two verbs in the same place — yuḥarrifūn (to shift) and layyan bi-alsinatihim (twisting with their tongues). Both are verbs that state crookedness.


4/47-50

يا أيها الذين أوتوا الكتاب آمنوا بما نزلنا مصدقا لما معكم … إن الله لا يغفر أن يشرك به ويغفر ما دون ذلك لمن يشاء · ألم تر إلى الذين يزكون أنفسهم بل الله يزكي من يشاء

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna ūtu'l-kitāba āminū bimā nazzalnā muṣaddiqan limā maʿakum … Inna'llāha lā yaghfiru an yushraka bihī wa yaghfiru mā dūna dhālika li-man yashāʾ · A-lam tara ila'lladhīna yuzakkūna anfusahum, bali'llāhu yuzakkī man yashāʾ

"O you who were given the Book! Believe in what We have sent down, confirming what is with you… God does not forgive that partners be associated with Him; what is other than that He forgives for whom He wills. Have you not seen those who declare themselves pure? No — it is God who purifies whom He wills."

مُصَدِّقًا لِّمَا مَعَكُمْ — the function of the word

The root ص-د-ق was treated at the fourth verse of this sūra (ṣaduqātihinna). I rely on that treatment.

Muṣaddiq — active participle: one who confirms. And the form of the call must be recorded: the verse does not ask those addressed to abandon what they hold but to believe in something that confirms what they hold.

إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَا يَغْفِرُ أَن يُشْرَكَ بِهِۦ — and twice in the sūra

This sentence occurs twice in the sūra: at the forty-eighth verse and at the hundred and sixteenth. The two occurrences are almost identical, and the only difference is in one word.

VerseSentenceDifference
48Wa yaghfiru mā dūna dhālika li-man yashāʾ
116Wa yaghfiru mā dūna dhālika li-man yashāʾThe verse continues on with wa man yushrik bi'llāhi fa-qad ḍalla ḍalālan baʿīdā

That two verses repeat the same sentence is a countable fact. And the places of the repetition must be recorded: one inside an address to the People of the Book, the other inside the discussion of Satan's promise. The same sentence, for two different parties addressed.

And the structure of the sentence is worth recording: one exception is laid down (lā yaghfiru an yushraka bihī) and everything else falls within the scope of forgiveness (mā dūna dhālika). The narrowing half of the sentence is a single item; the widening half is without limit.

يُزَكُّونَ أَنفُسَهُمْ — the root ز-ك-و

The root's original sense: to increase, to grow; and from there, to be purified, to be clean. The lexicographers record these two sides of the root — increase and purification — together: a thing grows when it is cleared of foreign elements.

And what the verse does is a change of subject:

ClauseSubject
Yuzakkūna anfusahumThey themselves
Bali'llāhu yuzakkī man yashāʾGod

The same verb, with two different subjects, in a single verse. This is a fact of word order that can be verified.

I record this as my own reading: the verse does not forbid the act — it changes its subject. Purification, that is, is not rejected; what is rejected is the judgement a person passes about himself.

And the same field was treated at al-Najm 53/32: fa-lā tuzakkū anfusakum huwa aʿlamu bi-mani'ttaqā. The two verses use the same verb and the same direction.


4/51-57

ألم تر إلى الذين أوتوا نصيبا من الكتاب يؤمنون بالجبت والطاغوت … أم يحسدون الناس على ما آتاهم الله من فضله · إن الذين كفروا بآياتنا سوف نصليهم نارا · والذين آمنوا وعملوا الصالحات سندخلهم جنات تجري من تحتها الأنهار

A-lam tara ila'lladhīna ūtū naṣīban mina'l-kitābi yuʾminūna bi'l-jibti wa'l-ṭāghūt … Am yaḥsudūna'l-nāsa ʿalā mā ātāhumu'llāhu min faḍlih …

"Have you not seen those who were given a share of the Book? They believe in jibt and in ṭāghūt… Or do they envy people for what God has given them of His bounty?"

ٱلْجِبْت and ٱلطَّٰغُوت

The word jibt occurs only here in the Qurʾān. The lexicographers do not agree on whether the word is of Arabic origin; for its sense such renderings as "a thing with no good in it", "an idol", "soothsaying" are transmitted. Nothing definite is said in this commentary about the origin of the word.

Ṭāghūt — root ط-غ-ي: to exceed the bound, to overflow. The root was treated at al-Naḥl 16/36 (ani'ʿbudu'llāha wa'jtanibu'l-ṭāghūt), and it was recorded there that in respect of its pattern the word states intensification and is used for both singular and plural. I rely on that treatment.

The word occurs twice in this sūra: at the fifty-first verse and at the sixtieth. In the second it will be named as the authority resorted to for judgement.

أَم يَحْسُدُونَ ٱلنَّاسَ — envy made a subject

The root ح-س-د: to wish that a favour someone has should leave him.

And the word order of the verse must be recorded: the sentence says mā ātāhumu'llāhu min faḍlih — "what God has given them of His bounty". The same expression occurred at the thirty-second verse (mā faḍḍala'llāhu bihī baʿḍakum ʿalā baʿḍ), and there coveting was forbidden.

VerseVerbThose addressed
32Lā tatamannaw — do not covetThose who believe
54Am yaḥsudūn — do they envyThe group described

The same field, in two separate places: one a command, the other a diagnosis. I record this as an observation about word order.

كُلَّمَا نَضِجَتْ جُلُودُهُم بَدَّلْنَٰهُمْ جُلُودًا غَيْرَهَا — the fifty-sixth verse

Naḍija — root ن-ض-ج: to be cooked, to ripen. The use of the word in this context is striking: the root is used for the ripening of fruit as well.

The qualification entered in this commentary about descriptions of the hereafter holds here too: nothing definite is said about the nature and manner of the description.

وَنُدْخِلُهُمْ ظِلًّا ظَلِيلًا (57) — ẓillan ẓalīlā: a shade and the attribute of shade, from the same root. This is one of the patterns of emphasis in Arabic. And the block closes with a shade.


4/58

إن الله يأمركم أن تؤدوا الأمانات إلى أهلها وإذا حكمتم بين الناس أن تحكموا بالعدل إن الله نعما يعظكم به إن الله كان سميعا بصيرا

Inna'llāha yaʾmurukum an tuʾaddu'l-amānāti ilā ahlihā wa idhā ḥakamtum bayna'l-nāsi an taḥkumū bi'l-ʿadl, inna'llāha niʿimmā yaʿiẓukum bih, inna'llāha kāna Samīʿan Baṣīrā

"God commands you to deliver trusts to those entitled to them, and when you judge between people to judge with justice. Excellent is what God admonishes you with. God is Hearing, Seeing."

The verse's place in the sūra

This verse opens the sūra's ninth block and joins two commands in one sentence.

And the coming of the two commands together builds a structure:

CommandFieldWho to whom
Tuʾaddu'l-amānāti ilā ahlihāWhat is heldThe holder of the trust → its owner
Idhā ḥakamtum … an taḥkumū bi'l-ʿadlWhat is decidedThe one who judges → the parties

What the two commands have in common must be recorded: in both, something belonging to another is in one party's hands. In the one it is property or an office, in the other a decision.

And this is the very centre of the line established in the sūra's introductory section: "the person whose right is in someone else's hands." I rely on that.

أَمَانَة — the root أ-م-ن and al-Aḥzāb 33/72

The root's original sense: to be secure, to be without fear. Amn — security; īmān — trusting and giving trust; amīn — trustworthy; amānawhat is left with someone in trust.

The widest use of the word is at al-Aḥzāb 33/72, and I rely on that treatment. A summary of what was recorded there:

"Al-amāna comes with the definite article — that is, it points to something known — but its content is not opened up… That the verse leaves the word indefinite is a datum of the text."

And in the table of disagreement given there over what the trust is, this verse was named as the ground of one view: "E. Trusts between people — what individuals leave with one another: property, a secret, an office. Its ground: the dictionary sense of the word; al-Nisāʾ 4/58." I rely on that treatment.

Now the two verses must be set side by side, because the same word is used at two different scales:

al-Aḥzāb 33/72al-Nisāʾ 4/58
NumberAl-amānasingular, definiteAl-amānātplural
Who carries itAl-insān — the human being as a kindYaʾmurukum — the community addressed
What is askedIt is stated, not commandedTuʾaddūlet them be delivered
DirectionGiven to the human beingIlā ahlihāback to its owner

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the number and the verbs of the two verses: the verse of al-Aḥzāb builds the trust as a burden; the verse of al-Nisāʾ makes it plural, as things to be returned. The one gives the concept, the other its application.

Tuʾaddū — root أ-د-ي: to convey a thing fully, without deficiency. Adāʾ — the complete discharge of a debt or an obligation. The verb states not "to give" but "to convey as is due".

Ilā ahlihā — "to those entitled to them". The root أ-ه-ل: to belong to a place, to settle in it. Ahl — the true owner of a thing, the one worthy of it. The verse does not say "to its owner", it says "to those entitled to it" — and this word is wide enough to take in both ownership and desert.

وَإِذَا حَكَمْتُم بَيْنَ ٱلنَّاسِ — the breadth of the address

The conditional pattern of the clause must be recorded: idhā ḥakamtum — "when you judge".

The verse names no office. The condition is framed so as to take in every case in which the act of judging occurs.

And the qualification bayna'l-nās must be recorded separately: "between people". The verse describes the parties to be judged by no belonging.

This will return once more, and more sharply, at the hundred and thirty-fifth verse: wa law ʿalā anfusikum awi'l-wālidayni wa'l-aqrabīn. The two verses work the same field, and will be tabled together in the concluding section.

إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ سَمِيعًۢا بَصِيرًا — the verse-ending

The sūra's order of verse-endings was set out in a table in the introductory section. This verse's ending is two attributes of perception: hearing and seeing.

And that the ending is chosen to suit the subject must be recorded: a trust is most often something unseen; a judgement is something spoken. The two attributes answer to the two commands separately.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the same method established in the discussion of al-Māʾida 5/8: there too it was shown that the verse-ending is chosen to suit the subject (khabīr, because He knows the inward side of testimony). I rely on that treatment.


4/59

يا أيها الذين آمنوا أطيعوا الله وأطيعوا الرسول وأولي الأمر منكم فإن تنازعتم في شيء فردوه إلى الله والرسول إن كنتم تؤمنون بالله واليوم الآخر ذلك خير وأحسن تأويلا

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū aṭīʿu'llāha wa aṭīʿu'l-rasūla wa uli'l-amri minkum, fa-in tanāzaʿtum fī shayʾin fa-ruddūhu ila'llāhi wa'l-rasūli in kuntum tuʾminūna bi'llāhi wa'l-yawmi'l-ākhir, dhālika khayrun wa aḥsanu taʾwīlā

"O you who believe! Obey God, and obey the Messenger, and those among you who hold command (ulu'l-amr). If you differ over anything, refer it to God and the Messenger — if you believe in God and the Last Day. That is better and finer in outcome."

First, a note on method

Per the method (Method) two things are not done in this discussion:

One. No preference is imposed in the disagreement over who the ulu'l-amr are. The disagreement is given as a table, with its grounds, and none of it is binding.

Two. Current politics is absolutely not entered into. The argument over which office, which order or which authority this verse fits today is not the subject of this text. This record was entered in the sūra's introductory section as well; I rely on that.

What is treated is the wording and the word order of the verse.

One: the repetition of the verb أَطِيعُوا۟ — and where it is not repeated

This is the plainest datum of the text in the verse, and a countable fact.

OrderTo whomIs the verb repeated for it
1AllāhaAṭīʿū — yes, with its own verb
2Al-rasūlaAṭīʿūyes, the verb is repeated
3Uli'l-amri minkumNo — the verb is not repeated; the word is coordinated with the second verb

The wording of the sentence is this: aṭīʿu'llāha wa aṭīʿu'l-rasūla wa uli'l-amri minkum.

For the first and the second, that is, the verb is brought separately; for the third it is not. This is a fact that can be seen and counted in the structure of the sentence.

It is widely recorded in the classical commentaries that this difference carries a meaning, and it is explained thus: the verb's not being repeated shows that the obedience in the third place is to be understood not on its own account but as bound to the second.

I relate this explanation as it is transmitted, and I add the following as my own reading: this is, before it is exegesis, a grammatical observation — the difference between repeating the verb and coordinating carries meaning in Arabic, and here the two stand side by side in the same sentence. The sentence itself has established a gradation.

Two: a second datum of the text — to what a dispute is referred

And in the second half of the verse the same sequence is not built again.

ClauseThose counted
The first halfGod, the Messenger, ulu'l-amr
The second halfFa-ruddūhu ila'llāhi wa'l-rasūl — God and the Messenger

When the place to which a disagreement is to be taken is named, the third item is not named. This too is a countable fact.

I record this as an observation about word order, not as a ruling: the verse counts three parties to be obeyed and two authorities for a dispute.

Three: أُو۟لِى ٱلْأَمْرِ — a table of the disagreement

Whom the word means is not explained in the verse, and there is disagreement in the classical commentaries. I put it in a table; I impose no preference and none of it is binding.

ReadingWho the ulu'l-amr areIts groundIts qualification
AThe scholars / the juristsThat the continuation of the verse takes disputes to the Book and the Sunna, and that this is the business of the people of knowledge; the expression alladhīna yastanbiṭūnahū minhum in the eighty-third verseIt has difficulty answering to the administrative association of the word amr
BThose who govern / those in charge of affairsThe sense of the word amr as "affair, command, governance"; the presence of the community's order in the verse's contextIts limit is indefinite; under what conditions it holds is not written in the verse
CBoth together — in every field, those competent in that fieldThe generality of the word; that amr is not confined to a particular fieldIt is the widest reading in scope
DThose put in charge of particular assignmentsThat the qualification minkum makes being from within the community a conditionIt narrows the general address of the verse

All four readings have been defended in the classical literature. I prefer none of them.

But there are three qualifications that follow directly from the wording of the verse, and these are not disagreement but data of the text:

QualificationWordingWhat it does
OneUli'l-amri minkumThe condition of being from within the community addressed
TwoThat the verb aṭīʿū is not repeated for the thirdIt binds that obedience to the second
ThreeFa-ruddūhu ila'llāhi wa'l-rasūlThe third item is absent from the authority for a dispute

These three qualifications are read from the verse's own sentence. I draw no political conclusion from them and do not count the drawing of one as this text's business.

Four: تَنَازُع — and al-Anfāl 8/46

Tanāzaʿtum — root ن-ز-ع, Form VI: to contend with one another.

The concrete sense of the root ن-ز-ع: to pull a thing out of its place. Nazaʿa — he pulled out, he tugged. So tanāzuʿ is two parties pulling something each towards himself — the picture of a rope pulled from both ends.

The word was treated at al-Anfāl 8/46, and a chain was recorded there. I carry it over here:

"And the chain must be recorded: tanāzuʿ (quarrelling) → fashal (losing heart) → dhahābu'r-rīḥ (the going of the strength). Three steps, in a single sentence."

And it was shown in al-Anfāl that this chain coincides with the sūra's first verse: wa aṣliḥū dhāta baynikum — set right what is between you. I rely on that treatment.

Setting the two verses side by side gives a link between two sūras that can be verified:

al-Anfāl 8/46al-Nisāʾ 4/59
VerbWa lā tanāzaʿūa prohibitionFa-in tanāzaʿtuma condition
ContextIn the ranks of battleJudgement within the community
OutcomeFa-tafshalū wa tadhhaba rīḥukumFa-ruddūhu ila'llāhi wa'l-rasūl
What it givesThe cost of quarrellingThe way out of quarrelling

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that the two verses use the same word: one forbids contention and states its outcome; the other assumes contention will occur and points to an authority. The two do not stand in for one another; they complete one another.

Five: أَحْسَنُ تَأْوِيلًا — the closing

Taʾwīl — root أ-و-ل: to return, for a thing to return to its origin. Awwal — first; maʾāl — the place a thing comes to. So taʾwīl is the bringing of a thing to the place it will come to.

And the choice of the word here must be recorded: the verse says aḥsanu taʾwīlā — "finer in outcome".

I record this as an observation about word order: the sentence gives two grounds — khayr (better) and aḥsanu taʾwīlā (finer in outcome). The first looks to worth, the second to outcome.


4/60-63

ألم تر إلى الذين يزعمون أنهم آمنوا بما أنزل إليك وما أنزل من قبلك يريدون أن يتحاكموا إلى الطاغوت وقد أمروا أن يكفروا به … فأعرض عنهم وعظهم وقل لهم في أنفسهم قولا بليغا

A-lam tara ila'lladhīna yazʿumūna annahum āmanū bimā unzila ilayka wa mā unzila min qablika yurīdūna an yataḥākamū ila'l-ṭāghūti wa qad umirū an yakfurū bih … Fa-aʿriḍ ʿanhum wa ʿiẓhum wa qul lahum fī anfusihim qawlan balīghā

"Have you not seen those who claim they believe in what was sent down to you and in what was sent down before you? They want to take their disputes to ṭāghūt, though they were commanded to reject it… Turn away from them, admonish them, and speak to them, about themselves, a word that reaches home."

Immediately after the fifty-ninth verse

The position of the block must be recorded: the fifty-ninth verse said where a dispute is to be taken; the sixtieth takes as its subject its being taken somewhere else.

Yataḥākamū — the root ح-ك-م, Form VI: for two parties to resort to someone's judgement. The word is from the same root as ḥakamtum in the fifty-ninth verse and ḥakam in the thirty-fifth.

VerseWordWho
35Ḥakaman … wa ḥakamanTwo arbitrators from within the family
58Ḥakamtum … taḥkumūThose who judge
59Fa-ruddūhuThe authority for a dispute
60Yataḥākamū ila'l-ṭāghūtAnother authority

The same root in four verses, in four different positions. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra.

يَزْعُمُونَ — the choice of verb

The root ز-ع-م: to assert something without certain knowledge. The lexicographers record that the word is mostly used for "a claim without foundation".

And the choice of the verb produces a record: the verse does not say "they did not believe", it says "they claim that they believe". What is at issue, that is, is the distance between the claim and the conduct.

This is the same field treated at al-Munāfiqūn 63/1, and I rely on that treatment: there too the matter was framed not as the truth of the statement but as the speaker's relation to what he says.

قَوْلًا بَلِيغًا — the analysis of the word

The root ب-ل-غ: to reach a place, to arrive. Bulūgh — arriving; balāgh — conveying, delivery.

Balīgh — "a word that arrives". The verse, that is, qualifies the word not by its beauty but by where it arrives.

And the place of the qualification must be recorded: wa qul lahum fī anfusihim — "about themselves". The word is spoken not in public but to the person himself.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the two qualifications: the verse asks both that the word reach the one addressed and that it be said to him himself.


4/64-70

وما أرسلنا من رسول إلا ليطاع بإذن الله … فلا وربك لا يؤمنون حتى يحكموك فيما شجر بينهم ثم لا يجدوا في أنفسهم حرجا مما قضيت ويسلموا تسليما … ومن يطع الله والرسول فأولئك مع الذين أنعم الله عليهم من النبيين والصديقين والشهداء والصالحين وحسن أولئك رفيقا

Wa mā arsalnā min rasūlin illā li-yuṭāʿa bi-idhni'llāh … Fa-lā wa rabbika lā yuʾminūna ḥattā yuḥakkimūka fīmā shajara baynahum thumma lā yajidū fī anfusihim ḥarajan mimmā qaḍayta wa yusallimū taslīmā … Wa man yuṭiʿi'llāha wa'l-rasūla fa-ulāʾika maʿa'lladhīna anʿama'llāhu ʿalayhim mina'l-nabiyyīna wa'l-ṣiddīqīna wa'l-shuhadāʾi wa'l-ṣāliḥīn, wa ḥasuna ulāʾika rafīqā

"We sent no messenger except that he should be obeyed, by God's leave… No, by your Lord, they do not believe until they make you the judge in what has branched out between them, and then find in themselves no constraint over what you have decided, and submit in full submission… Those who obey God and the Messenger are with those whom God has favoured: the prophets, the ṣiddīqs, the witnesses and the righteous. How good a company they are!"

شَجَرَ — the picture in the word

The root ش-ج-ر: a tree. And in its verbal form shajarato branch out, to become intertwined.

So the expression fīmā shajara baynahum means literally "in what has branched out between them". The word draws the picture of a dispute branching and tangling like a tree.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the concrete sense of the root: the verse describes a disagreement not as a simple opposition but as a situation whose branches have grown into one another — and for exactly that reason an arbitrator from outside is needed.

The same logic was present in the thirty-fifth verse: there too shiqāq (a splitting) required an arrangement of arbitration. The two verses propose the same remedy at two different scales.

حَرَجًا — the root ح-ر-ج

The concrete sense of the root: dense woodland, a place hard to pass through. From there comes the sense of narrowness, constraint.

And the coming together of the two words is worth recording: shajara (to branch out) and ḥaraj (dense woodland). Both words come from vegetation, and they are in the same verse. This is a countable fact of language.

The three steps the verse lays down

The sixty-fifth verse describes submission in three stages, and the sequence must be recorded:

StepWordingWhere it takes place
1YuḥakkimūkaOutside — accepting an arbitrator
2Thumma lā yajidū fī anfusihim ḥarajāInside — feeling no constraint
3Wa yusallimū taslīmāReinforced by the absolute object

I record this as an observation about word order: the verse does not count outward acceptance as sufficient, and ties the second step plainly to the inside (fī anfusihim).

مِنَ ٱلنَّبِيِّۦنَ وَٱلصِّدِّيقِينَ وَٱلشُّهَدَآءِ وَٱلصَّٰلِحِينَ — four classes

The sixty-ninth verse counts four classes, and the sequence must be recorded.

ClassRootWhat it states
Al-nabiyyūnن-ب-أThose who bring news
Al-ṣiddīqūnص-د-قIntensity in truthfulness — the fiʿʿīl pattern
Al-shuhadāʾش-ه-دThose who bear witness
Al-ṣāliḥūnص-ل-حThose who set right / those who are sound

And what the verse gives is not a rank but a companionship: maʿa'lladhīna anʿama'llāhu ʿalayhim. The sentence does not say "they become of them", it says "they are with them".

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the preposition maʿa.

وَحَسُنَ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ رَفِيقًاrafīq: root ر-ف-ق, gentleness, ease; and companionship on the road. From the same root comes rifq (to act gently).

And the choice of the word coincides with the thirty-sixth verse: there al-ṣāḥib bi'l-janb (the companion at one's side) had been taken into the list. The sūra uses the word for companionship at two different scales.


4/71-74

يا أيها الذين آمنوا خذوا حذركم فانفروا ثبات أو انفروا جميعا · وإن منكم لمن ليبطئن … فليقاتل في سبيل الله الذين يشرون الحياة الدنيا بالآخرة

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū khudhū ḥidhrakum fa'nfirū thubātin awi'nfirū jamīʿā · Wa inna minkum la-man la-yubaṭṭiʾann … Fa'l-yuqātil fī sabīli'llāhi'lladhīna yashrūna'l-ḥayāta'l-dunyā bi'l-ākhira

"O you who believe! Take your precautions; go out in companies or go out all together. Among you there is one who holds back… Let those who sell the life of this world for the hereafter fight in the way of God."

حِذْر — the analysis of the word

The root ح-ذ-ر: to guard against a harm, to take precaution.

And the form of the command must be recorded: khudhū ḥidhrakum — "take your precautions". The verb gives precaution as something to be taken up.

The word will occur once more, in this block and in the hundred and second verse (the prayer of fear). Both occurrences concern a state of war.

لَيُبَطِّئَنَّ — the one who holds back

The root ب-ط-أ: to be slow, to lag. Form II (baṭṭaʾa) states transitivity and intensity.

And how the verse describes this group must be recorded: no name is given, a verb is given. La-man la-yubaṭṭiʾann — "one who holds back". The description is tied not to a person but to a behaviour.

This accords with the method's rule about attributes and is the line maintained throughout this commentary.

يَشْرُونَ ٱلْحَيَوٰةَ ٱلدُّنْيَا بِٱلْـَٔاخِرَةِ — the word's two directions

In Arabic the root ش-ر-ي is one of the aḍdād: it states both selling and buying.

And which direction it is used in here is known from the sentence's particle bi-: in Arabic the price comes with bi-; here the price is al-ākhira. What is given, that is, is this world, and what is taken is the hereafter.

The word occurred at the forty-fourth verse as well: yashtarūna'l-ḍalālata — "they buy error". The same root, in two opposite directions. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.


4/75-76

وما لكم لا تقاتلون في سبيل الله والمستضعفين من الرجال والنساء والولدان الذين يقولون ربنا أخرجنا من هذه القرية الظالم أهلها واجعل لنا من لدنك وليا واجعل لنا من لدنك نصيرا

Wa mā lakum lā tuqātilūna fī sabīli'llāhi wa'l-mustaḍʿafīna mina'l-rijāli wa'l-nisāʾi wa'l-wildāni'lladhīna yaqūlūna rabbanā akhrijnā min hādhihi'l-qaryati'l-ẓālimi ahluhā wa'jʿal lanā min ladunka waliyyan wa'jʿal lanā min ladunka naṣīrā

"What is the matter with you that you do not fight in the way of God, and for the men, women and children who have been made weak, who say: 'Our Lord! Bring us out of this town whose people are oppressors; give us from Yourself one to take charge of us, and give us from Yourself a helper.'"

مُسْتَضْعَفِين — the analysis of the word and two grounds

The root ض-ع-ف, Form X (istifʿāl): to reckon someone weak and to make him weak.

What the pattern carries must be recorded, and this was treated in detail at al-Qaṣaṣ 28/4-5. The record made there was this:

"يَسْتَضْعِفُ — root ض-ع-ف, Form X: to reckon someone weak and to make him weak. The pattern matters: weakness is not something that happens of itself but something that is done."

And one further observation was recorded there:

"The verse describes what Pharaoh did with three verbs, and the first of them is dividing… That is, oppression does not begin with direct force; it begins by breaking the community into pieces — and only in a divided community can one section be set apart and made mustaḍʿaf."

I rely on both records and do not repeat them.

The second ground is al-Anfāl 8/26. What was recorded there:

"مُّسْتَضْعَفُون — Form X: those who are seen as weak and made weak… And in al-Anfāl the same fear is named in the past tense: as a state now over."

Setting the three verses side by side gives the word's three positions in the Qurʾān:

PlaceWhoTenseWhat is said
al-Qaṣaṣ 28/4-5A communityOngoingyastaḍʿifuThe reversal of the position is promised
al-Anfāl 8/26Those addressedPastkuntum … mustaḍʿafūnA reminder
al-Nisāʾ 4/75Mina'l-rijāli wa'l-nisāʾi wa'l-wildānPresentNamed as the ground for war

The three verses use the same pattern, and the three stand in three different tenses. This is a weave across three sūras that can be verified.

The threefold enumeration itself

Having said al-mustaḍʿafīn, the verse counts three items: mina'l-rijāli wa'l-nisāʾi wa'l-wildān.

And the enumeration itself produces a record: the word is not left standing alone, it is opened up.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the line established in the sūra's introductory section: the sūra names the one without protection not as an abstract category but as enumerated items — like the nine addresses in the thirty-sixth verse.

And the word al-wildān must be recorded: from the root و-ل-د, children. The sūra will use this word once more at the hundred and twenty-seventh verse: wa'l-mustaḍʿafīna mina'l-wildān.

ٱلْقَرْيَةِ ٱلظَّالِمِ أَهْلُهَا — a detail of word order

The construction means literally "the town whose people are oppressors".

And the word order must be recorded: the description is attached not to the town but to its people. The sentence does not say al-qaryati'l-ẓālima (the oppressive town); it says al-ẓālimi ahluhā.

I record this as an observation about word order: the wrong is ascribed not to a place but to the acts of the people in that place.

And this accords with the method's rule about attributes: the ruling is tied not to a place or to a whole community but to an act.

وَلِيًّانَصِيرًا — the two words of the prayer

The prayer asks for two things, and both had occurred earlier in the sūra: in the forty-fifth verse, wa kafā bi'llāhi waliyyan wa kafā bi'llāhi naṣīrā.

VerseSentenceWho says it
45Wa kafā bi'llāhi waliyyan wa kafā bi'llāhi naṣīrāThe text — a statement
75Wa'jʿal lanā min ladunka waliyyan wa'jʿal lanā min ladunka naṣīrāThose made weak — a prayer

The same two words, thirty verses apart: one a statement, the other a request. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as my own reading: the text first states the sufficiency; then it relates the voice that asks for that sufficiency.


4/77

ألم تر إلى الذين قيل لهم كفوا أيديكم وأقيموا الصلاة وآتوا الزكاة فلما كتب عليهم القتال إذا فريق منهم يخشون الناس كخشية الله أو أشد خشية

A-lam tara ila'lladhīna qīla lahum kuffū aydiyakum wa aqīmu'ṣ-ṣalāta wa ātu'l-zakāh, fa-lammā kutiba ʿalayhimu'l-qitālu idhā farīqun minhum yakhshawna'l-nāsa ka-khashyati'llāhi aw ashadda khashyah

"Have you not seen those to whom it was said, 'hold back your hands, keep up the prayer and give the alms'? When fighting was prescribed for them, a group of them began to fear people as they fear God, or with a greater fear."

كَفُّوٓا۟ أَيْدِيَكُمْ — the sequence itself

The verse records a sequence: first holding back the hands was commanded, then fighting was prescribed.

And this can be recorded not as a piece of historical information but as the verse's own sentence: the text says the two commands were not given at the same time.

It is widely transmitted in the classical commentaries that this is tied to the difference between the Meccan period and the Medinan. I relate this explanation as it is transmitted.

خَشْيَة — and its second occurrence in the sūra

The word was treated at the ninth verse of this sūra (under the heading "the difference between خَشْيَة and خَوْف") and I rely on that treatment.

What belongs here is this: the verse sets up a comparison.

What is comparedWording
Fear of peopleYakhshawna'l-nās
The measureKa-khashyati'llāh — as they fear God
And beyond itAw ashadda khashyahor with a greater fear

The presence of the second qualification must be recorded: the verse does not stop at equality; it writes down the possibility of exceeding it as well.

قُلْ مَتَٰعُ ٱلدُّنْيَا قَلِيلٌ وَٱلْـَٔاخِرَةُ خَيْرٌ لِّمَنِ ٱتَّقَىٰ وَلَا تُظْلَمُونَ فَتِيلًاfatīl: the thin thread in the groove of a date-stone. The word is used to state the smallest amount.

And it does the same work as mithqāla dharra in the fortieth verse. The sūra states the absence of injustice twice, with two separate small measures. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.


4/78-79

أينما تكونوا يدرككم الموت ولو كنتم في بروج مشيدة وإن تصبهم حسنة يقولوا هذه من عند الله وإن تصبهم سيئة يقولوا هذه من عندك قل كل من عند الله … · ما أصابك من حسنة فمن الله وما أصابك من سيئة فمن نفسك وأرسلناك للناس رسولا وكفى بالله شهيدا

Aynamā takūnū yudrikkumu'l-mawtu wa law kuntum fī burūjin mushayyada, wa in tuṣibhum ḥasanatun yaqūlū hādhihī min ʿindi'llāh, wa in tuṣibhum sayyiʾatun yaqūlū hādhihī min ʿindik, qul kullun min ʿindi'llāh, fa-mā li-hāʾulāʾi'l-qawmi lā yakādūna yafqahūna ḥadīthā · Mā aṣābaka min ḥasanatin fa-mina'llāh, wa mā aṣābaka min sayyiʾatin fa-min nafsik, wa arsalnāka li'l-nāsi rasūlā, wa kafā bi'llāhi shahīdā

"Wherever you may be, death will overtake you — even were you in towers built strong. If some good befalls them they say 'this is from God'; if some ill befalls them they say 'this is from you'. Say: all is from God. What is the matter with these people that they barely understand a word? — Whatever good befalls you is from God; whatever ill befalls you is from yourself. We sent you to people as a messenger. God suffices as a witness."

First, a note on method

There is an apparent tension between these two verses, and the tension must not be concealed. But two things are not done in this section:

One. No theological polemic is entered into. These two verses have been used in the history of classical theology in the debate over destiny and the creation of human acts. This commentary takes no side in that debate and does not relate the objections the parties direct at one another. What is treated are the explanations that follow from the wording of the verses.

Two. No preference is imposed. The disagreement is given as a table, and none of it is binding.

One: what the tension is — written plainly

VerseSentenceWhat it says
78Qul kullun min ʿindi'llāhAll is from God
79Wa mā aṣābaka min sayyiʾatin fa-min nafsikIll is from yourself

The two sentences come one after the other, and at first sight they look as though they answer each other back.

Two: first the context — what the seventy-eighth verse is answering

And before resolving the tension, what the seventy-eighth verse says and to whom must be established, because this is the point most often skipped.

The verse relates an utterance:

CaseWhat is said
In tuṣibhum ḥasanaHādhihī min ʿindi'llāh — this is from God
In tuṣibhum sayyiʾaHādhihī min ʿindikthis is from you

The answer kullun min ʿindi'llāh in the seventy-eighth verse, that is, comes not in order to lay down a general law of cause and effect but in order to reject a particular ascription: the saying that lays the ill that has befallen one upon a person.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that the sentence begins with qul (say): the sentence is an answer, and the party addressed by the answer are those who said the words related.

Three: the difference of pronoun between the two verses — a countable fact

4/784/79
VerbTuṣibhum — third person pluralAṣābakasecond person singular
Who is being spoken ofThe group describedThe one directly addressed
The end of the sentenceLā yakādūna yafqahūna ḥadīthāWa arsalnāka li'l-nāsi rasūlā

The two verses use the same words (ḥasana, sayyiʾa) but their pronouns differ. This is a countable fact.

And the second half of the seventy-ninth verse must be recorded separately, because it is most often dropped: wa arsalnāka li'l-nāsi rasūlā — "we sent you to people as a messenger."

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the continuation of the verse: the place where the sentence stands is not a context debating the source of an ill but a context stating the position of the messenger. In the seventy-eighth verse it had been said "this is from you"; the seventy-ninth verse lifts that ascription and says what the messenger is.

Four: a table of the disagreement — the classical explanations

Different tendencies are transmitted in the classical commentaries on how the two verses are to be reconciled. I put them in a table; I impose no preference and none of them is binding.

TendencyHow it reconciles themIts ground
AThe two verses speak from two different sides: 78 in respect of creation and decree ("everything is from God"), 79 in respect of ascription and acquisition ("an ill is ascribed to a person's own act"). This explanation is the one most widely transmitted in the classical commentariesThe difference in the word patterns of the two verses: 78 min ʿindi'llāh (source), 79 min nafsik (ascription)
BThe words do not answer to the same thing in the two verses: the ḥasana/sayyiʾa of 78 are abundance and hardship (favour and affliction), while those of 79 are good and bad conductThat the verb tuṣibhum is used for what comes from outside; that the one addressed in 79 is singular
C79 is the lifting of the ascription made in 78: the sentence lays down no law, it rejects the words "this is from you" and gives the responsibility back to the speakerThat the verse continues with wa arsalnāka li'l-nāsi rasūlā
D78 is general, 79 particular: 78 states the ultimate source of all that happens, 79 what falls to a person's own share; the two are different layersThe generality of the word kullun (all); the singularity of the pronoun ka in 79

All four tendencies have been defended in the classical literature. I prefer none of them.

Five: the barrier against generalising at al-Shūrā 42/30 — carried over here

And now comes the most important record in this discussion. The Qurʾān builds another verse in the same field, and there a limit is set.

وَمَآ أَصَٰبَكُم مِّن مُّصِيبَةٍ فَبِمَا كَسَبَتْ أَيْدِيكُمْ وَيَعْفُوا۟ عَن كَثِيرٍ "Whatever affliction strikes you is for what your own hands have earned. And He pardons much." (al-Shūrā 42/30)

This verse was treated in detail at al-Shūrā 42/30, and the barrier set there must be carried over here as it stands. The records made there:

"The following generalisation cannot be drawn from the verse: 'every affliction is the return for a sin; therefore a person to whom something happens is in that state on account of his sin.'First: the verse itself sets a proportion. The sentence wa yaʿfū ʿan kathīr says that there is no one-to-one correspondence between what comes and what is earned."
"Fourth: whom the address is to. The verse says aṣābakum — second person plural. Those addressed, that is, are a particular community, and the sentence is said to them. It is not a structure that can be used for one person to pass a verdict about another."
"The verse opens a door for a person to take account of his own condition. But this door is one-wayTo ask the same question about someone else does not follow from the wording of the verse."

This barrier holds for al-Nisāʾ 4/79 too, and its ground is the verse's own pronoun: aṣābaka — second person singular.

The sentence, that is, is said to the one addressed about himself. For a person to say, of what has befallen someone else, "this is from himself" does not follow from the wording of this verse.

I record this separately and plainly, because the method's rules against scolding the reader and against sweeping rulings are at work here.

Six: أَيْنَمَا تَكُونُوا۟ يُدْرِككُّمُ ٱلْمَوْتُ — the block's opening

And the block's first sentence sets the frame for the whole discussion.

Yudrikkum — root د-ر-ك: to catch up with, to reach, to overtake. Idrāk — arriving at something; and from there, grasping it. The concrete sense of the verb is catching up from behind.

Burūjin mushayyadaburj: root ب-ر-ج: to be visible, to be out in the open. Tabarruj — to make visible. A burj, then, is a high structure seen from afar.

Mushayyada — root ش-ي-د: to raise, to build firmly. Shīd — lime, mortar. The word states that the structure has been reinforced.

And the use of the two words together builds a picture: both high and reinforced.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the particle wa law: the sentence gives the most sheltered case as its example and says that even so the outcome does not change. The verse, that is, states not the impossibility of protection but the limit of protection.

And the position of the block needs to be recorded: this sentence comes immediately after the verses that take as their subject holding back from war (77). In the seventy-seventh verse people were feared; the seventy-eighth verse says how far the thing feared can protect anyone.

What this says to the present

One. The saying the seventy-eighth verse relates — laying good to a source and ill to a person — describes a habit of thought. In rejecting this habit the verse does not accuse the person; it corrects the direction of the ascription.

Two. The qualification min nafsik in the seventy-ninth verse is a sentence framed for a person's taking account of himself. As was recorded in the discussion of al-Shūrā 42/30: "to say to a person in pain 'this is from what you did' is not consolation but the adding of a burden." I rely on that treatment.


4/80-81

من يطع الرسول فقد أطاع الله ومن تولى فما أرسلناك عليهم حفيظا · ويقولون طاعة فإذا برزوا من عندك بيت طائفة منهم غير الذي تقول والله يكتب ما يبيتون فأعرض عنهم وتوكل على الله وكفى بالله وكيلا

Man yuṭiʿi'l-rasūla fa-qad aṭāʿa'llāh, wa man tawallā fa-mā arsalnāka ʿalayhim ḥafīẓā · Wa yaqūlūna ṭāʿatun fa-idhā barazū min ʿindika bayyata ṭāʾifatun minhum ghayra'lladhī taqūl, wa'llāhu yaktubu mā yubayyitūn, fa-aʿriḍ ʿanhum wa tawakkal ʿala'llāh, wa kafā bi'llāhi Wakīlā

"Whoever obeys the Messenger has obeyed God. And whoever turns away — We did not send you as a keeper over them. They say 'we obey'; but when they leave your presence, a group of them plot by night something other than what you say. God records what they plot by night. So turn away from them and rely on God. God suffices as a trustee."

فَمَآ أَرْسَلْنَٰكَ عَلَيْهِمْ حَفِيظًا — the setting of a limit

Ḥafīẓ — root ح-ف-ظ: to protect, to watch over; and to keep guard. The root had occurred at the thirty-fourth verse too (ḥāfiẓātun li'l-ghayb).

And the function of the sentence must be recorded: immediately after stating obedience, the verse sets a limit. The messenger's task is not to make people obey but to convey.

The same limit was treated at al-Anʿām 6/69 (wa mā ʿala'lladhīna yattaqūna min ḥisābihim min shayʾ) and it was recorded there: the burden of calling to account is lifted. I rely on that treatment.

بَيَّتَ — the picture in the word

The root ب-ي-ت: to pass the night, to spend the night. Bayt — the place where one passes the night, a house. And bayyata (Form II): to plan a thing by night, to devise it.

What the word carries is worth recording: the verb qualifies the devising by time — the difference between what is said by day and what is contrived by night.

And the word order of the verse establishes this plainly:

TimeWhat happens
While with youYaqūlūna ṭāʿatun — "we obey"
Idhā barazū min ʿindikOnce they have left
By nightBayyata … ghayra'lladhī taqūlthey contrive something else

Barazū — root ب-ر-ز: to come out into the open, to appear. The choice of the word must also be recorded: the departure is given with the verb "to come out".

This field was treated in detail in al-Munāfiqūn, and I rely on that treatment: there too the matter was framed as the distance between the word and the one who speaks it.

And a record per the method (Method): what is described here is an attribute. The verse names a group (ṭāʾifatun minhum) and describes it by a behaviour. Whoever does that thing falls within the description; this is not a ruling about a group.


4/82

أفلا يتدبرون القرآن ولو كان من عند غير الله لوجدوا فيه اختلافا كثيرا

Afa-lā yatadabbarūna'l-Qurʾān, wa law kāna min ʿindi ghayri'llāhi la-wajadū fīhi'khtilāfan kathīrā

"Do they not give the Qurʾān tadabbur? Had it been from other than God, they would have found in it much inconsistency."

تَدَبُّرMuḥammad 47/24 and Ṣād 38/29

The root د-ب-ر was treated in detail at Muḥammad 47/24. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here. A summary of the records made there:

"Root: د-ب-ر. And the concrete sense of the root carries the whole weight of the word: the back, the back of a thing.تَدَبُّر (tadabbur): to get behind a thing, to think of its end."
"تَدَبَّرَ — the tafaʿʿul form… That is, tadabbur is not something that happens at a glance. The pattern of the word says that the work takes time and requires labour."
"The result: tadabbur is to advance step by step towards the back of a text, its end, the place it arrives at. And this is different from 'reading'."

The second ground is Ṣād 38/29, and there the word was given as a ground:

"And Ṣād 38/29 is striking: there tadabbur is given as the ground of the Book's being sent downli-yaddabbarū. The text, that is, ties its own reason for existing to this verb."

Now the three verses must be set side by side, because the same verb comes in three different patterns:

PlaceWordingPatternWhat it does
Ṣād 38/29Li-yaddabbarū āyātihCausal — a groundThe reason for its being sent down
Muḥammad 47/24Afa-lā yatadabbarūna'l-QurʾānA questionThe diagnosis that it is not being done
al-Nisāʾ 4/82Afa-lā yatadabbarūna'l-QurʾānA question + a proofA measure is added to the question

And it must be recorded that the first half of the sentence in al-Nisāʾ and in Muḥammad is word for word identical: afa-lā yatadabbarūna'l-Qurʾān. What changes is the second half of the sentence.

SūraSecond half
Muḥammad 47/24Am ʿalā qulūbin aqfāluhāor are there locks upon the hearts
al-Nisāʾ 4/82Wa law kāna min ʿindi ghayri'llāhi la-wajadū fīhi'khtilāfan kathīrāa measure is given

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the wording of the two verses: in Sūrat Muḥammad the question asks where the obstacle is; in al-Nisāʾ the question says what is to be looked for.

ٱخْتِلَٰفًا كَثِيرًا — the form of the measure

The root خ-ل-ف: to come after a thing, to take its place. Khalaf — the one who comes after; ikhtilāf (Form VIII) — to go one after another, to fail to agree with one another.

And the measure the verse gives must be recorded: the sentence does not say ikhtilāfan but ikhtilāfan kathīrā — "much inconsistency".

This is a qualification that must be read carefully, and I give it as an observation about word order: the verse says not that no apparent tension whatever will be found, but that no numerous and irremovable inconsistency will be found. The presence of the adjective shows that the measure is not absolute but quantitative.

And how this measure is to be worked is tied to the verse's own verb: tadabbur. That is, as the verse gives the measure, so it gives in the same sentence the method by which the measure is to be applied.

The verse's place within the sūra

And where the verse stands must be recorded, because it is most often skipped.

This verse stands not in the middle of a debate about a text but in the middle of a discussion about news and trust: in the eighty-first verse words contrived by night were named; in the eighty-third the spreading of news will be named.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the order of the verses: read together, the three verses show a common subject among them — looking behind what is said. In the eighty-first verse there is something else behind the word; in the eighty-second it is asked that one get behind the text; in the eighty-third the verification of news is commanded.


4/83

وإذا جاءهم أمر من الأمن أو الخوف أذاعوا به ولو ردوه إلى الرسول وإلى أولي الأمر منهم لعلمه الذين يستنبطونه منهم

Wa idhā jāʾahum amrun mina'l-amni awi'l-khawfi adhāʿū bih, wa law raddūhu ila'l-rasūli wa ilā uli'l-amri minhum la-ʿalimahu'lladhīna yastanbiṭūnahū minhum

"When news of security or of fear comes to them, they spread it about. Had they referred it to the Messenger and to those among them who hold command (ulu'l-amr), those among them who can draw out its inner sense would have known it."

أَذَاعُوا۟ — the analysis of the word

The root ذ-ي-ع: to spread, to be heard about. Adhāʿa (Form IV) — to spread, to make known.

And the object of the verb must be recorded: amrun mina'l-amni awi'l-khawf — "news of security or of fear". The verse counts both directions: what is spread may be not only bad news but good news too.

I record this as an observation about word order: what is forbidden is not the content of the news but its being spread without verification.

يَسْتَنۢبِطُونَهُۥ — the concrete sense of the word

The root ن-ب-ط. And its concrete sense is the most striking side of this verse: nabṭ — the first water that comes up when a well is dug.

Istinbāṭ (Form X) — to bring that water out; and from there, to draw a hidden sense out of an utterance.

The picture in the word must be recorded: knowledge is drawn not as something lying on the surface but as something brought up by digging.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the concrete sense of the root: the verse names the understanding of the inner side of a report as work that requires labour. And this is in the same direction as tadabbur one verse earlier: both verbs state a going beneath the surface.

VerseVerbThe picture in the root
82TadabburTo get behind a thing
83IstinbāṭTo bring a thing up from the depth

Two verses one after the other, and two verbs in the same direction. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra.

أُو۟لِى ٱلْأَمْرِ — the second occurrence

The word occurs for the second time in this sūra: at the fifty-ninth verse and the eighty-third.

And the difference between the two occurrences must be recorded:

VerseContextWhat is asked
59A disputeAṭīʿū — obedience
83NewsRaddūhu ilayhimto refer it

And the eighty-third verse qualifies the ulu'l-amr with an attribute: alladhīna yastanbiṭūnahū minhum — "those among them who can draw out its inner sense".

This was named in the table of disagreement at the fifty-ninth verse as one of the grounds of reading A. I rely on that, and here too I impose no preference.

But it must be recorded as a datum of the text: in the second occurrence a description of a task is set beside the word.


4/84-87

فقاتل في سبيل الله لا تكلف إلا نفسك وحرض المؤمنين · من يشفع شفاعة حسنة يكن له نصيب منها ومن يشفع شفاعة سيئة يكن له كفل منها · وإذا حييتم بتحية فحيوا بأحسن منها أو ردوها إن الله كان على كل شيء حسيبا · الله لا إله إلا هو ليجمعنكم إلى يوم القيامة لا ريب فيه

Fa-qātil fī sabīli'llāh, lā tukallafu illā nafsak, wa ḥarriḍi'l-muʾminīn · Man yashfaʿ shafāʿatan ḥasanatan yakun lahū naṣībun minhā, wa man yashfaʿ shafāʿatan sayyiʾatan yakun lahū kiflun minhā … · Wa idhā ḥuyyītum bi-taḥiyyatin fa-ḥayyū bi-aḥsana minhā aw ruddūhā, inna'llāha kāna ʿalā kulli shayʾin Ḥasībā

"Fight in the way of God; you are answerable only for yourself. And urge on those who believe… Whoever intercedes with a good intercession shall have a share of it; whoever intercedes with a bad intercession shall have a burden of it… When you are greeted with a greeting, answer with a finer one or return the same. God keeps count of all things."

لَا تُكَلَّفُ إِلَّا نَفْسَكَ — the limit of responsibility

The root ك-ل-ف: to take up a task with difficulty; and to lay a burden on someone. Kulfa — trouble.

And the function of the sentence must be recorded: immediately after a command, the scope of that command is narrowed.

ClauseWhat it does
Fa-qātil fī sabīli'llāhThe command
Lā tukallafu illā nafsakThe limit — responsibility does not pass beyond oneself
Wa ḥarriḍi'l-muʾminīnWhat remains — urging on

Three clauses one after another, and the middle one separates the first from the third.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the order of the clauses: the verse lifts the burden of making others do what they ought and puts urging on in its place. This is the same as the qualification fa-mā arsalnāka ʿalayhim ḥafīẓā in the eightieth verse.

شَفَاعَة — the root ش-ف-ع

The concrete sense of the root: to make a thing double. Shafʿ — even, paired; watr — odd, single. So shafāʿa is the joining of a second party to the one who is alone.

And this concrete sense of the word explains the ruling the verse gives: the one who intercedes becomes the second party to the business — and for that reason takes a share of the outcome.

The verse gives the two returns with two separate words, and the difference must be recorded:

IntercessionReturnWord
Shafāʿatan ḥasanaNaṣībA share
Shafāʿatan sayyiʾaKiflA burden

Kifl — root ك-ف-ل: to take a thing upon oneself, to stand surety; and the saddle-cloth put on a camel's back. The concrete sense of the word is a load.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the difference between the two words: for the good the verse chooses the word share, for the bad the word burden. Two separate names are given to the same structure.

And the word naṣīb occurs here for the sixth time in this sūra (twice in 7, twice in 32, 33, 85). The word's distribution in the sūra will be set out in a table in the concluding section.

وَإِذَا حُيِّيتُم بِتَحِيَّةٍ — the reckoning of a greeting

The root ح-ي-ي: life. Taḥiyya — to wish life to someone; and from there, a greeting.

And the measure the verse gives must be recorded, because it has two steps:

StepWordingWhat it is
UpperFa-ḥayyū bi-aḥsana minhāWith a finer one
LowerAw ruddūhāAt the least, with the same

The verse, that is, lays down a floor: one does not fall below the greeting received.

I record this as an observation about word order: the particle aw (or) in the sentence states an alternative, and both alternatives include answering. Leaving it unanswered is not among the options.

And the verse-ending must be recorded: inna'llāha kāna ʿalā kulli shayʾin Ḥasībā. This verse was included in the table of verse-endings set out in the sūra's introductory section. A keeper of reckoning is set beside a small act of conduct.


4/88-91

فما لكم في المنافقين فئتين والله أركسهم بما كسبوا … إلا الذين يصلون إلى قوم بينكم وبينهم ميثاق أو جاءوكم حصرت صدورهم أن يقاتلوكم … فإن اعتزلوكم فلم يقاتلوكم وألقوا إليكم السلم فما جعل الله لكم عليهم سبيلا

Fa-mā lakum fi'l-munāfiqīna fiʾatayni wa'llāhu arkasahum bimā kasabū … Illa'lladhīna yaṣilūna ilā qawmin baynakum wa baynahum mīthāqun aw jāʾūkum ḥaṣirat ṣudūruhum an yuqātilūkum … Fa-ini'tazalūkum fa-lam yuqātilūkum wa alqaw ilaykumu'l-salama fa-mā jaʿala'llāhu lakum ʿalayhim sabīlā

"What is the matter with you, that you have split into two groups over the hypocrites? God has turned them back for what they earned… Except those who join a people with whom you have a treaty, or who come to you with hearts too constrained to fight you… If they keep away from you, do not fight you, and offer you peace, then God has given you no way against them."

First, a note on method — the bringing forward of the exceptions

This block is one of the places where the method's rule that "no sweeping ruling is made about a group" works most plainly. And the reason is not an interpretation but the verses' own wording: after giving a ruling, the block lays down three separate exceptions.

OrderExceptionWording
1Those who take refuge with a people bound by treatyIlla'lladhīna yaṣilūna ilā qawmin baynakum wa baynahum mīthāq
2Those who come with hearts too constrained to fightAw jāʾūkum ḥaṣirat ṣudūruhum
3Those who keep away, do not fight, and offer peaceFa-ini'tazalūkum fa-lam yuqātilūkum wa alqaw ilaykumu'l-salama

And the outcome of the third exception is written out plainly: fa-mā jaʿala'llāhu lakum ʿalayhim sabīlā — "God has given you no way against them."

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the three rows above: having laid down a ruling, the block counts out in detail whom that ruling does not cover. The verses, that is, themselves block a sweeping generalisation.

أَرْكَسَهُم بِمَا كَسَبُوا۟ — the picture in the word

The root ر-ك-س: to turn a thing upside down, to reverse it. Riks — filth, a thing turned back.

And the ground must be recorded: bimā kasabū — "for what they earned".

The root ك-س-ب had occurred in this sūra at the thirty-second verse (iktasabū / iktasabna) and was treated there. I rely on that treatment. The same root in two separate places, one stating a share, the other an outcome.

And how the same pattern (bimā kasabat aydīkum) is to be read was treated in detail at al-Shūrā 42/30; the barrier against generalising set out there was carried over here in the discussion of 4/79. The same record holds here.

فِئَتَيْنِ — splitting in two

The root ف-ي-أ: to turn, to come back. Fiʾa — a company, a party.

And the form of the sentence must be recorded: before giving a ruling, the verse asks a questionfa-mā lakum ("what is the matter with you?").

The same pattern of question was present at the seventy-fifth verse: wa mā lakum lā tuqātilūna fī sabīli'llāh. In both places the question takes as its subject the state of the one addressed. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

حَصِرَتْ صُدُورُهُمْ — the analysis of the word

The root ح-ص-ر: to encircle, to press in, to confine in a place. Ḥaṣr — a besieging.

Ḥaṣirat ṣudūruhum — "their breasts constrained". And the function of the expression must be recorded: the verse describes an unwillingness to fight as an inward state and counts it a ground of exception.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the exception itself: the verse lays down a qualification that looks not at the outwardly visible behaviour but at the state behind that behaviour.


4/92-93

وما كان لمؤمن أن يقتل مؤمنا إلا خطأ ومن قتل مؤمنا خطأ فتحرير رقبة مؤمنة ودية مسلمة إلى أهله إلا أن يصدقوا … فمن لم يجد فصيام شهرين متتابعين توبة من الله · ومن يقتل مؤمنا متعمدا فجزاؤه جهنم خالدا فيها وغضب الله عليه ولعنه وأعد له عذابا عظيما

Wa mā kāna li-muʾminin an yaqtula muʾminan illā khaṭaʾā, wa man qatala muʾminan khaṭaʾan fa-taḥrīru raqabatin muʾminatin wa diyatun musallamatun ilā ahlihī illā an yaṣṣaddaqū … fa-man lam yajid fa-ṣiyāmu shahrayni mutatābiʿayni tawbatan mina'llāh · Wa man yaqtul muʾminan mutaʿammidan fa-jazāʾuhū jahannamu khālidan fīhā wa ghaḍiba'llāhu ʿalayhi wa laʿanahū wa aʿadda lahū ʿadhāban ʿaẓīmā

"It is not for a believer to kill a believer — except by mistake. Whoever kills a believer by mistake must free a believing slave and pay compensation delivered to his family, unless they remit it as a charity… Whoever cannot find the means shall fast two consecutive months, as a turning back granted by God. And whoever kills a believer deliberately, his recompense is Hell, to remain there; God has been angry with him, has cursed him, and has prepared for him a great punishment."

First, a note on method

From these two verses arose one of the widest discussions in classical jurisprudence: retaliation, blood-money, expiation, the kinds of intent and their conditions. That discussion is not entered into in this section and no legal ruling is issued.

What is done is to put in a table the gradations laid down by the verse's own wording.

The verse's own gradations — a table

The ninety-second verse separates a single act (killing by mistake) into five different cases. The table gives the wording of the verse; it establishes no ruling.

CaseThe wording in the verseThe return the verse counts
The general caseWa man qatala muʾminan khaṭaʾāTaḥrīru raqabatin muʾmina and diyatun musallamatun ilā ahlihī
The family remits itIllā an yaṣṣaddaqūThe compensation lapses
If he was of a people hostile to you and himself a believerFa-in kāna min qawmin ʿaduwwin lakum wa huwa muʾminOnly taḥrīru raqabatin muʾmina — no compensation is named
If he was of a people with whom you have a treatyWa in kāna min qawmin baynakum wa baynahum mīthāqDiyatun musallamatun ilā ahlihī and taḥrīru raqabatin muʾmina
One who cannot find the meansFa-man lam yajidṢiyāmu shahrayni mutatābiʿayn

Two things follow from the table and are not in dispute:

One. The verse counts five separate cases for a single act. This is a countable fact.

Two. All the returns counted are in the verse's own wording, and nothing outside the wording has been added to the table.

دِيَة and تَحْرِير — the direction of the two words

Diya — root و-د-ي: to pay a sum, to give the equivalent.

Taḥrīr — root ح-ر-ر: to set free, to make free. Ḥurr — free.

And the direction of the two returns must be recorded:

ReturnTo whom it goes
DiyaTo his familyilā ahlihī
Taḥrīru raqabaTo a third person — the one who gains his freedom

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the recipients of the two returns: the verse does not confine the making good to the injured party alone; it makes one person's freedom part of the return as well.

And the word's place in the sūra must be recorded: raqaba (a slave) had been named in this sūra at the twenty-fifth and thirty-sixth verses too. In all three occurrences the direction is the same: marriage, the list of kindness, and setting free.

إِلَّآ أَن يَصَّدَّقُوا۟ — the door of remission

Taṣadduq, from the root ص-د-ق: to give as a charitable gift. And the choice of the word must be recorded: the verse does not say "if they waive it", it says "if they remit it as a charity".

I record this as an observation about word order: to give up one's right is named in the verse with a verb of giving.

تَوْبَةً مِّنَ ٱللَّهِ — the naming of the expiation

The verse qualifies the option of fasting with one phrase: tawbatan mina'llāh.

And the direction of the particle min must be recorded: the turning back is from God. The root ت-و-ب: to turn back. The root was treated at al-Baqara 2/37 and at the seventeenth and eighteenth verses of this sūra. I rely on those treatments.

The ninety-third verse — deliberate killing

The verse counts four things, and the enumeration must be recorded:

OrderWording
1Jazāʾuhū jahannamu khālidan fīhā
2Wa ghaḍiba'llāhu ʿalayh
3Wa laʿanahū
4Wa aʿadda lahū ʿadhāban ʿaẓīmā

Four items in a single verse. This is a countable fact, and an enumeration of this density is rare in the Qurʾān.

And there is disagreement in the classical literature over the expression khālidan fīhā. I put it in a table; I impose no preference, I enter no theological debate, and none of it is binding.

ReadingHow it understands itIts ground
AIt states perpetuityThe direct sense of the word
BIt states a long time; in Arabic khulūd is used both for absolute endlessness and for a long durationThe word's use in the language
CThe ruling holds for one who commits the act while holding it lawfulThe qualification wa yaghfiru mā dūna dhālika li-man yashāʾ at 4/48 and 4/116
DThe verse is a sentence of threat, and the force of sentences of threat does not exclude the possibility of pardonThe verses of forgiveness in the same sūra

All four readings are transmitted. I prefer none of them.

And what must be recorded as a datum of the text is this: the same sūra says at the forty-eighth and hundred and sixteenth verses that everything other than associating partners with God may be forgiven. These two data stand side by side in the text, and this commentary records both.

What this says to the present

What the ninety-second verse does is to refuse to tie a single act to a single return. For an act producing the same outcome, the verse takes separately into account the situation of the doer, the community to which the victim belonged, and the doer's means. This is a structure visible in the wording of the verse.


4/94-96

يا أيها الذين آمنوا إذا ضربتم في سبيل الله فتبينوا ولا تقولوا لمن ألقى إليكم السلام لست مؤمنا تبتغون عرض الحياة الدنيا فعند الله مغانم كثيرة كذلك كنتم من قبل فمن الله عليكم فتبينوا

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū idhā ḍarabtum fī sabīli'llāhi fa-tabayyanū wa lā taqūlū li-man alqā ilaykumu'l-salāma lasta muʾminan tabtaghūna ʿaraḍa'l-ḥayāti'l-dunyā, fa-ʿinda'llāhi maghānimu kathīra, kadhālika kuntum min qablu fa-manna'llāhu ʿalaykum fa-tabayyanū

"O you who believe! When you set out in the way of God, ascertain the facts. Do not say to one who offers you peace, seeking the passing gain of this world, 'you are not a believer'. With God there is abundant gain. You yourselves were like that before, and God bestowed His favour upon you. So ascertain the facts."

فَتَبَيَّنُوا۟ — a command repeated twice

The root ب-ي-ن: to separate two things, to bring to clarity. Bayn — the space between; tabayyun (Form V) — to wait for and to search out the coming to light of a thing.

And that the command occurs twice in the verse must be recorded: the sentence opens with fa-tabayyanū and closes with fa-tabayyanū.

This is a countable fact, and I record it as my own reading: the verse places all the intervening grounds between the two commands. The command to ascertain, that is, stands both before the grounds and after them.

The same root was treated at al-Ḥujurāt 49/6 (in jāʾakum fāsiqun bi-nabaʾin fa-tabayyanū), and there the discussion was the verification of news. I rely on that treatment.

PlaceWhat is verified
al-Ḥujurāt 49/6News
al-Nisāʾ 4/94The condition of the person opposite

The two verses use the same verb on two separate subjects.

لَسْتَ مُؤْمِنًا — the forbidden sentence

The verse relates directly a sentence that is forbidden to be spoken: lasta muʾminan — "you are not a believer".

And the ground of the prohibition is given right beside it: tabtaghūna ʿaraḍa'l-ḥayāti'l-dunyā.

ʿAraḍ — root ع-ر-ض: to come crosswise, to come up in front of one. The word means "what comes up in one's path, what is passing", and it is used as the opposite of jawhar (what endures).

I record this as an observation about word order: the verse says that behind a judgement passed about someone else there may lie an interest — and it sets this down as an indication that puts the validity of the judgement in question.

كَذَٰلِكَ كُنتُم مِّن قَبْلُ — the weight of the sentence

"You yourselves were like that before."

And where the sentence stands must be recorded: immediately after a prohibition against passing judgement.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the order of the sentence: by reminding the one addressed of his own past, the verse blocks his judging the person before him. This is the same method treated at al-Anfāl 8/26 — there too, in the middle of a dispute over spoils, a past weakness was recalled. I rely on that treatment.

غَيْرُ أُو۟لِى ٱلضَّرَرِ — the qualification in the ninety-fifth verse

While comparing those who stay behind with those who strive, the verse lays down an exception: ghayru uli'l-ḍarar — "except those with an impediment".

The root ض-ر-ر: harm; and from there, an obstacle, an excuse.

And the presence of the exception must be recorded: while stating a superiority, the verse takes the one without means out of the comparison.

This will be done once more, and in more detail, in the ninety-seventh verse — there the place where an excuse is accepted will be counted out plainly.


4/97-100

إن الذين توفاهم الملائكة ظالمي أنفسهم قالوا فيم كنتم قالوا كنا مستضعفين في الأرض قالوا ألم تكن أرض الله واسعة فتهاجروا فيها … · إلا المستضعفين من الرجال والنساء والولدان لا يستطيعون حيلة ولا يهتدون سبيلا · فأولئك عسى الله أن يعفو عنهم … · ومن يهاجر في سبيل الله يجد في الأرض مراغما كثيرا وسعة

Inna'lladhīna tawaffāhumu'l-malāʾikatu ẓālimī anfusihim qālū fīma kuntum, qālū kunnā mustaḍʿafīna fi'l-arḍ, qālū a-lam takun arḍu'llāhi wāsiʿatan fa-tuhājirū fīhā … · Illa'l-mustaḍʿafīna mina'l-rijāli wa'l-nisāʾi wa'l-wildāni lā yastaṭīʿūna ḥīlatan wa lā yahtadūna sabīlā · Fa-ulāʾika ʿasa'llāhu an yaʿfuwa ʿanhum … · Wa man yuhājir fī sabīli'llāhi yajid fi'l-arḍi murāghaman kathīran wa saʿa

"To those whose souls the angels take while they are wronging themselves, they say: 'What state were you in?' They say: 'We were made weak in the land.' They say: 'Was God's earth not wide, that you might have migrated in it?'… Except the men, women and children who were truly made weak, who could find no means and knew no way. It is these whom God may well pardon… Whoever migrates in the way of God will find in the earth many a place of refuge and abundance."

The construction of the block — an excuse is rejected, then an excuse is accepted

The most important side of this block is that it requires the two verses to be read together. And in this commentary the two are given together.

VerseWhat happensAbout whom
97The excuse kunnā mustaḍʿafīna fi'l-arḍ is not acceptedThose who could have gone and did not
98Illa'l-mustaḍʿafīn … lā yastaṭīʿūna ḥīlatan wa lā yahtadūna sabīlāan exceptionThose who truly could find no means
99Fa-ulāʾika ʿasa'llāhu an yaʿfuwa ʿanhumThe return for the exception

I bring this forward separately, because when the ninety-seventh verse is read on its own the measure the verse lays down is lost.

And the measure itself is in the wording of the ninety-eighth verse, and it has two items:

ItemWordingWhat it states
OneLā yastaṭīʿūna ḥīlatanTo find no means
TwoWa lā yahtadūna sabīlāTo know no way

Ḥīla — root ح-و-ل: to turn, to pass from one state to another. Taḥawwul — change; ḥawl — power, a turning. So ḥīla, at the root of the word, is "the possibility of changing one's situation".

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the concrete sense of the root: the verse describes the excuse not as a matter of intention but as whether or not the possibility of changing one's situation exists.

And the three items counted in the ninety-eighth verse — al-rijāl, al-nisāʾ, al-wildān — are word for word the same as in the seventy-fifth.

VerseWordingFunction
75Al-mustaḍʿafīna mina'l-rijāli wa'l-nisāʾi wa'l-wildānThe ground for war
98Al-mustaḍʿafīna mina'l-rijāli wa'l-nisāʾi wa'l-wildānThe place where an excuse is accepted

The same threefold enumeration, in two separate functions. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

I record this as my own reading: the sūra says, for the same group, both that they are to be fought for and that their excuses are to be accepted. The two do not conflict: one looks at those outside, the other at the people themselves.

أَلَمْ تَكُنْ أَرْضُ ٱللَّهِ وَٰسِعَةً — three verses together

"The wideness of the earth" occurs in three verses in the Qurʾān, and the three must be set side by side. The table compares the wording of the three verses.

al-Nisāʾ 4/97al-Zumar 39/10al-ʿAnkabūt 29/56
WordingA-lam takun arḍu'llāhi wāsiʿaWa arḍu'llāhi wāsiʿaInna arḍī wāsiʿa
MoodA questiona-lam takunA statementA statement
TensePasttakunPresentPresent
The genitiveArḍu'llāh — God's earthArḍu'llāhArḍīMy earth
AddressThird person — it is being recountedYā ʿibādi'lladhīna āmanūYā ʿibādī — first person
ContinuationFa-tuhājirū fīhāInnamā yuwaffa'l-ṣābirūna ajrahum bi-ghayri ḥisābFa-iyyāya fa'ʿbudūn
FunctionInterrogation — a question asked afterwardsConsolation — a return for the one who enduresA summons — the command to serve

The difference between al-Zumar and al-ʿAnkabūt was already set out in a table in the discussion of al-ʿAnkabūt 29/56, and it was recorded there:

"The difference must be recorded: in al-Zumar 'God's earth', here 'My earth' — the first person. And the address is first person too: yā ʿibādī — 'O My servants.'"

I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it. What belongs here is the difference of the third verse — al-Nisāʾ's.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the table above: in al-Zumar and al-ʿAnkabūt the sentence is a summons, spoken beforehand. In al-Nisāʾ the same sentence is a question, and it is built in the past tense — that is, it is asked after the matter is over.

And the following observation recorded at al-ʿAnkabūt 29/56-57 connects here too:

"That is, changing one's place is not escaping death — it is choosing in what state one dies."

The verse in al-Nisāʾ stands at exactly this point: the sentence is spoken at the moment of death.

مُرَٰغَمًا كَثِيرًا وَسَعَةً — the analysis of the word

The root ر-غ-م: the nose; and from there raghām — to rub the nose in the dust. Raghman — unwillingly.

Murāgham — the lexicographers explain the word in two ways: (a) a place to go to, a place of refuge; (b) a position that leaves the other party without recourse. I relate both explanations; I impose no preference.

And the coming together of the two words must be recorded: murāghaman kathīran wa saʿa.

Saʿa — root و-س-ع: wideness. And this word is from the same root as wāsiʿa in the ninety-seventh verse.

VerseWordWhose
97WāsiʿaThe wideness of the earth — as a question
100SaʿaThe abundance the migrant will find — as a promise

The same root, three verses apart: one in an interrogation, the other in a return. I record this as an observation about word order.

وَمَن يَخْرُجْ مِنۢ بَيْتِهِۦ مُهَاجِرًا إِلَى ٱللَّهِ وَرَسُولِهِۦ ثُمَّ يُدْرِكْهُ ٱلْمَوْتُ

The second half of the hundredth verse must be recorded: the person who sets out and dies before arriving.

Thumma yudrikhu'l-mawt — and the verb is the same as the verb in the seventy-eighth verse: yudrikkumu'l-mawt.

VerseSentenceWho
78Aynamā takūnū yudrikkumu'l-mawtEveryone
100Thumma yudrikhu'l-mawtThe one who has set out

The same verb, in two separate places. And the verse states that the reward of the one who dies on the road does not lapse: fa-qad waqaʿa ajruhū ʿala'llāh.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the verb the two verses share: the seventy-eighth verse said that death overtakes one everywhere; the hundredth says that where it overtakes one does not change the reward.


4/101-104

وإذا ضربتم في الأرض فليس عليكم جناح أن تقصروا من الصلاة … · وإذا كنت فيهم فأقمت لهم الصلاة فلتقم طائفة منهم معك وليأخذوا أسلحتهم … · فإذا قضيتم الصلاة فاذكروا الله قياما وقعودا وعلى جنوبكم … إن الصلاة كانت على المؤمنين كتابا موقوتا · ولا تهنوا في ابتغاء القوم إن تكونوا تألمون فإنهم يألمون كما تألمون

Wa idhā ḍarabtum fi'l-arḍi fa-laysa ʿalaykum junāḥun an taqṣurū mina'ṣ-ṣalāh … · Wa idhā kunta fīhim fa-aqamta lahumu'ṣ-ṣalāta fa'l-taqum ṭāʾifatun minhum maʿaka wa'l-yaʾkhudhū asliḥatahum … · Fa-idhā qaḍaytumu'ṣ-ṣalāta fa'dhkuru'llāha qiyāman wa quʿūdan wa ʿalā junūbikum … inna'ṣ-ṣalāta kānat ʿala'l-muʾminīna kitāban mawqūtā · Wa lā tahinū fi'btighāʾi'l-qawm, in takūnū taʾlamūna fa-innahum yaʾlamūna kamā taʾlamūn

"When you journey in the land there is no fault upon you in shortening the prayer… When you are among them and lead them in prayer, let one group of them stand with you and take up their weapons… When you have finished the prayer, remember God standing, sitting and lying on your sides… Prayer is an obligation upon the believers at appointed times. And do not grow weak in seeking out the enemy. If you are suffering, they are suffering as you suffer."

First, a note on method

From these verses arose the discussions of classical jurisprudence on travel, the shortening of prayer and the forms of the prayer of fear. Those discussions are not entered into in this section and no legal ruling is issued. What is treated is the linguistic side of the verses.

كِتَٰبًا مَّوْقُوتًا — the analysis of the expression

The root و-ق-ت: the appointed time of a task. Waqt — a definite span of time; mawqūt — with its time appointed.

And the place where the expression stands must be recorded: in the very middle of a context of war.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the order of the verses: the hundred and second verse shows that the form of prayer can change; the hundred and third says that its time is not lifted. The block, that is, states two things at once: the form gives, the time stands.

قِيَٰمًا وَقُعُودًا وَعَلَىٰ جُنُوبِكُمْ — three postures

The verse counts the remembrance to be made after prayer in three bodily postures: standing, sitting and lying on one's side.

And the root ق-و-م returns here once more. The root's occurrences in this sūra will be set out in a table in the concluding section.

The root ج-ن-ب also returns once more. The root occurs at the thirty-first verse as ijtanibū (keep away), at the thirty-sixth as al-junub and bi'l-janb (the neighbour and the companion), and here as junūbikum (your sides). The same root in three separate senses within the sūra. This is a countable fact.

إِن تَكُونُوا۟ تَأْلَمُونَ فَإِنَّهُمْ يَأْلَمُونَ كَمَا تَأْلَمُونَ — the weight of the sentence

This sentence in the hundred and fourth verse is one of the most striking places in the sūra and must be recorded separately.

The root ا-ل-م: to feel pain. Alam — pain.

And what the sentence does must be recorded: in the middle of a command to fight, it is said that the other side is suffering too.

The sentence could have been built like this, but it is not:

It could have beenIt is
You are suffering, but there is a reward for itIf you are suffering, they too are suffering as you suffer

The verb is repeated three times: taʾlamūn, yaʾlamūn, taʾlamūn. And the third is set as a measure for the second: kamā taʾlamūn.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the repetition of the verb: the sentence makes the one addressed measure the other side's pain by his own. And what is given as the ground is not a piece of information but the addressee's own experience.

And the continuation of the sentence must be recorded: wa tarjūna mina'llāhi mā lā yarjūn — "and you hope from God what they do not hope." The verse, that is, sets the difference between the two sides not in the pain but in the hope.


4/105-113

إنا أنزلنا إليك الكتاب بالحق لتحكم بين الناس بما أراك الله ولا تكن للخائنين خصيما … · يستخفون من الناس ولا يستخفون من الله وهو معهم … · ومن يكسب خطيئة أو إثما ثم يرم به بريئا فقد احتمل بهتانا وإثما مبينا

Innā anzalnā ilayka'l-kitāba bi'l-ḥaqqi li-taḥkuma bayna'l-nāsi bimā arāka'llāh, wa lā takun li'l-khāʾinīna khaṣīmā … · Yastakhfūna mina'l-nāsi wa lā yastakhfūna mina'llāhi wa huwa maʿahum … · Wa man yaksib khaṭīʾatan aw ithman thumma yarmi bihī barīʾan fa-qadi'ḥtamala buhtānan wa ithman mubīnā

"We have sent down the Book to you with the truth, that you may judge between people by what God has shown you. Do not be an advocate for the treacherous… They hide themselves from people but do not hide themselves from God, and He is with them… Whoever commits a fault or a sin and then casts it upon an innocent person has taken upon himself a slander and a manifest sin."

First, a note on method

It is transmitted in the sources that this block points to a judicial episode. In this commentary the details of that report are not related and no name of a person is given.

The reason has two layers:

One. The verses themselves give no name at all. Al-khāʾinīn (the treacherous), alladhīna yakhtānūna anfusahum (those who betray themselves), ṭāʾifatun minhum (a group of them), barīʾan (an innocent person) — the text is nameless from beginning to end.

Two. The general stance of this commentary. The same record was entered in the discussion of al-Nūr 24/11-20, and the ground was written there thus:

"This very sūra takes as its subject what it is to talk about named persons. For a section to be written by doing the very thing the verse it treats forbids would be an inconsistency."

The same ground holds here: the block takes as its subject the casting of an offence upon an innocent person.

وَلَا تَكُن لِّلْخَآئِنِينَ خَصِيمًا — the block's key sentence

Khaṣīm — root خ-ص-م: to contend with the other party in a suit. Khaṣm — a party to a case; khuṣūma — contention. And khaṣīm is on the intensive pattern: one who takes up a case and pleads it.

And the place where the sentence stands must be recorded: immediately after the command to judge.

OrderClauseWhat it is
1Li-taḥkuma bayna'l-nāsi bimā arāka'llāhThe command — judge
2Wa lā takun li'l-khāʾinīna khaṣīmāThe qualification — do not take a side
3Wa lā tujādil ʿani'lladhīna yakhtānūna anfusahum (107)The repetition of the qualification — pleading

Three clauses in a single block, and two of them in the same direction.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the fifty-eighth verse: there it said idhā ḥakamtum bayna'l-nāsi an taḥkumū bi'l-ʿadl. The hundred and fifth verse repeats the same command and sets beside it the concrete place where justice breaks down: taking a side.

And the same field was treated at al-Māʾida 5/8 (wa lā yajrimannakum shanaʾānu qawmin ʿalā allā taʿdilū) and it was recorded there: hatred pushes a person either to do too much or to do too little. I rely on that treatment.

PlaceWhat breaks justiceDirection
al-Māʾida 5/8ShanaʾānhatredAgainst the other party
al-Nisāʾ 4/105-107Khuṣūmataking a sideIn favour of one's own party

The two verses take as their subject the breaking of justice from two different directions. I record this as my own reading; its ground is the wording of the two verses.

يَسْتَخْفُونَ مِنَ ٱلنَّاسِ وَلَا يَسْتَخْفُونَ مِنَ ٱللَّهِ — the symmetry of the sentence

The root خ-ف-ي: to hide, to conceal. Form X (istakhfā) — to try to hide oneself.

And the sentence is built twice, with a single difference:

The firstThe second
VerbYastakhfūnLā yastakhfūn
From whomMina'l-nāsMina'llāh

And the qualification at the end of the sentence breaks the symmetry: wa huwa maʿahum — "and He is with them".

I record this as an observation about word order: the sentence says not that hiding is impossible but that the one hidden from is already beside them. What is removed is not the act but the distance.

يَبِيتُونَ مَا لَا يَرْضَىٰ مِنَ ٱلْقَوْلِ — and the link with the eighty-first verse

In the hundred and eighth verse the verb yubayyitūn occurs, and the verb is used for the second time in the sūra.

VerseSentence
81Bayyata ṭāʾifatun minhum ghayra'lladhī taqūl … wa'llāhu yaktubu mā yubayyitūn
108Idh yubayyitūna mā lā yarḍā mina'l-qawl

The same verb twice, twenty-seven verses apart. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra. The picture in the word — contriving by night — is the same in both places.

وَمَن يَكْسِبْ خَطِيٓـَٔةً أَوْ إِثْمًا ثُمَّ يَرْمِ بِهِۦ بَرِيٓـًٔا — the centre of the block

This verse is the heaviest sentence in the block and must be treated in detail.

First the order of the verbs must be recorded, because the verse describes a process:

OrderVerbWhat happens
1Yaksib khaṭīʾatan aw ithmanThe act is committed
2Thumma yarmi bihī barīʾanIt is cast upon an innocent person
3Fa-qadi'ḥtamala buhtānan wa ithman mubīnāTwo burdens at once are taken up

And it must be compared with the verse before it. The hundred and eleventh verse runs thus:

Wa man yaksib ithman fa-innamā yaksibuhū ʿalā nafsih — "Whoever earns a sin earns it only against himself." (4/111)
VerseVerbWhere the burden goes
111Yaksib ithmanʿAlā nafsih — upon himself
112Yaksib … thumma yarmi bihī barīʾanIt doublesbuhtānan wa ithman mubīnā

Two verses one after the other, and the second adds one further item on top of the first. This is a countable fact.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the wording of the two verses: when a sin stays upon oneself it is a single item; when it is cast upon another it becomes two items — the sin cast and the slander itself.

بُهْتَٰن — the analysis of the word and al-Nūr 24/11-20

The root ب-ه-ت: to astound, to shake to the point of stupefaction. Buhita — he was struck dumb. So buhtān is the slander that freezes the one it is aimed at: what is said is so far off that no answer can be made.

The word was given within a table in the discussion of al-Nūr 24/11-20, and I carry it over here:

WordRootWhat it states
كَذِب (kidhb)ك-ذ-بA statement that does not accord with the truth
إِفْك (ifk)أ-ف-كWhat has been turned upside down — its direction reversed
بُهْتَان (buhtān)ب-ه-تThe slander that freezes the one it is aimed at

I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it.

And at al-Nūr 24/16 the same word occurs with an adjective: hādhā buhtānun ʿaẓīm. Two sūras use the same word on the same subject.

PlaceExpressionPosition
al-Nisāʾ 4/112Fa-qadi'ḥtamala buhtānan wa ithman mubīnāWhat the slanderer takes upon himself
al-Nūr 24/16Subḥānaka hādhā buhtānun ʿaẓīmThe words that ought to be said

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the wording of the two verses: al-Nisāʾ says what happens to the doer of the slander; al-Nūr says what the one who hears it ought to say. The two verses stand on two different sides of the same phenomenon.

بُهْتَٰنًا وَإِثْمًا مُّبِينًا — an exact repetition within the sūra

And now comes a datum of the text that can be verified: this two-word construction occurs for the second time in the sūra.

VerseSentenceSubject
4/20A-taʾkhudhūnahū buhtānan wa ithman mubīnāThe taking back of a bridal gift
4/112Fa-qadi'ḥtamala buhtānan wa ithman mubīnāSlandering an innocent person

The same three words in both verses, in the same order. This is a countable fact.

In the twentieth verse this construction was treated under the heading "the form of the question". I rely on that.

And I record this as my own reading: the sūra uses the same heavy description in two separate places — one concerns taking something unjustly from property, the other from a person's good name. Both acts are the taking of something from someone who cannot defend it.

احْتَمَلَ — the choice of verb

The root ح-م-ل: to shoulder, to carry. Form VIII (iḥtamala) — to take upon oneself.

And its link with the use at al-Aḥzāb 33/72 must be recorded: there wa ḥamalaha'l-insān (the human being took it up) occurred, and that verse was about the trust.

PlaceWhat is taken upWhat it is
al-Aḥzāb 33/72Ḥamalaha'l-insānThe trust
al-Nisāʾ 4/112Iḥtamala buhtānan wa ithman mubīnāSlander

The same root, once for a trust and once for a slander. I record this as an observation about word order; I set up no link of ruling between the two verses, I merely record the two uses of the root.

What this says to the present

One. In giving judgement, the block sets down taking a side not as an error but as something that nullifies the judgement itself: the sentence wa lā takun li'l-khāʾinīna khaṣīmā stands right beside the command to judge.

Two. The hundred and twelfth verse counts the shifting of an offence onto someone else as two separate burdens. And the measure is not whether what is cast is true, but that the person it is cast upon is barīʾ.

Three. The sentence yastakhfūna mina'l-nās takes as its subject the party from whom one hides. By making one ask from whom the hiding is done, the verse makes the act itself visible.


4/114-115

لا خير في كثير من نجواهم إلا من أمر بصدقة أو معروف أو إصلاح بين الناس ومن يفعل ذلك ابتغاء مرضات الله فسوف نؤتيه أجرا عظيما · ومن يشاقق الرسول من بعد ما تبين له الهدى ويتبع غير سبيل المؤمنين نوله ما تولى ونصله جهنم وساءت مصيرا

Lā khayra fī kathīrin min najwāhum illā man amara bi-ṣadaqatin aw maʿrūfin aw iṣlāḥin bayna'l-nās, wa man yafʿal dhālika'btighāʾa marḍāti'llāhi fa-sawfa nuʾtīhi ajran ʿaẓīmā · Wa man yushāqiqi'l-rasūla min baʿdi mā tabayyana lahu'l-hudā wa yattabiʿ ghayra sabīli'l-muʾminīna nuwallihī mā tawallā wa nuṣlihī jahannam, wa sāʾat maṣīrā

"There is no good in much of their secret talk, except in one who enjoins a charitable gift, or a recognised good, or the setting right of what is between people. Whoever does this seeking God's good pleasure, We shall give him a great reward. And whoever breaks with the Messenger after the guidance has become clear to him, and follows a way other than that of the believers, We shall turn him to what he has turned to and cast him into Hell. What an evil destination!"

نَجْوَىٰ — the picture in the word

The root ن-ج-و: to save; and to set a thing apart, to draw it aside. Najāt — deliverance; najwa — a place slightly raised from the ground, standing apart.

And najwā, at the root of the word, is "to draw aside to a separate place and talk". The word, that is, names not the content of the speech but the manner of speaking.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the verse's exception: the verse leaves outside not the whole of secret talk but much of it (kathīrin min najwāhum) — and it gives the exception, again, according to content.

The three items of the exception

OrderWordingField
1ṢadaqaProperty
2MaʿrūfA recognised good
3Iṣlāḥin bayna'l-nāsWhat is between people

And the third item must be recorded: the root ص-ل-ح occurs in this sūra for the fourth time, as a remedy.

VerseWordingBetween whom
16Fa-in tābā wa aṣlaḥāTwo persons
35In yurīdā iṣlāḥan yuwaffiqi'llāhu baynahumāSpouses
114Iṣlāḥin bayna'l-nāsPeople — in general
128An yuṣliḥā baynahumā ṣulḥan wa'l-ṣulḥu khayrSpouses

The same root in four verses, and in all four the setting right of a breach. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and it will be tabled again in the concluding section.

I record this as my own reading: the sūra uses the same word from a disagreement inside the family (35) to human relations in general (114). The scale changes, the verb does not.

يُشَاقِقِ ٱلرَّسُولَ — the root ش-ق-ق

The root occurred at the thirty-fifth verse as shiqāq and was treated there: the splitting of a whole in two. I rely on that treatment.

VerseWordingBetween whom the split runs
35Shiqāqa baynihimāSpouses
115Yushāqiqi'l-rasūlBetween the Messenger and a person

The same root, at two separate scales. I record this as an observation about word order.

And the qualification in the conditional clause must be recorded: min baʿdi mā tabayyana lahu'l-hudā — "after the guidance has become clear to him". The ruling is tied not to ignorance but to what is done with what is known.

This is the same line recorded at al-Baqara 2/75: "the matter is not ignorance but what is done with what is known." I rely on that treatment.


4/116-121

إن الله لا يغفر أن يشرك به ويغفر ما دون ذلك لمن يشاء … · لعنه الله وقال لأتخذن من عبادك نصيبا مفروضا · ولأضلنهم ولأمنينهم … · يعدهم ويمنيهم وما يعدهم الشيطان إلا غرورا

Inna'llāha lā yaghfiru an yushraka bihī wa yaghfiru mā dūna dhālika li-man yashāʾ … · Laʿanahu'llāh, wa qāla la-attakhidhanna min ʿibādika naṣīban mafrūḍā · Wa la-uḍillannahum wa la-umanniyannahum … · Yaʿiduhum wa yumannīhim, wa mā yaʿiduhumu'l-shayṭānu illā ghurūrā

"God does not forgive that partners be associated with Him; what is other than that He forgives for whom He wills… God cursed him. And he said: 'I shall take an appointed share of Your servants. I shall lead them astray, I shall fill them with vain hopes…' Satan promises them and fills them with vain hopes; and Satan promises them nothing but delusion."

نَصِيبًا مَّفْرُوضًا — the sūra's phrase turned inside out

And here is one of the most striking uses of a word in the sūra.

The sūra's seventh verse ran: naṣīban mafrūḍā — "an appointed share". And there the construction stated a right of inheritance.

In the hundred and eighteenth verse the same construction occurs inside a claim: la-attakhidhanna min ʿibādika naṣīban mafrūḍā.

VerseConstructionWho takesFrom whom
7Naṣīban mafrūḍāMen and womenFrom what is left
118Naṣīban mafrūḍāThe one who makes the claimMin ʿibādik — from the servants

The same two words, word for word, in two verses. This is a countable fact.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the exact repetition of the construction: the sūra repeats, in the mouth of a claim to seize, the very construction with which it stated the fixing of a right. The same words, once a right and once a demand.

ٱلْأَمَانِىّ — the root م-ن-ي

The root was treated at the thirty-second verse of this sūra: lā tatamannaw — do not covet. I rely on that treatment.

And the word returns here as a verb: la-umanniyannahum (I shall fill them with vain hopes) and yumannīhim.

VerseWordWho
32Lā tatamannawa prohibitionThose addressed
119, 120Umanniyannahum, yumannīhimThe other party makes them do it
123Laysa bi-amāniyyikumThe rejection of resting on vain hope

The same root in three positions within the sūra: a prohibition, a prompting, and a rejection. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra.

فَلَيُغَيِّرُنَّ خَلْقَ ٱللَّهِ — a record of disagreement

There is disagreement in the classical commentaries over what this expression in the hundred and nineteenth verse covers, and the explanations differ from one another.

Nothing definite is said in this commentary about the scope of the expression, and no list is given. The reason is the method's rule of accuracy: to fill in the content of an expression whose scope is not written in the verse would be to add to the verse.

What can be said from the text is this: the expression occurs inside a sentence of promise, and the speaker is not the verse itself but the one whose words are being related. The sentence, that is, stands not as a ruling but as the relating of a claim.

غُرُور — the analysis of the word

The root غ-ر-ر was treated in detail at Fāṭir 35/5, and it was recorded there: an outward appearance that dazzles the eye while the inside is empty. I rely on that treatment.

And the word order of the verse must be recorded: wa mā yaʿiduhumu'l-shayṭānu illā ghurūrā. The sentence says not that the promise is a lie but that the promise itself is a delusion — that is, what is empty is not the content of the promise but the act of promising.

I record this as an observation about word order; its ground is the position of the particle illā.


4/122-126

والذين آمنوا وعملوا الصالحات سندخلهم جنات تجري من تحتها الأنهار … · ليس بأمانيكم ولا أماني أهل الكتاب من يعمل سوءا يجز به ولا يجد له من دون الله وليا ولا نصيرا · ومن يعمل من الصالحات من ذكر أو أنثى وهو مؤمن فأولئك يدخلون الجنة ولا يظلمون نقيرا · ومن أحسن دينا ممن أسلم وجهه لله وهو محسن واتبع ملة إبراهيم حنيفا واتخذ الله إبراهيم خليلا

Wa'lladhīna āmanū wa ʿamilu'ṣ-ṣāliḥāti sa-nudkhiluhum jannātin tajrī min taḥtiha'l-anhār … · Laysa bi-amāniyyikum wa lā amāniyyi ahli'l-kitāb, man yaʿmal sūʾan yujza bihī wa lā yajid lahū min dūni'llāhi waliyyan wa lā naṣīrā · Wa man yaʿmal mina'ṣ-ṣāliḥāti min dhakarin aw unthā wa huwa muʾminun fa-ulāʾika yadkhulūna'l-jannata wa lā yuẓlamūna naqīrā · Wa man aḥsanu dīnan mimman aslama wajhahū li'llāhi wa huwa muḥsinun wa'ttabaʿa millata Ibrāhīma ḥanīfā, wa'ttakhadha'llāhu Ibrāhīma khalīlā

"Those who believe and do righteous deeds We shall admit into gardens beneath which rivers flow… It goes neither by your vain hopes nor by the vain hopes of the People of the Book. Whoever does an evil will be repaid for it, and will find for himself no protector or helper besides God. And whoever does righteous deeds, male or female, and is a believer — these enter the Garden and are not wronged by so much as the groove of a date-stone. And who is finer in religion than one who surrenders his face to God, does good, and follows the way of Abraham (Ibrāhīm) as a ḥanīf? God took Abraham as a friend."

لَّيْسَ بِأَمَانِيِّكُمْ وَلَآ أَمَانِىِّ أَهْلِ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ — a qualification laid on both sides at once

This sentence is one of the plainest textual grounds for the method's rule that "no sweeping ruling is made about a group", and it must be recorded separately.

The sentence counts both parties at the same time:

PartyWording
Those addressedBi-amāniyyikum — your vain hopes
The People of the BookWa lā amāniyyi ahli'l-kitāb

And the structure of the sentence must be recorded: the same rejection, in the same word, is applied to both parties at once.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that the sentence is built twice: the verse says that a belonging does not by itself produce a return — and it says this while taking in the very community it is addressing.

The same measure was treated at al-Baqara 2/62, where the section was headed: "A label does not save." I rely on that treatment.

And the continuation of the verse ties the measure to an act: man yaʿmal sūʾan yujza bih — "whoever does an evil will be repaid for it." The measure is not a name but an act.

مِن ذَكَرٍ أَوْ أُنثَىٰ — a second symmetry in the sūra

The hundred and twenty-fourth verse ties the return plainly to both parties: min dhakarin aw unthā wa huwa muʾmin.

And this happens for the third time in the sūra.

VerseThe subject of the symmetryWording
7InheritanceLi'l-rijāli naṣīb … wa li'l-nisāʾi naṣīb
32EarningsMimma'ktasabū … mimma'ktasabna
124The return for one's deedsMin dhakarin aw unthā

In all three verses the same structure: in the counting of a right or a return, the two parties are named separately. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and it will be tabled again in the concluding section.

Naqīr — the small hollow on the back of a date-stone. And the word is the third "smallest measure" word in the sūra:

VerseWordWhat it is
40Mithqāla dharraThe smallest weight
77FatīlThe thread in the groove of a date-stone
124NaqīrThe hollow on the back of a date-stone

Three separate small measures in three verses, and all three state the absence of injustice. This is a countable fact.

خَلِيلًا — the analysis of the word

The root خ-ل-ل: the gap between things, an interval. Khilāl — an interval; khalal — a gap, a deficiency. And khalīl — according to what the lexicographers record, the friend whose friendship has worked its way into a person's inner gaps.

This concrete sense of the word is worth recording: friendship is drawn as something that fills the gaps.

And the word ḥanīf must be recorded: the root ح-ن-ف — to incline towards one direction, to lean. The root was treated at al-Rūm 30/30 and in al-Baqara. I rely on those treatments.


4/127

ويستفتونك في النساء قل الله يفتيكم فيهن وما يتلى عليكم في الكتاب في يتامى النساء اللاتي لا تؤتونهن ما كتب لهن وترغبون أن تنكحوهن والمستضعفين من الولدان وأن تقوموا لليتامى بالقسط

Wa yastaftūnaka fi'l-nisāʾ, quli'llāhu yuftīkum fīhinna wa mā yutlā ʿalaykum fi'l-kitābi fī yatāma'l-nisāʾi'llātī lā tuʾtūnahunna mā kutiba lahunna wa targhabūna an tankiḥūhunna wa'l-mustaḍʿafīna mina'l-wildāni wa an taqūmū li'l-yatāmā bi'l-qisṭ

"They ask you for a ruling concerning women. Say: God gives you a ruling concerning them — and so does what is recited to you in the Book: concerning the orphan girls to whom you do not give what has been prescribed for them and whom you desire to marry, concerning the children who have been made weak, and concerning your standing by the orphans in equity."

A return to the sūra's first block

This verse returns to the second and third verses of the sūra, and this was recorded in the introductory section. I rely on that.

And the detail of the return must be recorded: the verse counts three items, and all three come from the sūra's first block.

ItemWordingIts counterpart in the first block
1Yatāma'l-nisāʾlā tuʾtūnahunna mā kutiba lahunn4/2-3 — the property and marriage of orphan girls
2Al-mustaḍʿafīna mina'l-wildān4/9dhurriyyatan ḍiʿāfan
3An taqūmū li'l-yatāmā bi'l-qisṭ4/3allā tuqsiṭū fi'l-yatāmā

Three items, tied back to three separate verses. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra.

وَٱلْمُسْتَضْعَفِينَ مِنَ ٱلْوِلْدَٰنِ — the word's third occurrence

The word occurs for the third time in this sūra: at the seventy-fifth, ninety-eighth and hundred and twenty-seventh verses.

VerseWho is countedContext
75Al-rijāl, al-nisāʾ, al-wildānThe ground for war
98Al-rijāl, al-nisāʾ, al-wildānThe acceptance of an excuse
127Only al-wildānA ruling

And it must be recorded that in the third occurrence the list narrows: only children are named. This is a countable fact.

أَن تَقُومُوا۟ لِلْيَتَٰمَىٰ بِٱلْقِسْطِ — and the preparation for the hundred and thirty-fifth verse

And the last clause of the verse must be recorded, because it carries the words of a sentence that will come eight verses later.

VerseSentence
127An taqūmū li'l-yatāmā bi'l-qisṭ
135Kūnū qawwāmīna bi'l-qisṭ

In both sentences the root ق-و-م and the root ق-س-ط stand side by side. This is a countable fact.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the words the two verses share: the sūra builds the same command first for orphans and then for everyone. The hundred and thirty-fifth verse is the generalised form of the sentence in the hundred and twenty-seventh.


4/128-130

وإن امرأة خافت من بعلها نشوزا أو إعراضا فلا جناح عليهما أن يصلحا بينهما صلحا والصلح خير وأحضرت الأنفس الشح … · ولن تستطيعوا أن تعدلوا بين النساء ولو حرصتم فلا تميلوا كل الميل فتذروها كالمعلقة وإن تصلحوا وتتقوا فإن الله كان غفورا رحيما · وإن يتفرقا يغن الله كلا من سعته

Wa ini'mraʾatun khāfat min baʿlihā nushūzan aw iʿrāḍan fa-lā junāḥa ʿalayhimā an yuṣliḥā baynahumā ṣulḥā, wa'l-ṣulḥu khayr, wa uḥḍirati'l-anfusu'l-shuḥḥ … · Wa lan tastaṭīʿū an taʿdilū bayna'l-nisāʾi wa law ḥaraṣtum, fa-lā tamīlū kulla'l-mayli fa-tadharūhā ka'l-muʿallaqa, wa in tuṣliḥū wa tattaqū fa-inna'llāha kāna Ghafūran Raḥīmā · Wa in yatafarraqā yughni'llāhu kullan min saʿatih

"If a woman fears nushūz or turning away from her husband, there is no fault upon the two of them in setting things right between themselves by a settlement. And settlement is better. Souls are prone to grasping… You will never be able to deal equitably among women, however much you desire it. So do not incline wholly to one side and leave the other as though suspended. If you set things right and are mindful, God is forgiving, merciful. And if they part, God will enrich each of them out of His abundance."

One: نُشُوز — reading it together with 4/34

This verse uses the same root as the thirty-fourth, and the symmetry was set out in a table in the discussion of the thirty-fourth and thirty-fifth verses. I rely on that and do not repeat the table.

What belongs here are two things not found in the thirty-fourth verse:

WhatWordingIn the thirty-fourth verse
A second wordNushūzan aw iʿrāḍāAbsent — only nushūz
Who does the fearingImraʾatun khāfat — the woman herselfTakhāfūna — those addressed

Iʿrāḍ — root ع-ر-ض: to turn aside, to turn one's face away. The root was treated at al-Aḥzāb 33/72, and it was recorded there: "Iʿrāḍ — turning away (turning aside)." I rely on that treatment.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the wording of the verse: the hundred and twenty-eighth verse adds a second word to the word in the thirty-fourth and describes the situation in two items.

Two: وَٱلصُّلْحُ خَيْرٌ — a sentence of three words

The root ص-ل-ح occurs four times in this sūra as a remedy, and the table was given in the discussion of the hundred and fourteenth verse. I rely on that.

What belongs here is the form of the sentence: wa'l-ṣulḥu khayr — three words, a nominal sentence.

In Arabic a nominal sentence states continuance and fixity; a verbal sentence states a coming-to-be. That the sentence is built as a nominal sentence shows that it states not an observation about a situation but a principle.

And the sentence's place in the sūra must be recorded: it is the second row of the trio set out in a table in the discussion of the twenty-fifth verse (wa an taṣbirū khayrun lakumwa'l-ṣulḥu khayrin tubdū khayran aw tukhfūhu aw taʿfū ʿan sūʾin). I rely on that.

Three: وَأُحْضِرَتِ ٱلْأَنفُسُ ٱلشُّحَّ — the analysis of the word

The root ش-ح-ح: miserliness; and the distinction the lexicographers record is this — bukhl is not giving what one has, while shuḥḥ is that with greed added to it.

And the pattern of the verb must be recorded: uḥḍirat — passive, Form IV. The sentence, that is, does not say "souls are miserly"; it says "grasping has been brought close to souls".

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the passive pattern of the verb: the sentence sets up not an accusation but an observation — and the observation stands immediately after the call to settlement.

What the verse does, that is, is this: it proposes agreement, then names by its name the thing that makes agreement hard.

Four: وَلَن تَسْتَطِيعُوٓا۟ أَن تَعْدِلُوا۟ — a comparison with 4/3

This comparison was set out in a table in the discussion of the third verse, under the heading "Seven: 4/3 together with 4/129". I rely on that and do not repeat the table here.

Two things belong here.

One. What the table looks like seen from this side — I keep it short and rest only on the wording:

4/34/129
SentenceFa-in khiftum allā taʿdilū fa-wāḥidaWa lan tastaṭīʿū an taʿdilū bayna'l-nisāʾi wa law ḥaraṣtum
MoodConditionalLan — the strongest negation of the future
Added qualificationWa law ḥaraṣtum — however much you desire it
OutcomeFa-wāḥidaFa-lā tamīlū kulla'l-mayl

In the discussion of the third verse three tendencies (a, b, c) on how the two verses are to be reconciled were given in a table, and none of them was preferred. That record holds here too.

Two. The hundred and twenty-ninth verse's own measure must be recorded separately.

Having stated the impossibility, the verse gives a command: fa-lā tamīlū kulla'l-mayl.

And the word order must be recorded: what is forbidden is not inclining but inclining wholly. Kulla'l-mayl — an absolute object; "the whole of the inclining".

I record this as an observation about word order: the verse does not ask of a person what he cannot do; it sets a limit he can keep.

And the root م-ي-ل occurs for the second time in the sūra. In the twenty-seventh verse there was maylan ʿaẓīmā, and it was tabled there (27 and 129). I rely on that.

Five: كَٱلْمُعَلَّقَةِ — the picture in the word

The root ع-ل-ق: to hang on to something, to cling. ʿAlaq — what hangs, what clings; taʿlīq — to hang up.

Al-muʿallaqa — passive participle: hung up, left suspended.

And the picture in the word must be recorded: neither come down to the ground nor up above; caught in between.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the pattern of the word: the verse names the state of being neither married nor separated with a single word. And it says that this is a harm by making the word the ground of a prohibition.

Six: وَإِن يَتَفَرَّقَا يُغْنِ ٱللَّهُ كُلًّا مِّن سَعَتِهِۦ — the close of the block

The verse does not close off the possibility of separation either, and it enters a record.

And the root و-س-ع occurs for the third time in the sūra:

VerseWordWhose wideness
97WāsiʿaThe earth's
100SaʿaWhat the migrant will find
130Min saʿatihWhat will be given to the two who part

The same root in three verses, and in all three a possibility of a way out. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the table above: the sūra shows the person hemmed in a wideness, in three separate contexts and with the same word — a homeland, a road, and a livelihood.

What this says to the present

One. The hundred and twenty-eighth verse begins the dispute with the woman's own fear: imraʾatun khāfat. And it ties the remedy not to a sanction but to an agreement between the two parties.

Two. The sentence uḥḍirati'l-anfusu'l-shuḥḥ does not lay the obstacle to agreement upon one of the parties; it uses the plural: al-anfus.

Three. The word ka'l-muʿallaqa counts the leaving of a relationship undecided plainly as a harm. The verse names a state that chooses neither to continue nor to end as a matter in its own right.


4/131-134

ولله ما في السماوات وما في الأرض ولقد وصينا الذين أوتوا الكتاب من قبلكم وإياكم أن اتقوا الله … · من كان يريد ثواب الدنيا فعند الله ثواب الدنيا والآخرة وكان الله سميعا بصيرا

Wa li'llāhi mā fi's-samāwāti wa mā fi'l-arḍ, wa laqad waṣṣayna'lladhīna ūtu'l-kitāba min qablikum wa iyyākum ani'ttaqu'llāh … · Man kāna yurīdu thawāba'l-dunyā fa-ʿinda'llāhi thawābu'l-dunyā wa'l-ākhira, wa kāna'llāhu Samīʿan Baṣīrā

"To God belongs whatever is in the heavens and whatever is on the earth. We enjoined upon those given the Book before you, and upon you, that you be mindful of God… Whoever wants the reward of this world — with God is the reward of this world and of the hereafter. God is Hearing, Seeing."

وَصَّيْنَا — a link with the sūra's first block

The root و-ص-ي occurred at the eleventh and twelfth verses of this sūra (yūṣīkumu'llāh, waṣiyya) and was treated there. I rely on that treatment.

VerseWordSubject
11Yūṣīkumu'llāhu fī awlādikumInheritance
131Waṣṣayna'lladhīna ūtu'l-kitāba … wa iyyākumMindfulness of God

The same root, once for the division of property and once for mindfulness of God.

And that in the hundred and thirty-first verse the address is made to both parties at once must be recorded: alladhīna ūtu'l-kitāba min qablikum wa iyyākum.

This is in the same direction as the qualification in the hundred and twenty-third verse (laysa bi-amāniyyikum wa lā amāniyyi ahli'l-kitāb): the same thing is said to both parties at once. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra and is the textual ground of the method's rule against sweeping rulings.

ثَوَابَ ٱلدُّنْيَا وَٱلْـَٔاخِرَةِ — the form of the answer

The root ث-و-ب: to return, to come back. Thawb — a garment (what returns to the body); thawāb — the return that comes back for what one has done.

And the form of the sentence must be recorded: the question is about "one who wants the reward of this world"; the answer names both together.

QuestionAnswer
Man kāna yurīdu thawāba'l-dunyāFa-ʿinda'llāhi thawābu'l-dunyā wa'l-ākhira

I record this as an observation about word order: the sentence does not reject the wanting; it says that the wanting has been kept too narrow.


4/135

يا أيها الذين آمنوا كونوا قوامين بالقسط شهداء لله ولو على أنفسكم أو الوالدين والأقربين إن يكن غنيا أو فقيرا فالله أولى بهما فلا تتبعوا الهوى أن تعدلوا وإن تلووا أو تعرضوا فإن الله كان بما تعملون خبيرا

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū kūnū qawwāmīna bi'l-qisṭi shuhadāʾa li'llāhi wa law ʿalā anfusikum awi'l-wālidayni wa'l-aqrabīn, in yakun ghaniyyan aw faqīran fa'llāhu awlā bihimā, fa-lā tattabiʿu'l-hawā an taʿdilū, wa in talwū aw tuʿriḍū fa-inna'llāha kāna bimā taʿmalūna Khabīrā

"O you who believe! Be upholders of equity, witnesses for God, even against yourselves or your parents and near kin. Whether a man be rich or poor, God is closer to them both. So do not follow desire, and so swerve from justice. And if you twist your words or turn away, God is aware of what you do."

This verse will be treated in detail

This verse opens the sūra's thirteenth block and is the sharpest sentence in the sūra's discussion of justice.

One: كُونُوا۟ قَوَّٰمِينَ بِٱلْقِسْطِ — the analysis of the words

The word qawwām and the فَعَّال pattern were set out in a table in the discussion of the thirty-fourth and thirty-fifth verses, resting on al-Māʾida 5/8. I rely on that and do not repeat it.

The record made there must be carried over here:

"That is, a qawwām is not 'one who acts justly on one occasion' but one who makes it his business to keep justice standing. The command asks not for a behaviour but for a character. And the verb's coming as kūnū (be) supports this: not 'do' but 'be'."

The root ق-س-ط was treated in detail at al-Ḥujurāt 49/9 and summarised at al-Māʾida 5/8. The records made there:

"Its primary sense is a portion, a share; and from there, giving a portion in full. Qisṭ — a share; muqsiṭ — one who gives shares rightly. The interesting side of the root: in Form IV (aqsaṭa) it conveys acting justly, while in its bare form (qasaṭa) it conveys acting wrongfully — it is one of the instances of aḍdād."
"ʿAdl is the picture of scales and looks to the whole; qisṭ is the picture of a share and looks to a party."

I rely on those treatments.

And the occurrences of the word qisṭ in this sūra must be recorded:

VerseWordingSubject
3Allā tuqsiṭū fi'l-yatāmāOrphans
127An taqūmū li'l-yatāmā bi'l-qisṭOrphans
135Kūnū qawwāmīna bi'l-qisṭEveryone

The same root in three verses, and the first two concern orphans. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as my own reading: the sūra uses the word for justice first for the most unprotected group, then generalises it.

Two: a comparison with al-Māʾida 5/8 — the same words, the order reversed

There is another, very similar form of this command in the Qurʾān, and when the two sentences are set side by side an exchange of places becomes visible. This comparison was made at al-Māʾida 5/8, and I carry it over here.

PlaceSentence
al-Nisāʾ 4/135Kūnū qawwāmīna bi'l-qisṭi shuhadāʾa li'llāh
al-Māʾida 5/8Kūnū qawwāmīna li'llāhi shuhadāʾa bi'l-qisṭ

The two phrases have changed places: bi'l-qisṭ and li'llāh have taken one another's position. This is a countable fact.

Two explanations of this difference were set out in a table at al-Māʾida 5/8, and I carry them over as they stand:

ExplanationHow
FirstIn each verse the element placed first answers to the real difficulty of that verse. In bearing witness against one's kin what is hard is justice itself, and so bi'l-qisṭ is placed first in al-Nisāʾ; in bearing witness in favour of an enemy what is hard is that the intention be for God, and so li'llāh is placed first in al-Māʾida
SecondThe two sentences complete one another; the difference of order is a difference of emphasis, and the two verses together give both the ground and the measure of justice

As there, so here I impose no preference. And the record entered there holds here too: that the second explanation is the safer of the two so far as the text goes was added as my own reading; its ground is that the same four elements are present in both verses.

And the continuations of the two verses must be compared too, because the ground of the explanations lies there:

al-Nisāʾ 4/135al-Māʾida 5/8
What makes justice hardClosenessanfusikum, al-wālidayn, al-aqrabīnHatredshanaʾānu qawm
DirectionSwerving in favour of one's own sideSwerving against the other side
ClosingInna'llāha kāna bimā taʿmalūna KhabīrāInna'llāha Khabīrun bimā taʿmalūn

And it must be recorded that the closings are almost identical: both verses end with an attribute from the root خ-ب-ر. At al-Māʾida 5/8 it was recorded of this root: "The root خ-ب-ر conveys knowing the inside of a thing, its hidden side; khabīr is one who knows not the outside but the inside." I rely on that treatment.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the table above: the two verses close off the two opposite directions in which justice breaks down, and both end with the same attribute — because in both the breaking down takes place inside.

Three: وَلَوْ عَلَىٰٓ أَنفُسِكُمْ — the sequence itself

The verse counts three items, and the order must be recorded:

OrderWordingWho
1ʿAlā anfusikumYourselves
2Awi'l-wālidaynParents
3Wa'l-aqrabīnNear kin

And the order is the reverse of the list in the thirty-sixth verse. There the list began with the parents and widened outward; here it begins with oneself and widens outward — but this time against.

VerseOrderDirection
36Parents → near kin → … → those under one's handIn favour — kindness
135Oneself → parents → near kinAgainst — testimony

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the comparison of the two lists: the sūra counts out the same circles of closeness twice — once as the address of kindness, once as the place where justice will be tested.

And the word al-arḥām should be recalled: the sūra's first verse set the tie of kinship beside mindfulness of God. The hundred and thirty-fifth verse says that this tie cannot take precedence over justice.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the word the two verses share (al-aqrabīn / al-arḥām): the sūra both keeps the tie and limits it — the tie it asks to be kept is not a reason for favour in testimony.

Four: إِن يَكُنْ غَنِيًّا أَوْ فَقِيرًا فَٱللَّهُ أَوْلَىٰ بِهِمَا

The verse closes off a second cause of swerving too: the material condition of the parties.

And the form of the sentence must be recorded: both possibilities are counted — ghaniyyan aw faqīrā.

I record this as an observation about word order: the verse takes in not only currying favour with the rich but bending out of pity for the poor. Both directions in a single sentence.

And the ground must be recorded: fa'llāhu awlā bihimā — "God is closer to them both". Neither the power of the rich nor the condition of the poor, that is, counts as information that should determine the judgement.

Five: أَن تَعْدِلُوا۟ — a disagreement of word order

The sentence is this: fa-lā tattabiʿu'l-hawā an taʿdilū.

Two readings of this construction are transmitted in the classical commentaries:

ReadingHow it understands itIts ground
AAn taʿdilū"so as to swerve from justice"; that is, "do not follow desire, and so swerve"The use of the root ع-د-ل in this context; the sentence as a whole
BA negation is understood: allā taʿdilū — "in a way that would lead to injustice"Instances of such ellipsis in Arabic

Both readings are transmitted; I impose no preference. And both arrive at the same place: following desire breaks justice.

Hawā — root ه-و-ي: to fall, to come down; and from there, to incline, to want. At the root of the word there is a going downward, and this is worth recording as a matter of word choice.

Six: وَإِن تَلْوُۥٓا۟ أَوْ تُعْرِضُوا۟ — two verbs

The verse counts two ways in which justice breaks down, and both are verbs:

VerbRootWhat it is
Talwūل-و-يTo twist — to bend one's words
Tuʿriḍūع-ر-ضTo turn away — not to speak at all

The root ل-و-ي occurs for the second time in this sūra: in the forty-sixth verse there was layyan bi-alsinatihim, and it was treated there. I rely on that treatment.

The root ع-ر-ض also occurs several times in the sūra (16, 63, 81, 94, 128). In the hundred and twenty-eighth verse iʿrāḍ stated a turning away from a relationship.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the standing of the two verbs side by side: the verse describes the breaking down of testimony in two separate ways — saying it wrongly and not saying it at all. The second is counted as plainly as the first.

What this says to the present

One. The verse counts three causes that break justice, and all three produce partiality: closeness, material condition and desire. And against all three the same thing is set: shuhadāʾa li'llāh.

Two. The qualification wa law ʿalā anfusikum stands first in the list. The verse begins from the nearest possibility of favour.

Three. That keeping silent is counted as a form of breaking down too (aw tuʿriḍū) sets testimony up as an obligation. The same field was treated at al-Baqara 2/283 as well (wa lā taktumu'l-shahāda). I rely on that treatment.


4/136-139

يا أيها الذين آمنوا آمنوا بالله ورسوله والكتاب الذي نزل على رسوله والكتاب الذي أنزل من قبل … · إن الذين آمنوا ثم كفروا ثم آمنوا ثم كفروا ثم ازدادوا كفرا لم يكن الله ليغفر لهم … · الذين يتخذون الكافرين أولياء من دون المؤمنين أيبتغون عندهم العزة فإن العزة لله جميعا

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū āminū bi'llāhi wa rasūlihī wa'l-kitābi'lladhī nazzala ʿalā rasūlihī wa'l-kitābi'lladhī anzala min qabl … · Inna'lladhīna āmanū thumma kafarū thumma āmanū thumma kafarū thumma'zdādū kufran lam yakuni'llāhu li-yaghfira lahum … · Alladhīna yattakhidhūna'l-kāfirīna awliyāʾa min dūni'l-muʾminīn, a-yabtaghūna ʿindahumu'l-ʿizzata fa-inna'l-ʿizzata li'llāhi jamīʿā

"O you who believe! Believe in God, in His Messenger, in the Book He has sent down upon His Messenger, and in the Book He sent down before… Those who believe, then deny, then believe, then deny, then increase in denial — God will not forgive them… Those who take the deniers as allies instead of the believers — is it honour they seek with them? All honour belongs to God."

First, a note on method — and this note holds for 136-152

This block describes a group, and per the method (Method) the description is read thus: what is at issue is not a group but a series of acts.

And this is not an interpretation but the verses' own construction:

VerseWordingWhat it states
137Āmanū thumma kafarū thumma āmanū thumma kafarūA process — verbs are set out in order
139Alladhīna yattakhidhūna'l-kāfirīna awliyāʾaA behaviour
142Wa idhā qāmū ila'ṣ-ṣalāti qāmū kusālāA state
146Illa'lladhīna tābū wa aṣlaḥūAn exception — the door is open

The fourth row must be recorded separately: the hundred and forty-sixth verse writes out plainly the way out of the description. The verses, that is, themselves block a sweeping generalisation.

This field was treated in detail in al-Munāfiqūn, and I rely on that treatment. The frame established there was this: the matter is not the truth of the statement but the speaker's relation to what he says.

آمَنُوا۟ ثُمَّ كَفَرُوا۟ — four steps and a fifth

The hundred and thirty-seventh verse sets out five verbs with thumma. And in Arabic thumma states a sequence with intervals: there is time between the verbs.

OrderVerb
1Āmanū
2Thumma kafarū
3Thumma āmanū
4Thumma kafarū
5Thumma'zdādū kufrā

And it must be recorded that the fifth step differs from those before it: what is named is not a going back and forth but an increase.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the pattern of the fifth verb (izdād — Form VIII, to increase): the verse counts as the last step not the going back and forth itself but the settling in one direction.

The same field was treated at al-Munāfiqūn 63/3 (āmanū thumma kafarū fa-ṭubiʿa ʿalā qulūbihim) and was set out there in a table under the heading "the four steps of a process". I rely on that treatment.

ٱلْعِزَّة — the analysis of the word

The root ع-ز-ز: that a thing be hard, firm, out of reach. Arḍun ʿazāz — hard ground. From there comes the sense of superiority, invincibility.

And the form of the sentence must be recorded: the verse asks a question (a-yabtaghūna ʿindahumu'l-ʿizza) and gives the answer in a sentence of restriction: fa-inna'l-ʿizzata li'llāhi jamīʿā — "all honour belongs to God."

The word jamīʿā is set there as an emphasis. And at al-Munāfiqūn 63/8 the same word occurs as a claim from the other side: la-yukhrijanna'l-aʿazzu mina'l-adhall. Two sūras use the same root in two different mouths.


4/140-141

وقد نزل عليكم في الكتاب أن إذا سمعتم آيات الله يكفر بها ويستهزأ بها فلا تقعدوا معهم حتى يخوضوا في حديث غيره إنكم إذا مثلهم … · الذين يتربصون بكم فإن كان لكم فتح من الله قالوا ألم نكن معكم

Wa qad nazzala ʿalaykum fi'l-kitābi an idhā samiʿtum āyāti'llāhi yukfaru bihā wa yustahzaʾu bihā fa-lā taqʿudū maʿahum ḥattā yakhūḍū fī ḥadīthin ghayrih, innakum idhan mithluhum … · Alladhīna yatarabbaṣūna bikum fa-in kāna lakum fatḥun mina'llāhi qālū a-lam nakun maʿakum

"It has already been sent down to you in the Book: when you hear God's verses being denied and mocked, do not sit with them until they pass to some other talk; otherwise you are like them… Those who wait to see what happens to you: if a victory comes to you from God they say, 'were we not with you?'"

al-Anʿām 6/68 — the same ruling in two sūras

The most striking side of this verse is that the ruling is found in another sūra as well, and that the verse says so itself: wa qad nazzala ʿalaykum fi'l-kitāb — "it has already been sent down to you in the Book."

And the verse at al-Anʿām 6/68 is this:

وَإِذَا رَأَيْتَ ٱلَّذِينَ يَخُوضُونَ فِىٓ ءَايَٰتِنَا فَأَعْرِضْ عَنْهُمْ حَتَّىٰ يَخُوضُوا۟ فِى حَدِيثٍ غَيْرِهِۦ "When you see those who talk idly about Our verses, turn away from them until they pass to some other talk." (al-Anʿām 6/68)

I set the two verses side by side:

al-Anʿām 6/68al-Nisāʾ 4/140
What triggers itRaʾaytawhen you seeSamiʿtumwhen you hear
Who is addressedSingular — fa-aʿriḍPluralfa-lā taqʿudū
The commandAʿriḍ ʿanhum — turn awayLā taqʿudū maʿahumdo not sit with them
The limitḤattā yakhūḍū fī ḥadīthin ghayrihḤattā yakhūḍū fī ḥadīthin ghayrih
Added qualificationInnakum idhan mithluhum

And the fourth row must be recorded separately: the clause of limit is word for word identical in the two sūras. This is a countable fact.

What was recorded for this limit at al-Anʿām 6/68 must be carried over here:

"And the limit of the command is worth recording: ḥattā yakhūḍū fī ḥadīthin ghayrih — until they pass to some other talk. I record this as my own reading: the turning away is not without term; it is tied to the subject. And it is tied not to persons but to what is being said. That is, the separation is not set up as a permanent break."

I rely on that treatment and keep that record here too. This is a textual ground for the method's rule against sweeping rulings: the command is tied not to a person but to a subject.

And the qualification al-Nisāʾ adds must be recorded: innakum idhan mithluhum — "then you are like them".

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the difference between the two verses: the command in al-Anʿām states a turning away; the command in al-Nisāʾ counts the sitting together itself as a taking part. Al-Nisāʾ adds the ground of the ruling.

يَتَرَبَّصُونَ — the analysis of the word

The root ر-ب-ص: to watch and wait for something to happen. Tarabbuṣ (Form V) — to wait and watch for an opportunity.

And the word order of the verse must be recorded: both possibilities are counted, and in each the words spoken are given.

CaseWhat is said
In kāna lakum fatḥun mina'llāhA-lam nakun maʿakum — were we not with you
Wa in kāna li'l-kāfirīna naṣībA-lam nastaḥwidh ʿalaykum wa namnaʿkum mina'l-muʾminīn

And the word naṣīb occurs here for the seventh time in the sūra. The word's distribution in the sūra will be set out in a table in the concluding section.

I record this as an observation about word order: the verse describes a disposition by two separate sayings in the face of two opposite outcomes. The description is tied not to a person but to the changing of the words.


4/142-147

إن المنافقين يخادعون الله وهو خادعهم وإذا قاموا إلى الصلاة قاموا كسالى … · مذبذبين بين ذلك لا إلى هؤلاء ولا إلى هؤلاء · … إن المنافقين في الدرك الأسفل من النار … · إلا الذين تابوا وأصلحوا واعتصموا بالله وأخلصوا دينهم لله فأولئك مع المؤمنين · ما يفعل الله بعذابكم إن شكرتم وآمنتم

Inna'l-munāfiqīna yukhādiʿūna'llāha wa huwa khādiʿuhum wa idhā qāmū ila'ṣ-ṣalāti qāmū kusālā … · Mudhabdhabīna bayna dhālika lā ilā hāʾulāʾi wa lā ilā hāʾulāʾ · … Inna'l-munāfiqīna fi'l-darki'l-asfali mina'l-nār … · Illa'lladhīna tābū wa aṣlaḥū wa'ʿtaṣamū bi'llāhi wa akhlaṣū dīnahum li'llāhi fa-ulāʾika maʿa'l-muʾminīn · Mā yafʿalu'llāhu bi-ʿadhābikum in shakartum wa āmantum

"They seek to deceive God, but it is He who turns their deceit back upon them. When they rise to prayer they rise sluggishly… Wavering between the two, neither to these nor to those… The hypocrites are in the lowest depth of the Fire… Except those who repent, set things right, hold fast to God and make their religion purely for God: these are with the believers… Why should God punish you, if you are grateful and believe?"

مُذَبْذَبِينَ — the picture in the word

ذ-ب-ذ-ب — a four-letter root with reduplication. The lexicographers explain the word as a thing swinging to both sides, hanging and being tossed about.

And the pattern of the word must be recorded: mudhabdhab is a passive participle — that is, not one who swings but one who is swung.

And the continuation of the sentence completes the picture: lā ilā hāʾulāʾi wa lā ilā hāʾulāʾ — "neither to these nor to those".

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the pattern of the word together with the structure of the sentence: the verse describes standing between two sides not as a position but as a state of irresolution.

And this picture has a counterpart within the sūra: ka'l-muʿallaqa (left suspended) in the hundred and twenty-ninth verse.

VerseWordWho is left hanging
129Ka'l-muʿallaqaThe wife — the party left hanging
143MudhabdhabīnThe person himself — between two directions

Both words build the picture of "being caught in between". I record this as an observation about word order; I set up no link of ruling between the two verses.

ٱلدَّرْكِ ٱلْأَسْفَلِ — the analysis of the word

The root د-ر-ك: to overtake, to reach — and from there darak, a step descending downwards.

And it must be recorded that this is the root's third occurrence in the sūra: at the seventy-eighth verse there was yudrikkumu'l-mawt, at the hundredth yudrikhu'l-mawt. Here the same root returns as a noun.

إِلَّا ٱلَّذِينَ تَابُوا۟ وَأَصْلَحُوا۟ — the four items of the exception

The hundred and forty-sixth verse describes the way out of the description with four verbs:

OrderVerbWhat it is
1TābūTo turn back
2AṣlaḥūTo set right
3Iʿtaṣamū bi'llāhTo hold fast
4Akhlaṣū dīnahum li'llāhTo make purely for God

And the second item must be recorded: the root ص-ل-ح occurs in this sūra for the fifth time. The root's distribution in the sūra was set out in a table in the discussion of the hundred and fourteenth verse; this row is added to it.

Iʿtaṣamū — root ع-ص-م: to hold a thing, to protect, to hold back. ʿIṣma — being protected. Form VIII: to hold fast.

And the form of the return must be recorded: fa-ulāʾika maʿa'l-muʾminīn — "these are with the believers".

This is the same structure as in the sixty-ninth verse (fa-ulāʾika maʿa'lladhīna anʿama'llāhu ʿalayhim). In both places the sūra gives the return as a companionship.

مَّا يَفْعَلُ ٱللَّهُ بِعَذَابِكُمْ — the form of the question

The hundred and forty-seventh verse is a question, and it closes the block.

And the structure of the question must be recorded: after a heavy description comes a sentence asking why punishment should be needed.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the place of the sentence: the block closes not with a threat but with the possibility of the threat being lifted. And the condition has two items: in shakartum wa āmantum.

And the verse-ending must be recorded: wa kāna'llāhu Shākiran ʿAlīmā — the root ش-ك-ر is used in the same verse both of the servant and of God. This is a countable fact.


4/148-152

لا يحب الله الجهر بالسوء من القول إلا من ظلم … · إن تبدوا خيرا أو تخفوه أو تعفوا عن سوء فإن الله كان عفوا قديرا · … الذين يفرقون بين الله ورسله … · والذين آمنوا بالله ورسله ولم يفرقوا بين أحد منهم أولئك سوف يؤتيهم أجورهم

Lā yuḥibbu'llāhu'l-jahra bi's-sūʾi mina'l-qawli illā man ẓulim … · In tubdū khayran aw tukhfūhu aw taʿfū ʿan sūʾin fa-inna'llāha kāna ʿAfuwwan Qadīrā · … Alladhīna yufarriqūna bayna'llāhi wa rusulihī … · Wa'lladhīna āmanū bi'llāhi wa rusulihī wa lam yufarriqū bayna aḥadin minhum ulāʾika sawfa yuʾtīhim ujūrahum

"God does not like the open utterance of evil speech — except by one who has been wronged… Whether you make a good deed known, or hide it, or pardon an evil — God is pardoning, powerful… Those who make a separation between God and His messengers… And those who believe in God and His messengers and make no distinction between any of them — to these He will give their rewards."

إِلَّا مَن ظُلِمَ — the place of the exception

The verse lays down a prohibition and immediately opens an exception: illā man ẓulim — "except one who has been wronged".

And there is disagreement in the classical commentaries over what the exception covers:

ReadingWhat the exception coversIts ground
AThat the one wronged should state his situationThe sense of the word jahr as "to say openly"
BThat he should pray against the one who wronged himThat the sentence concerns sūʾ (evil speech)
CThat he should make the wrong done to him known to another, that he should complainThe general use of the word

All three readings are transmitted; I impose no preference and draw no legal ruling from this.

What can be said from the text is this, and it is an observation about word order: while forbidding the open utterance of evil speech, the verse leaves a door open for the one who has been harmed. The exception is in the same sentence as the prohibition.

إِن تُبْدُوا۟ خَيْرًا أَوْ تُخْفُوهُ أَوْ تَعْفُوا۟ عَن سُوٓءٍ — three possibilities

The verse counts three things, and the return for all three is given with the same verse-ending: inna'llāha kāna ʿAfuwwan Qadīrā.

OrderVerbWhat it is
1Tubdū khayrāTo make known a good deed
2Aw tukhfūhTo hide a good deed
3Aw taʿfū ʿan sūʾTo pardon an evil

And the choice of the verse-ending must be recorded: the verse sets the attributes ʿAfuww (much-pardoning) and Qadīr (able) side by side.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the coming together of the two attributes: pardoning means something when it is done while one has the power, not because one lacks it. The verse-ending is a measure set beside the third item.

And this verse is the last row of the trio set out in a table in the discussion of the twenty-fifth verse (wa an taṣbirū khayrun lakumwa'l-ṣulḥu khayrin tubdū khayran aw tukhfūhu aw taʿfū ʿan sūʾin). I rely on that.

يُفَرِّقُونَ بَيْنَ ٱللَّهِ وَرُسُلِهِۦ — and the sentence set over against it

The root ف-ر-ق: to separate, to divide.

And the verses give a disposition and its exact opposite one after the other:

VerseWordingWho
150Yufarriqūna bayna'llāhi wa rusulihwa yurīdūna an yattakhidhū bayna dhālika sabīlāThose who separate
152Wa lam yufarriqū bayna aḥadin minhumThose who do not separate

The same verb, once affirmative and once negative, two verses apart. This is a countable fact.

And the hundred and fifty-second verse coincides with the hundred and thirty-sixth of the same sūra: there too the things to be believed in were counted out one by one (God, the messenger, the Book, the earlier Book). The block opens with an enumeration and closes with one.

And the same expression occurs at al-Baqara 2/285 (lā nufarriqu bayna aḥadin min rusulih), and there it is a sentence of prayer. The same construction in two sūras: one a statement, the other an utterance.


4/153-159

يسألك أهل الكتاب أن تنزل عليهم كتابا من السماء … · فبما نقضهم ميثاقهم وكفرهم بآيات الله وقتلهم الأنبياء بغير حق وقولهم قلوبنا غلف … · وبكفرهم وقولهم على مريم بهتانا عظيما · وقولهم إنا قتلنا المسيح عيسى ابن مريم رسول الله وما قتلوه وما صلبوه ولكن شبه لهم … وما قتلوه يقينا · بل رفعه الله إليه

Yasʾaluka ahlu'l-kitābi an tunazzila ʿalayhim kitāban mina's-samāʾ … · Fa-bimā naqḍihim mīthāqahum wa kufrihim bi-āyāti'llāhi wa qatlihimu'l-anbiyāʾa bi-ghayri ḥaqqin wa qawlihim qulūbunā ghulf … · Wa bi-kufrihim wa qawlihim ʿalā Maryama buhtānan ʿaẓīmā · Wa qawlihim innā qatalna'l-Masīḥa ʿĪsa'bna Maryama rasūla'llāh, wa mā qatalūhu wa mā ṣalabūhu wa lākin shubbiha lahum … wa mā qatalūhu yaqīnā · Bal rafaʿahu'llāhu ilayh

"The People of the Book ask you to bring down upon them a book from heaven… For their breaking of their pledge, their denial of God's signs, their killing of the prophets without right, and their saying 'our hearts are wrapped up'… And for their denial and their speaking a great slander against Mary (Maryam)… And for their saying, 'we killed the Messiah, Jesus (ʿĪsā) son of Mary, the messenger of God'. But they did not kill him and did not crucify him; it was made to appear so to them… They did not kill him with certainty. Rather, God raised him to Himself."

First, a note on method — that the rulings are tied to acts

Per the method (Method) this block is read thus: what is at issue are acts, not a community itself. And this is not an interpretation but the verse's own word order.

The hundred and fifty-fifth verse is a list of causes, and every item comes with the particle bi-. The table gives the wording of the verse:

OrderWordingWhat it is
1Bimā naqḍihim mīthāqahumBreaking a pledge
2Wa kufrihim bi-āyāti'llāhDenying the signs
3Wa qatlihimu'l-anbiyāʾa bi-ghayri ḥaqqKilling the prophets
4Wa qawlihim qulūbunā ghulfSaying a thing
5Wa qawlihim ʿalā Maryama buhtānan ʿaẓīmā (156)Uttering a slander
6Wa qawlihim innā qatalna'l-Masīḥ (157)Uttering a claim

All six of the six items are tied to an act or to an utterance. This is a countable fact.

And the verses themselves narrow in two places:

WordingWhat it does
Fa-lā yuʾminūna illā qalīlā (155)An exception
Lākini'l-rāsikhūna fi'l-ʿilmi minhum (162)A section is set apart from within the same community

No general ruling is made in this commentary about any religious, ethnic or national group. What is at issue are attributes; whoever bears the attribute is included in it. And the two rows above are the textual ground of that rule.

قُلُوبُنَا غُلْفٌ — the analysis of the word

The root غ-ل-ف: to put a thing into a covering. Ghilāf — a sheath, a covering.

The word occurs at al-Baqara 2/88 as well (wa qālū qulūbunā ghulf), and there too the same utterance is related. Two sūras relate the same utterance.

And the verse's answer must be recorded: bal ṭabaʿa'llāhu ʿalayhā bi-kufrihim — "no, God has set a seal upon them for their denial".

I record this as an observation about word order: in the sentence bi-kufrihim stands as a ground. The seal, that is, is named not as something that comes first but as following upon an act.

And the same pattern was treated at al-Munāfiqūn 63/3 (āmanū thumma kafarū fa-ṭubiʿa ʿalā qulūbihim), where the importance of the sequence was recorded under the heading "the seal". I rely on that treatment.

بُهْتَٰنًا عَظِيمًا — for the third time in the sūra

The word occurs in this sūra for the third time.

VerseConstructionSubject
20Buhtānan wa ithman mubīnāThe taking back of a bridal gift
112Buhtānan wa ithman mubīnāSlandering an innocent person
156Buhtānan ʿaẓīmāWhat was said about Mary

Three occurrences: a countable fact. And the analysis of the word was given in the discussion of the hundred and twelfth verse (resting on al-Nūr 24/11-20). I rely on that.

And one link must be recorded: Sūrat al-Nūr is likewise a discussion of slander, and there too what was said about a woman is the subject. Al-Nisāʾ 4/156 names the same act in another context.

وَمَا قَتَلُوهُ وَمَا صَلَبُوهُ وَلَٰكِن شُبِّهَ لَهُمْ — a table of the disagreement

First a note on method: no speculation is entered into about this verse in this section, and no preference is imposed.

And the reason is the verse's own sentence. The verse does not recount how the event happened; it says that there is no knowledge about the event:

WordingWhat it says
Wa inna'lladhīna'khtalafū fīhi la-fī shakkin minhThose who differ about it are in doubt
Mā lahum bihī min ʿilminThey have no knowledge
Illa'ttibāʿa'l-ẓannThey follow only conjecture
Wa mā qatalūhu yaqīnāThey did not kill him with certainty

All four of the four items concern knowledge. This is a countable fact.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the table above: the verse's own stress is not to supply an alternative account but to state that the claim does not rest on knowledge. To go into detail would run against the verse's own qualification.

Nevertheless there is disagreement in the classical commentaries over the expression shubbiha lahum, and it must not be concealed. I put it in a table; I impose no preference, I give no details and no names, and none of it is binding.

ReadingWhat shubbiha lahum statesIts ground
AIt was made to appear so to them; what they saw was not what they supposedThat the verb is passive (shubbiha) and that its object is lahum (to them)
BThe matter was confused for them; no certainty arose about the event itselfThe qualifications la-fī shakkin minh and mā lahum bihī min ʿilm in the continuation of the verse
CThe verse merely rejects the claim, giving no detail; the manner is not explainedThat the verse gives no detail; that the word yaqīnā belongs to the field of knowledge

All three readings are transmitted. I prefer none of them, and nothing definite is said in this commentary about the manner.

بَل رَّفَعَهُ ٱللَّهُ إِلَيْهِthe root ر-ف-ع: to raise. There is disagreement in the classical literature over the manner of this expression as well; its details are not entered into in this commentary and no preference is imposed.

وَإِن مِّنْ أَهْلِ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ إِلَّا لَيُؤْمِنَنَّ بِهِۦ قَبْلَ مَوْتِهِۦ — a disagreement over pronouns

In the hundred and fifty-ninth verse there are two pronouns, and disagreement is transmitted in the classical commentaries over what each of them refers to.

ReadingTo whom bihī refersWhose death mawtihī is
ATo JesusEach individual of the People of the Book — his own death
BTo JesusThe death of Jesus
CTo the Prophet or to the BookThe person's own death

The readings are transmitted; I impose no preference and draw no conclusion from them.


4/160-162

فبظلم من الذين هادوا حرمنا عليهم طيبات أحلت لهم وبصدهم عن سبيل الله كثيرا · وأخذهم الربا وقد نهوا عنه وأكلهم أموال الناس بالباطل … · لكن الراسخون في العلم منهم والمؤمنون يؤمنون بما أنزل إليك وما أنزل من قبلك والمقيمين الصلاة والمؤتون الزكاة والمؤمنون بالله واليوم الآخر أولئك سنؤتيهم أجرا عظيما

Fa-bi-ẓulmin mina'lladhīna hādū ḥarramnā ʿalayhim ṭayyibātin uḥillat lahum wa bi-ṣaddihim ʿan sabīli'llāhi kathīrā · Wa akhdhihimu'l-ribā wa qad nuhū ʿanhu wa aklihim amwāla'l-nāsi bi'l-bāṭil … · Lākini'l-rāsikhūna fi'l-ʿilmi minhum wa'l-muʾminūna yuʾminūna bimā unzila ilayka wa mā unzila min qablik, wa'l-muqīmīna'ṣ-ṣalāta wa'l-muʾtūna'l-zakāta wa'l-muʾminūna bi'llāhi wa'l-yawmi'l-ākhir, ulāʾika sa-nuʾtīhim ajran ʿaẓīmā

"For the wrongdoing of those who became Jews, and for their barring many from the way of God, We forbade them good things that had been lawful for them. And for their taking usury, though they had been forbidden it, and for their consuming people's property by false means… But those among them who are deeply grounded in knowledge, and the believers, believe in what has been sent down to you and what was sent down before you. Those who keep up the prayer, who give the alms, who believe in God and the Last Day — to these We shall give a great reward."

The causes tied again to acts

The hundred and sixtieth and hundred and sixty-first verses also build a list of causes, and each item comes again with the particle bi-:

OrderWordingAct
1Bi-ẓulminWrongdoing
2Wa bi-ṣaddihim ʿan sabīli'llāhi kathīrāBarring
3Wa akhdhihimu'l-ribā wa qad nuhū ʿanhTaking what had been forbidden
4Wa aklihim amwāla'l-nāsi bi'l-bāṭilConsuming property by false means

And the fourth item must be recorded: the construction is in exactly the same field as the sūra's twenty-ninth verse.

VerseWordingTo whom it is said
29Lā taʾkulū amwālakum baynakum bi'l-bāṭilTo those addressed — a prohibition
161Wa aklihim amwāla'l-nāsi bi'l-bāṭilOf the group described — a cause

The same verb and the same qualification bi'l-bāṭil, at the two ends of the sūra. This is a countable fact.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the wording the two verses share: the act the sūra counts as a cause in the case of one group it had also forbidden to those it addresses. The measure, that is, is the same for both sides — and this is a textual ground for the method's rule against sweeping rulings.

لَٰكِنِ ٱلرَّٰسِخُونَ فِى ٱلْعِلْمِ مِنْهُمْ — the place where the distinction is made

Rāsikh — root ر-س-خ: to be firmly settled, to take root. The picture in the word is a thing settled so firmly that it will not shift from its place.

And the qualification minhum must be recorded separately: "of them". The distinction, that is, is made from within the community.

I bring this forward separately, because here the method's rule about attributes is being established by the text itself.

وَٱلْمُقِيمِينَ ٱلصَّلَوٰةَ — a point of case-inflection

There is a grammatical detail in the verse, and it is dwelt on in the classical literature.

The items listed in the sentence are in the nominative (al-rāsikhūn, al-muʾminūn, al-muʾtūn, al-muʾminūn), but one item comes in the accusative: al-muqīmīna'ṣ-ṣalāta.

Different tendencies are transmitted in the classical literature of grammar on the explanation of this difference:

ExplanationHow
AIt is the style of specification (ikhtiṣāṣ) / praise (madḥ): an item is drawn out of the flow of the sentence and put in the accusative for praise. It is a known usage in Arabic
BThe word is coordinated with an earlier item and takes its case from there

Both explanations are transmitted; I impose no preference.

And what must be recorded as a datum of the text is this: of the five items counted in the sentence only one carries this difference, and that item is prayer. This is a countable fact.


4/163-166

إنا أوحينا إليك كما أوحينا إلى نوح والنبيين من بعده … · ورسلا قد قصصناهم عليك من قبل ورسلا لم نقصصهم عليك وكلم الله موسى تكليما · رسلا مبشرين ومنذرين لئلا يكون للناس على الله حجة بعد الرسل

Innā awḥaynā ilayka kamā awḥaynā ilā Nūḥin wa'l-nabiyyīna min baʿdih … · Wa rusulan qad qaṣaṣnāhum ʿalayka min qablu wa rusulan lam naqṣuṣhum ʿalayk, wa kallama'llāhu Mūsā taklīmā · Rusulan mubashshirīna wa mundhirīna li-allā yakūna li'l-nāsi ʿala'llāhi ḥujjatun baʿda'l-rusul

"We have revealed to you as We revealed to Noah (Nūḥ) and to the prophets after him… We sent messengers whose story We have recounted to you before, and messengers whose story We have not recounted to you. And God spoke to Moses directly. Messengers bearing good news and warning, so that after the messengers people should have no argument against God."

وَرُسُلًا لَّمْ نَقْصُصْهُمْ عَلَيْكَ — a qualification left open

The verse counts separately the messengers whose story is recounted and those whose story is not.

And it must be recorded that this produces a note on method: the text says plainly that what it recounts is not the whole.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the sentence itself: the wording of the verse also closes off talking about those not recounted — to give details about something announced as not recounted would be to add to the text.

لِئَلَّا يَكُونَ لِلنَّاسِ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ حُجَّةٌۢ — the form of the ground

Ḥujja — root ح-ج-ج: to head in a direction, to make for; and from there, a proof. The root was treated at al-Anʿām 6/80, al-Jāthiya 45/25 and Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) 40/47. I rely on those treatments.

And the direction of the ground must be recorded: messengers are sent so that people should be left with no argument.

I record this as an observation about word order: the sentence ties the reason for the sending to the position of those addressed. And the qualification baʿda'l-rusul says that the argument can fall away only after a messenger.


4/167-170

إن الذين كفروا وصدوا عن سبيل الله قد ضلوا ضلالا بعيدا … · يا أيها الناس قد جاءكم الرسول بالحق من ربكم فآمنوا خيرا لكم وإن تكفروا فإن لله ما في السماوات والأرض

Inna'lladhīna kafarū wa ṣaddū ʿan sabīli'llāhi qad ḍallū ḍalālan baʿīdā … · Yā ayyuha'l-nāsu qad jāʾakumu'l-rasūlu bi'l-ḥaqqi min rabbikum fa-āminū khayran lakum, wa in takfurū fa-inna li'llāhi mā fi's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍ

"Those who deny and bar others from the way of God have strayed far into error… O mankind! The Messenger has brought you the truth from your Lord. Believe; it is better for you. And if you deny — to God belongs whatever is in the heavens and the earth."

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلنَّاسُ — the return of the address

This address returns here for the first time since the first verse of the sūra, and it will come once more in the hundred and seventy-fourth.

VerseAddressSubject
1Yā ayyuha'l-nāsCreation from a single soul, mindfulness of God, kinship
170Yā ayyuha'l-nāsThe Messenger's bringing the truth
174Yā ayyuha'l-nāsBurhān and nūr mubīn

Three occurrences: a countable fact. And the sūra's widest address stands at its beginning and at its end.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the distribution of the address: the sūra has thus placed all the rulings in between two wide addresses.

فَـَٔامِنُوا۟ خَيْرًا لَّكُمْ — word order

Different explanations of the case of the construction khayran lakum are transmitted in the literature of grammar; it is widely said to be attached to an elided verb. I do not go into the details.

What belongs here is this: the return is set beside the command. And this is a pattern repeated in the sūra: in the twenty-fifth verse wa an taṣbirū khayrun lakum, in the hundred and twenty-eighth wa'l-ṣulḥu khayr, in the forty-sixth la-kāna khayran lahum wa aqwam.

In four places the same word stands beside a command or an alternative. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra.


4/171-173

يا أهل الكتاب لا تغلوا في دينكم ولا تقولوا على الله إلا الحق إنما المسيح عيسى ابن مريم رسول الله وكلمته ألقاها إلى مريم وروح منه … ولا تقولوا ثلاثة انتهوا خيرا لكم … · لن يستنكف المسيح أن يكون عبدا لله ولا الملائكة المقربون · فأما الذين آمنوا وعملوا الصالحات فيوفيهم أجورهم ويزيدهم من فضله

Yā ahla'l-kitābi lā taghlū fī dīnikum wa lā taqūlū ʿala'llāhi illa'l-ḥaqq, innama'l-Masīḥu ʿĪsa'bnu Maryama rasūlu'llāhi wa kalimatuhū alqāhā ilā Maryama wa rūḥun minhu … wa lā taqūlū thalātha, intahū khayran lakum … · Lan yastankifa'l-Masīḥu an yakūna ʿabdan li'llāhi wa la'l-malāʾikatu'l-muqarrabūn · Fa-amma'lladhīna āmanū wa ʿamilu'ṣ-ṣāliḥāti fa-yuwaffīhim ujūrahum wa yazīduhum min faḍlih

"O People of the Book! Do not go beyond the bound in your religion, and say nothing about God but the truth. The Messiah, Jesus son of Mary, is only the messenger of God, and His word which He conveyed to Mary, and a spirit from Him… Do not say 'three'; stop, it is better for you… The Messiah does not disdain to be a servant of God, nor do the angels brought near. As for those who believe and do righteous deeds, He will pay them their rewards in full and give them more of His bounty."

First, a note on method

No ruling about a community is established in this block. What is at issue is a claim, and the verse itself frames it so:

WordingWhat it does
taqūlū ʿala'llāhi illa'l-ḥaqqA saying is forbidden
Wa lā taqūlū thalāthaAn utterance is made the subject
Intahū khayran lakumA call — and its return set beside it

All three of the three items are tied to an utterance and to an act. And the command intahū (stop) shows that the door is left open.

غُلُوّ — the root غ-ل-و

The concrete sense of the root must be recorded, because it carries the whole weight of the word: ghalā — for a thing to exceed its measure and its worth.

The family of senses that follows from this:

WordSenseThe link
غَلَا (ghalā)Its price rose, it became dearThe concrete sense
غَلَاء (ghalāʾ)Dearness
غَلَا بِٱلسَّهْمTo shoot an arrow beyond the targetA usage the lexicographers record
غُلُوّ (ghuluww)To exceed the bound, to cross the limit
غَالِي (ghālī)One who goes to excess

And the example of the arrow is worth recording: the word states not a failure to reach the target but an overshooting of it.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the concrete sense of the root: ghuluww is the worth given to a thing exceeding that thing's own measure. The word, that is, points upward in direction — not a diminishing but an over-raising.

And the same address occurs once more at al-Māʾida 5/77: yā ahla'l-kitābi lā taghlū fī dīnikum ghayra'l-ḥaqq. The same command in two sūras, and almost the same wording. This is a countable fact.

PlaceWordingAdded qualification
al-Nisāʾ 4/171Lā taghlū fī dīnikumWa lā taqūlū ʿala'llāhi illa'l-ḥaqq
al-Māʾida 5/77Lā taghlū fī dīnikumGhayra'l-ḥaqq

In both verses the word ḥaqq is set beside the prohibition. The measure, that is, is given by the verse itself: the opposite of exceeding the bound is speaking the truth.

عَبْدًا لِّلَّهِ — and Maryam 19/30 with 19/88-93

And now comes the strongest datum of the text in this discussion.

The hundred and seventy-second verse is this: lan yastankifa'l-Masīḥu an yakūna ʿabdan li'llāh.

Yastankif — root ن-ك-ف: to shrink from a thing, to hold back from it as beneath oneself.

And the same word was treated in two separate places in Maryam. I carry those records over here.

The first, from the discussion of 19/30:

"The first word of the sentence must be recorded: innī ʿabdu'llāh — 'I am the servant of God.' I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the structure of the sūra: in the eighty-eighth verse the sūra will take up the claim wa qālu'ttakhadha'l-Raḥmānu waladā. And the first word out of the mouth of the person who is the subject of that claim is ʿabd."

The second, from the discussion of 19/88-95:

"In the thirtieth verse of the sūra Jesus's first words were innī ʿabdu'llāh. The ninety-third verse applies the same word to everyone without exception.the answer to the claim is given in the words of the very person the claim is about, and is then generalised."

I rely on both records. And setting the three verses side by side now gives a weave between two sūras that can be verified:

PlaceWordingWho says it / whom it covers
Maryam 19/30Innī ʿabdu'llāhJesus — he says it himself
Maryam 19/93In kullu man fi's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍi illā āti'l-Raḥmāni ʿabdāEveryone — without exception
al-Nisāʾ 4/172Lan yastankifa'l-Masīḥu an yakūna ʿabdan li'llāhi wa la'l-malāʾikatu'l-muqarrabūnThe Messiah and the angels brought near

In all three verses the same word: ʿabd. This is a countable fact.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the table above: Sūrat Maryam gives the answer in the person's own words and then generalises it; al-Nisāʾ gives the same answer as the rejection of a shrinking back, and sets the angels beside him. The three verses look in the same direction, and in all three the word does not change.

كَلِمَتُهُۥٓوَرُوحٌ مِّنْهُ — a record

The verse uses two expressions: kalimatuhū alqāhā ilā Maryam and rūḥun minh.

Explanations of the manner of these two expressions are transmitted in the classical commentaries; their details are not entered into in this commentary and no preference is imposed.

What can be said from the text is this: the preposition min here states in Arabic not a part but a source — and this is widely recorded in the classical commentaries. I relate this record as it is transmitted.

And the verse's own closing lays down a measure: subḥānahū an yakūna lahū walad.


4/174-175

يا أيها الناس قد جاءكم برهان من ربكم وأنزلنا إليكم نورا مبينا · فأما الذين آمنوا بالله واعتصموا به فسيدخلهم في رحمة منه وفضل ويهديهم إليه صراطا مستقيما

Yā ayyuha'l-nāsu qad jāʾakum burhānun min rabbikum wa anzalnā ilaykum nūran mubīnā · Fa-amma'lladhīna āmanū bi'llāhi wa'ʿtaṣamū bihī fa-sa-yudkhiluhum fī raḥmatin minhu wa faḍlin wa yahdīhim ilayhi ṣirāṭan mustaqīmā

"O mankind! A burhān has come to you from your Lord, and We have sent down to you a clear light. As for those who believe in God and hold fast to Him, He will admit them into a mercy from Himself and a bounty, and will guide them to Himself by a straight path."

بُرْهَٰن — the analysis of the word

ب-ر-ه-ن — it is counted a four-letter root; the lexicographers also debate its relation to ب-ر-ه and do not agree on any settled derivation. Nothing definite is said in this commentary about the origin of the word.

On its meaning, however, they agree: a decisive and binding proof.

The word occurs at al-Qaṣaṣ 28/75 as well (hātū burhānakum), and there it is used as a demand.

PlaceWordingWho to whom
al-Qaṣaṣ 28/75Hātū burhānakumIt is demanded
al-Nisāʾ 4/174Qad jāʾakum burhānun min rabbikumIt is given

The same word, once a demand and once a response. I record this as an observation about word order.

وَٱعْتَصَمُوا۟ بِهِۦ — for the second time in the sūra

The root ع-ص-م had occurred in this sūra at the hundred and forty-sixth verse too (wa'ʿtaṣamū bi'llāh) and was treated there. I rely on that treatment.

VerseWhoContext
146Those who come out of the descriptionAn exception
175Those who believeThe closing

The same verb, in two separate places in the sūra, and in both a holding fast.


4/176

يستفتونك قل الله يفتيكم في الكلالة إن امرؤ هلك ليس له ولد وله أخت فلها نصف ما ترك وهو يرثها إن لم يكن لها ولد فإن كانتا اثنتين فلهما الثلثان مما ترك وإن كانوا إخوة رجالا ونساء فللذكر مثل حظ الأنثيين يبين الله لكم أن تضلوا والله بكل شيء عليم

Yastaftūnak, quli'llāhu yuftīkum fi'l-kalālah, ini'mruʾun halaka laysa lahū waladun wa lahū ukhtun fa-lahā niṣfu mā tarak, wa huwa yarithuhā in lam yakun lahā walad, fa-in kānata'thnatayni fa-lahuma'l-thuluthāni mimmā tarak, wa in kānū ikhwatan rijālan wa nisāʾan fa-li'l-dhakari mithlu ḥaẓẓi'l-unthayayn, yubayyinu'llāhu lakum an taḍillū, wa'llāhu bi-kulli shayʾin ʿAlīm

"They ask you for a ruling. Say: God gives you a ruling concerning kalāla. If a man dies leaving no child but having a sister, hers is half of what he leaves; and he inherits from her if she has no child. If there are two sisters, theirs is two-thirds of what he leaves. If they are brothers and sisters, men and women, then to the male the like of the share of two females. God makes it clear to you, lest you go astray. God knows all things."

First, a note on method — and this note is not binding

From this verse arose one of the most technical discussions in classical jurisprudence. That discussion is not entered into in this section and no legal ruling is issued.

This record was entered in the discussion of the sūra's eleventh verse as well ("First, a note on method — and this note holds for the whole of the eleventh, twelfth and hundred and seventy-sixth verses") and I rely on that. A summary of what was written there:

  • The shares are put in a table only from the verse's own wording.
  • The debates over reckoning — what is to be done when the shares exceed or fall short of the whole — are not entered into.
  • The differences among the schools of law are not the subject of this text.
  • The table below is not a fatwā and cannot be read as a guide to practice. It is not binding.

The shares that follow from the verse's wording — a table

The table gives the verse's own clauses in order. Nothing outside the verse's wording has been added to the table.

Case (the verse's wording)The share the verse gives
Ini'mruʾun halaka laysa lahū waladun wa lahū ukhtunFa-lahā niṣfu mā tarak — half of what he leaves
Wa huwa yarithuhā in lam yakun lahā waladThe brother inherits from her — no amount stated
Fa-in kānata'thnatayniFa-lahuma'l-thuluthāni mimmā tarak — two-thirds
Wa in kānū ikhwatan rijālan wa nisāʾanFa-li'l-dhakari mithlu ḥaẓẓi'l-unthayayn

And one thing visible in the table must be recorded: the verse counts four cases and gives an explicit fraction in three of them, and not in one. This is a countable fact.

كَلَٰلَة — the word's second occurrence

The word occurred at the twelfth verse of this sūra as well, and was treated there in detail under the heading "كَلَٰلَة — the analysis of the word". I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it.

What belongs here is this: the word occurs twice in the sūra, and both times in the context of inheritance.

VerseWordingSubject
12Wa in kāna rajulun yūrathu kalālatan awi'mraʾatunA brother or a sister — a sixth
176Yuftīkum fi'l-kalālaA sister (or sisters) and siblings

The difference between the two verses must be recorded, and it is a datum of the text: in the twelfth verse a share is given for a single sibling; in the hundred and seventy-sixth several cases are counted. How this difference is to be reconciled is a matter of classical jurisprudence and is not the subject of this text.

حَظّ — the word's second occurrence

The root ح-ظ-ظ was treated at the eleventh verse. I rely on that treatment.

And the construction mithlu ḥaẓẓi'l-unthayayn occurs for the second time in the sūra: at the eleventh and hundred and seventy-sixth verses. This is a countable fact.

The records entered in the discussion of the eleventh verse hold here too, and I do not repeat them.

يُبَيِّنُ ٱللَّهُ لَكُمْ أَن تَضِلُّوا۟ — the closing sentence

The last sentence of the sūra is a sentence of ground, and its word order must be recorded.

Two explanations of the case of the construction an taḍillū are transmitted in the literature of grammar:

ExplanationHow
AA negation is understood: an lā taḍillū — "so that you may not go astray"
BKarāhata an taḍillū is understood — "because your going astray is not wanted"

Both explanations are transmitted and both arrive at the same place. I impose no preference.

And the choice of the verb must be recorded: yubayyinu — from the root ب-ي-ن, "to make clear, to separate one thing from another".

And this coincides with the sūra's twenty-sixth verse: yurīdu'llāhu li-yubayyina lakum. The same verb occurs in the middle of the sūra as a statement of will and at its end as a ground.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the verb the two verses share: the sūra says twice why its rulings are laid down — and on both occasions the answer is to make clear.

On the sūra's last sentence

The sūra closes with a fatwā: yastaftūnak.

And the observation recorded in the introductory section is completed here:

"The most striking side of the structure is that the sūra's closing section opens with a fatwā and closes with a fatwā. The hundred and twenty-seventh verse begins wa yastaftūnaka fi'l-nisāʾ and names the orphan girls; the hundred and seventy-sixth begins yastaftūnaka and gives the ruling on kalāla."

I rely on that.

And the second observation is completed here too:

"The sūra opens with the word al-arḥām (the ties of kinship) (1) and closes with the discussion of kalāla — the estate of a person who leaves neither child nor father (176)."

The sūra's last ruling ties the share of the person who leaves behind neither child nor father to his siblings. The tie, that is, is not cut even at its thinnest point; it is carried one ring further out.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the wording of the verse.


The sūra as a whole — looking back

This section looks back over a hundred and seventy-six verses and gathers what can be counted in the sūra. All the tables below are data of the text: the words and their places can be counted. Sentences that are interpretation have been marked as such.

One. Repetitions within the sūra — words and constructions

The table below gathers the meaningful repetitions that occur in two or more places in the sūra.

Word / constructionThe verses where it occursWhat it does
نَصِيب (naṣīb)7 (twice), 32 (twice), 33, 85, 141A share; the sūra's most frequently returning word for a right
نَصِيبًا مَّفْرُوضًا7, 118The same construction: once a right, once a claim to seize
بُهْتَان20, 112, 156The slander that freezes; in 20 and 112 the construction is word for word identical
ص-ل-ح (iṣlāḥ / ṣulḥ)16, 35, 114, 128, 146In all five places a setting right of a breach
ق-و-م5, 34, 46, 103, 127, 135Qiyām, qawwām, aqwam, qiyāman, taqūmū, qawwāmīn
ض-ع-ف9, 28, 75, 98, 127Weakness as a state, as a nature and as a wrong done
و-س-ع97, 100, 130The wideness of the earth, of migration and of separation
نُشُوز34, 128One the woman's, one the man's
ش-ق-ق35, 115Shiqāq — between spouses; yushāqiq — breaking with the Messenger
م-ي-ل27, 129Maylan ʿaẓīmā / kulla'l-mayl
ر-ض-و (consent)4, 24, 29In all three, mutual consent
م-ن-ي (tamannī / amāniyy)32, 119, 120, 123Prohibition, prompting, rejection
د-ر-ك78, 100, 145Death overtaking (twice), darak
يُبَيِّتُونَ81, 108Words contrived by night
يَكْتُمُونَ37, 42Concealing / being unable to conceal
إِلَّا مَا قَدْ سَلَفَ22, 23The leaving of the past outside
لَا يَغْفِرُ أَن يُشْرَكَ بِهِۦ48, 116The very same sentence, two different parties addressed
The return given with مَعَ69, 146Maʿa'lladhīna anʿama'llāh / maʿa'l-muʾminīn
وَلِيًّانَصِيرًا45, 75One a statement, one a prayer
The threefold enumeration ٱلْمُسْتَضْعَفِين75, 98, 127Al-rijāl, al-nisāʾ, al-wildān
خَيْر (beside a command)25, 46, 128, 149, 170The "better" set beside a ruling
ج-ن-ب31, 36, 103Keeping away, nearness, the body
أَمْوَالبِٱلْبَٰطِلِ29, 161The same verb: once a prohibition to those addressed, once in a list of causes
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلنَّاسُ1, 170, 174The sūra's widest address: at the beginning and at the end
يَسْتَفْتُونَكَ127, 176Two questions asking for a ruling
كَلَٰلَة12, 176Two discussions of inheritance
مِثْلُ حَظِّ ٱلْأُنثَيَيْنِ11, 176Word for word the same construction
يُبَيِّنُ / لِيُبَيِّنَ26, 176The ground of the rulings: to make clear
The words for the smallest measure40 (dharra), 77 (fatīl), 124 (naqīr)All three for the absence of injustice
أُو۟لِى ٱلْأَمْرِ59, 83Obedience / where news is to be taken
ٱعْتَصَمُوا۟146, 175Two holdings fast
ح-ك-م (ḥakam / ḥukm)35, 58, 59, 60, 65, 105The sūra's weave of adjudication

Two. The places where the two parties are counted separately

There are three places in the sūra where, in giving a right or a return, the two parties are named separately, and all three build the same structure.

VerseSubjectWording
7InheritanceLi'l-rijāli naṣībun mimmā tarak … wa li'l-nisāʾi naṣībun mimmā tarak
32EarningsLi'l-rijāli naṣībun mimma'ktasabū wa li'l-nisāʾi naṣībun mimma'ktasabna
124The return for one's deedsWa man yaʿmal mina'ṣ-ṣāliḥāti min dhakarin aw unthā

And the arrangement of arbitrators in the thirty-fifth verse carries the same structure: ḥakaman min ahlihī wa ḥakaman min ahlihā.

This is a countable fact.

Three. The places where the sūra leaves a door open

At every heavy place where it lays down a ruling, the sūra leaves a way out or a qualification of relief. The table below gathers these and rests on the wording.

VerseRulingWhat is set beside it
16A penaltyFa-in tābā wa aṣlaḥā fa-aʿriḍū ʿanhumā
25A permissionWa an taṣbirū khayrun lakum
26-28A list of prohibitionsYurīdu'llāhu an yukhaffifa ʿankum
34-35Three stepsFa-lā tabghū ʿalayhinna sabīlāarbitrationiṣlāḥ
43A prohibitionFa-tayammamū and inna'llāha kāna ʿAfuwwan Ghafūrā
90A rulingFa-mā jaʿala'llāhu lakum ʿalayhim sabīlā
92An obligationFa-man lam yajid fa-ṣiyāmu shahrayni mutatābiʿayn
98-99An interrogationIlla'l-mustaḍʿafīnʿasa'llāhu an yaʿfuwa ʿanhum
128A disputeWa'l-ṣulḥu khayr
129An impossibilityFa-lā tamīlū kulla'l-mayl — only the whole of it is forbidden
146A descriptionIlla'lladhīna tābū wa aṣlaḥū
147A threatMā yafʿalu'llāhu bi-ʿadhābikum in shakartum wa āmantum
149A permissionAw taʿfū ʿan sūʾ
171A prohibitionIntahū khayran lakum

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the table above: in fourteen separate places the sūra does the same thing — it lays down the ruling and leaves a door beside it. This is the same line recorded in the section on divorce in al-Baqara, and I rely on that treatment.

Four. The places where the sūra blocks a sweeping generalisation

In this sūra the method's rule that "no sweeping ruling is made about a group" is established by the text itself. The table below gathers the verses' own narrowings.

VerseWordingWhat it does
44, 51Alladhīna ūtū naṣīban mina'l-kitāb"Those given a share" — an indefinite section
46Mina'lladhīna hādūMin — a particle stating a part
46, 155Fa-lā yuʾminūna illā qalīlāAn exception
81, 113Ṭāʾifatun minhum"A group of them"
90Three separate exceptionsThose who do not fight, who keep away, who offer peace
123Laysa bi-amāniyyikum wa lā amāniyyi ahli'l-kitābThe same measure to both parties
131Alladhīna ūtu'l-kitāba min qablikum wa iyyākumThe same charge to both parties
140Ḥattā yakhūḍū fī ḥadīthin ghayrihThe command is tied to the subject, not to a person
146Illa'lladhīna tābū wa aṣlaḥūA way out
155-157, 160-161Every item tied by the particle bi- to an actThe ruling is tied to an act
161Wa aklihim amwāla'l-nāsi bi'l-bāṭilAn act forbidden to those addressed too at 4/29
162Lākini'l-rāsikhūna fi'l-ʿilmi minhumA distinction from within the community

I record this separately: not one of the twelve rows above is a qualification added by this commentary; all of them are the verses' own wording.

Five. The disagreements on which no preference is adopted — the full list

The table below gathers the disagreements given in tables in this sūra, none of which is preferred. None of them is binding.

VerseThe subject of the disagreementHow many tendencies
1Min nafsin wāḥida and wa khalaqa minhā zawjahāIn a table
3The link between the condition and its answer; allā taʿūlū; the relation between 4/3 and 4/129In a table
4The sense of the word niḥlaIn a table
5The pronoun in amwālakumIn a table
8The character of the rulingIn a table
9Whom the verse addressesIn a table
24Fa-ma'stamtaʿtum bihī minhunnIn a table
29Lā taqtulū anfusakum — three readings3
33Alladhīna ʿaqadat aymānukum — who3
34Bimā faḍḍala'llāhu baʿḍahum ʿalā baʿḍ3
34Qānitāt — towards whom directed2
34The readings of the three stepsIn a table, with their grounds
35In yurīdā — who wills2
36Al-ṣāḥib bi'l-janb — who3
42Law tusawwā bihimu'l-arḍ2
59Ulu'l-amr — who4
78-79The tension between two verses4
93Khālidan fīhā4
100Murāgham2
135The case of the construction an taʿdilū2
148Illā man ẓulim — the scope of the exception3
157Shubbiha lahum3
159What the pronouns refer to3
162Al-muqīmīna'ṣ-ṣalāh — its case2
176An taḍillū — its case2

In none of the places counted in this table has a preference been imposed.

Six. Grounds within the Qurʾān — references given outside this sūra

The places where this section relies on other sūra files are given below. In each of them the record in the relevant file has not been repeated but relied upon.

SubjectThe place relied uponThe verse in al-Nisāʾ
The concept of amāna and the disagreement over ital-Aḥzāb 33/7258
Tanāzuʿ and the chain of consequencesal-Anfāl 8/4659
Mustaḍʿaf — the sense of the patternal-Qaṣaṣ 28/4-575, 98, 127
Mustaḍʿaf — in the past tenseal-Anfāl 8/2675, 94
Affliction and the barrier against generalisingal-Shūrā 42/3078-79, 88
Tadabbur — the root and the patternMuḥammad 47/2482
Tadabbur — as the ground of the sending downṢād 38/2982
The wideness of the earth and migrational-Zumar 39/1097-100
The wideness of the earth — in the first personal-ʿAnkabūt 29/5697-100
The distinction between ifk, buhtān and kidhb, and the practice of naming no oneal-Nūr 24/11-20105-113, 156
The addresses of spendingal-Baqara 2/177, 2/21536
Qawwām, qisṭ, ʿadlal-Māʾida 5/834, 135
Keeping away from talk that mocksal-Anʿām 6/68140
The distance between a word and the one who speaks ital-Munāfiqūn 63/1-360, 136-147
The word ʿabd and ghuluwwMaryam 19/30, 19/88-93171-172
Taḥrīfal-Baqara 2/7546
"A label does not save"al-Baqara 2/62123
Tabayyunal-Ḥujurāt 49/694
Ṭāghūtal-Naḥl 16/3651, 60
Burhān — as a demandal-Qaṣaṣ 28/75174

Seven. The line the sūra follows from beginning to end

A reading was recorded in the introductory section, and it is tested here after a hundred and seventy-six verses. That reading was: "Sūrat al-Nisāʾ is built from beginning to end on the right of the one who has no protection."

The table below gives the counterparts of that reading in the second half of the sūra.

WhoVerseWhat is regulated
The woman32, 34-35, 128-130, 176Earnings, dispute, settlement, inheritance
The orphan36, 127The list of kindness; a ruling
The neighbour, the companion on the road, the traveller36Ties outside belonging
The one under one's hand36, 92The end of the list; setting free
The mustaḍʿafūn75, 98, 127The ground for war; the acceptance of an excuse
One who migrates and does not arrive100That the reward does not lapse
The innocent (barīʾ)112The burden of slander
The one testified against135Oneself, parents, near kin
Two parties who separate130Yughni'llāhu kullan min saʿatih
Kalāla176The thinnest point of the tie

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the table above: the sūra does not let go of the person whose right is in someone else's hands in its second half either. And what all ten rows have in common is the same: the person who cannot take his own share for himself.

And the sūra's order of verse-endings carries this line, as was recorded in the introductory section. Three instances from the second half:

VerseCommandVerse-ending
58Deliver trusts to those entitled to them, judge with justiceInna'llāha kāna Samīʿan Baṣīrā
86Return a greeting with a finer oneInna'llāha kāna ʿalā kulli shayʾin Ḥasībā
135Uphold justice even against yourselvesFa-inna'llāha kāna bimā taʿmalūna Khabīrā

In all three verse-endings there is an attribute of hearing, of reckoning, or of knowing the inside. This is the place where the reading established in the introductory section is confirmed at the sūra's close.


Where this section does not speak with certainty

In keeping with this commentary's rule of accuracy, the places in this sūra where nothing definite is said are counted out plainly. What follows is not a deficiency but a record.

One. The places where no legal ruling is issued

From this sūra arose the widest discussions of classical jurisprudence. On none of the following does this text issue a ruling, prefer a school of law, or propose a practice.

VerseThe juristic discussion
3, 129The number of marriages and the legal character of the condition of justice
11-12, 176The reckoning of inheritance; the sum of the shares; the exclusion of heirs
15-16, 25The rulings on penalty and on marriage
23-24The scope of the prohibitions of marriage
34-35The application of the three steps; the binding force of the arrangement of arbitration
43Ablution, the full washing, dry ablution; the scope of the expression lāmastum
92-93Retaliation, blood-money, expiation, the kinds of intent
101-104Travel, the shortening of prayer, the performance of the prayer of fear
128-130The rulings on settlement, separation and maintenance

In all these discussions the disagreements have been transmitted and none has been preferred.

Two. Expressions whose scope is not filled in

VerseExpressionWhy
31Kabāʾir — the great sinsThe verse gives neither a list nor a definition
34Baʿḍahum ʿalā baʿḍThe subject and the object of the sentence are indefinite pronouns
119Fa-la-yughayyirunna khalqa'llāhIts scope is not written in the verse; to fill in the content would be to add to the verse
157Shubbiha lahumThe verse itself says there is no knowledge
158Bal rafaʿahu'llāhu ilayhIts manner is not explained
171Kalimatuhū and rūḥun minhuNo preference is imposed on the manner
163-164Wa rusulan lam naqṣuṣhum ʿalaykThe text itself says what it has not recounted

Three. The places where nothing definite is said about a word's origin

WordVerseRecord
Al-nisāʾThe name of the sūraThe lexicographers agree on no settled derivation
Jibt51There is no agreement on its origin or its meaning
Burhān174Its derivation is disputed; its meaning is agreed
Kalāla12, 176The analysis of the word was given at 4/12; the disagreement was tabled there

Four. Dating and the narratives of the occasions of revelation

As was recorded in the sūra's introductory section: as to which event and which time each verse belongs to, datings I cannot give with certainty have not been given.

And the narratives of the occasions have been related in the language of "it is transmitted", without naming persons. This holds especially in the following places:

VerseWhat is transmitted in the sources
77The difference of period between the command to hold back the hands and the command to fight
88-91A dispute after a battle
94An incident on a journey
105-113A judicial episode — no name was given
127A ruling given in answer to a question

In the discussion of the hundred and fifth to hundred and thirteenth verses the ground for this was written out separately: the block takes as its subject the casting of an offence upon an innocent person; to go into the details of the report would be to do the very thing the verse under treatment forbids.

Five. The debates not entered into

One. Theological polemic. The seventy-eighth and seventy-ninth verses and the ninety-third have been used in classical theological debates. This commentary takes no side in those debates.

Two. Current politics. Today's debates around the fifty-ninth verse (ulu'l-amr), the seventy-fifth (the mustaḍʿafūn) and the discussions of war (71-104) are not the subject of this text.

Three. Current debates around the thirty-fourth verse. How the verse is understood today, how it is answered in this or that legal order, and the social debates around it are not the subject of this text. The disagreement was given with its classical readings and their grounds; no preference was imposed.

Four. General rulings about groups. The verses from the forty-fourth to the fifty-seventh, from the hundred and thirty-sixth to the hundred and fifty-second, and from the hundred and fifty-third to the hundred and seventy-third touch on the history, the acts and a claim of a community. What is at issue are attributes and claims; whoever bears the attribute is included in it. And as was set out in a table under the heading "Four" above, it is the verses themselves that make this narrowing.

Six. The places marked as this section's own reading

In this commentary the sentences that are my own inference were marked "I record this as my own reading" or "I record this as an observation about word order", and the ground of each was given beside it.

None of them is a transmitted report and none of them is binding. Their grounds are the wording of the verses, the roots of the words, and the repetitions that can be counted within the sūra. What is countable and what is interpretation were kept apart throughout the text.


70 sections

  1. al-Nisāʾ 4:1
  2. al-Nisāʾ 4:2
  3. al-Nisāʾ 4:3
  4. al-Nisāʾ 4:4
  5. al-Nisāʾ 4:5
  6. al-Nisāʾ 4:6
  7. al-Nisāʾ 4:7
  8. al-Nisāʾ 4:8
  9. al-Nisāʾ 4:9
  10. al-Nisāʾ 4:10
  11. al-Nisāʾ 4:11
  12. al-Nisāʾ 4:12
  13. al-Nisāʾ 4:13-14
  14. al-Nisāʾ 4:15-16
  15. al-Nisāʾ 4:17-18
  16. al-Nisāʾ 4:19
  17. al-Nisāʾ 4:20-21
  18. al-Nisāʾ 4:22
  19. al-Nisāʾ 4:23
  20. al-Nisāʾ 4:24
  21. al-Nisāʾ 4:25
  22. al-Nisāʾ 4:26-28
  23. al-Nisāʾ 4:29-30
  24. al-Nisāʾ 4:31
  25. al-Nisāʾ 4:32
  26. al-Nisāʾ 4:33
  27. al-Nisāʾ 4:34-35
  28. al-Nisāʾ 4:36
  29. al-Nisāʾ 4:37-39
  30. al-Nisāʾ 4:40-42
  31. al-Nisāʾ 4:43
  32. al-Nisāʾ 4:44-46
  33. al-Nisāʾ 4:47-50
  34. al-Nisāʾ 4:51-57
  35. al-Nisāʾ 4:58
  36. al-Nisāʾ 4:59
  37. al-Nisāʾ 4:60-63
  38. al-Nisāʾ 4:64-70
  39. al-Nisāʾ 4:71-74
  40. al-Nisāʾ 4:75-76
  41. al-Nisāʾ 4:77
  42. al-Nisāʾ 4:78-79
  43. al-Nisāʾ 4:80-81
  44. al-Nisāʾ 4:82
  45. al-Nisāʾ 4:83
  46. al-Nisāʾ 4:84-87
  47. al-Nisāʾ 4:88-91
  48. al-Nisāʾ 4:92-93
  49. al-Nisāʾ 4:94-96
  50. al-Nisāʾ 4:97-100
  51. al-Nisāʾ 4:101-104
  52. al-Nisāʾ 4:105-113
  53. al-Nisāʾ 4:114-115
  54. al-Nisāʾ 4:116-121
  55. al-Nisāʾ 4:122-126
  56. al-Nisāʾ 4:127
  57. al-Nisāʾ 4:128-130
  58. al-Nisāʾ 4:131-134
  59. al-Nisāʾ 4:135
  60. al-Nisāʾ 4:136-139
  61. al-Nisāʾ 4:140-141
  62. al-Nisāʾ 4:142-147
  63. al-Nisāʾ 4:148-152
  64. al-Nisāʾ 4:153-159
  65. al-Nisāʾ 4:160-162
  66. al-Nisāʾ 4:163-166
  67. al-Nisāʾ 4:167-170
  68. al-Nisāʾ 4:171-173
  69. al-Nisāʾ 4:174-175
  70. al-Nisāʾ 4:176